Home

2010 GMC Savana Owner Manual - Dealer e

1. eene 6 102 Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance 6 76 Underbody Maintenance eese 6 102 Wheel Replacement eseeeeseesesese 6 76 Chemical Paint Spotting ssssssse 6 102 Tire Chains ssssee ee etettetene 6 78 Vehicle Identification sssssss 6 103 fa Tire Goes Flat EDU UU A A TET TT 6 79 Vehicle Identification Number VIN TPA 6 103 Changing a Flat Tire ssseeee 6 80 Service Parts Identification Label 6 103 Removing the Spare Tire and Tools 6 81 EI ical S 6 104 Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the ectrica ystem puede ee Spare Tite occorre e OE 6 85 Add On Electrical BSI OIC cae iisas 67104 Secondary Latch System ccccccccsseeeeee 6 92 Headlamp WWITINg isss ssissstisinisseissii iesite ias MEL Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools 6 94 Windshield Wiper FUSES eee 6 10 Spare Tire ice ee ped des ret gea 6 96 Fuses and Circuit Breakers 6 104 Floor Console Fuse Block 6 104 Appearance Care EE 6 96 Engine Compartment Fuse Block 6 106 Interior Cleaning rre cete teen 6 96 i A Fabric Carpet esee 6 97 Capacities and Specifications 6 110 6 2 Service For service and parts needs visit your dealer retailer You will receive genuine GM parts and GM trained
2. ssssssssss 2 29 Airbag Off Switch cesses 2 69 Child Restraints ss 2 30 Passenger Sensing System 2 72 Older Children MTM HORE 2 30 Servicing Your Airbag Equipped Vehicle 2 77 Infants and Young Children 2 33 Adding Equipment to Your Airbag Equipped Child Restraint Systems seeeeese 2 37 je UEM 2 78 Where to Put the Restraint ssseesssssse 2 40 Restraint System Check sssesssss 2 79 Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children Checking the Restraint Systems 2 79 LATCH con X 2 42 Replacing Restraint System Parts After a erc 2 80 2 1 Head Restraints On vehicles with factory installed seats the front seats have built in head restraints that are not adjustable in the outboard seating positions Front Seats Manual Seats A WARNING You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to adjust a manual driver s seat while the vehicle is moving The sudden movement could startle and confuse you or make you push a pedal when you do not want to Adjust the driver s seat only when the vehicle is not moving If the vehicle has a manual seat it can be moved forward or rearward 1 Lift the bar to unlock the seat 2 Slide the seat to the desired position and release the bar Try to move the seat with your body to be sure the
3. 6 72 Tow Haul Mode ceeeeeet eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenees 3 33 Tow Haul Mode Light eeeeeeeeeeeeee eee eee es 4 36 Towing Recreational Vehicle s eseeeeeeeeeeee es 5 22 TOWING a Traller 2 rete rem eie 5 26 Your Vehicle csacsi eterin andene 5 22 Traction StabiliTrak System eeeeeeeeeeee 5 5 Transmission Fluid Automatic eeeeseesee 6 20 6 23 Transmission Operation Automatic 3 26 3 31 Transportation Program Courtesy 8 9 Trip Odometer sssssse 4 22 Turn and Lane Change Signals 4 4 Turn Signal Multifunction Lever s 4 4 13 U Uniform Tire Quality Grading 6 75 Vehicle eji 5 3 Loading ccc aacines acne 5 17 Remote Start viceic ape tieetessacitinacihosecancitetesee stuns 3 6 Running While Parked esses 3 39 sce cd m iv Vehicle Customization DIC ssssssse 4 52 Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy 8 16 Vehicle Identification Number VIN arengana 6 103 Service Parts Identification Label 6 103 Ventilation Adjustment eese 4 17 MIL M 3 20 Voltmeter Gage seR 4 27 14 W Warning Lights Gages and Indicators
4. sees 4 15 Outlet Adjustment sees 4 17 Rear Heating System sss 4 18 Rear Air Conditioning and Heating System 4 19 Warning Lights Gages and Indicators 4 20 Instrument Panel Cluster essssesssse 4 21 Speedometer and Odometer 4 22 Trip Odometer eseA 4 22 Safety Belt Reminders ssssessesse 4 23 Airbag Readiness Light essssssssse 4 23 Airbag Off Light ssseeee 4 24 Passenger Airbag Status Indicator 4 26 Charging System Light ssssesssss 4 27 Voltmeter Gage eeeeeeeenene 4 27 Section 4 Instrument Panel Brake System Warning Light 4 28 Driver Information Center DIC 4 37 Antilock Brake System ABS Warning Light 4 29 DIC Operation and Displays 4 38 StabiliTrak Indicator Light 4 29 DIC COMPASS e ERR TERT 4 43 Engine Coolant Temperature Gage 4 30 DIC Warnings and Messages ssssse 4 44 Tire Pressure Light eesessessse 4 30 DIC Vehicle Customization ssssssse 4 52 Malfunction Indicator Lamp sts 4 31 Audio Systema a cccesutsctesteee thereto 4 59 Oil Pressure Gage eeee 4 34 Setting the CIOCk s
5. 6 3 Accessory POWOr 1 de terra r eere EE 3 23 Accessory Power Outlets eeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 14 Additives Fuel 25 rir irr ttam dor Race EY Yes 6 7 Add On Electrical Equipment 6 104 Air Cleaner Filter Engine esses 6 19 Air Conditioning seee neke ins 4 15 Airbag Adding Equipment to Your Airbag Equipped bd naevus 2 78 Airbag System Airbag Off Switch sianie ni iiaii niena 2 69 How Does an Airbag Restrain 2 66 Passenger Sensing System 2 72 Servicing Your Airbag Equipped Vehicle 2 77 What Makes an Airbag Inflate 2 66 What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates 2 67 When Should an Airbag Inflate 2 65 Where Are the Airbags ssessessess 2 62 Airbags ojo Am 4 24 Passenger Status Indicator 4 26 Readiness Light esee 4 23 System Check eod Leti tie dad v 2 60 All Wheel Drive ccceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeereeees 6 45 All Wheel Drive AWD System ssss 5 7 Antenna Fixed Mast trece reete pes nsbrndedetuspa 4 78 Antilock Brake System ABS ssessss 5 4 Warming Eight 3 eet erepti nist rhe 4 29 Appearance Care Aluminum Wheels seene 6 101 Care of Safety Belts ssssssssss 6 99 Chemical
6. sessssseeses 4 27 Check Engine PAM pe ice cene estes usce usare es 4 31 Checking Things Under the Hood 6 12 Chemical Paint Spotting ssssesesssse 6 102 Child Restraints Infants and Young Children 2 33 Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children 2 42 Older Children sess 2 30 Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Seat POSION PE 2 49 Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position eeseseseesees 2 52 2 56 SUCICDIBMM c 2 37 Where to Put the Restraint 2 40 Cigarette Lighter ssee 4 15 Circuit Breakers 1 cse eteesik eue 6 104 Cleaning Aluminum Wheels susssseseessss 6 101 Exterior Lamps Lenses n 6 100 Fabric Carpet eee 6 97 Finishi Care eset rete et oe cedent eer ueni 6 100 Instrument Panel Vinyl and Other Plastic SUMACES e 6 98 Jal o TRE ERE qn 6 96 Cleaning cont TMCS ere nee R 6 102 Underbody Maintenance suus 6 102 Washing Your Vehicle seeeeeeeeeeeeeee tees 6 99 Weatherstrips ceceeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 6 99 Windshield and Wiper Blades 6 101 Climate Control System ssseesess 4 15 Outlet Adjustment ssesseessses 4 17 Rear Air Conditioning and Heating System
7. 4 20 Warnings DIC Warnings and Messages 4 44 Hazard Flashets ooi eet tese 4 3 Safety and Symbols esses iv Wheels Alignment and Tire Balance 6 76 Different Size nc ciency ence eene xen o de Rt tette 6 74 Replacement oreet eb eter ince 6 76 When It Is Time for New Tires ssssse 6 72 Where to Put the Child Restraint 2 40 WINDOWS EET 3 16 Enhanced Technology Glass 3 19 Marital 23 ove epe ee Rene dene toes 3 17 POWGlIa ood intere tache nooba E 3 17 Swing Out Windows sse 3 18 Windshield Washer aesthetics E uen RS 4 6 Washer Fuld 2 eit ences 6 36 Wiper Blade Replacement 6 54 Wiper Blades Cleaning 6 101 Wiper FUSES eire Rpe EXE MARE PETS 6 104 WIDOT S rse E E 4 5 Winter Driving rro booten n E lined 5 14
8. esessesss 3 22 Ignition POsItIOnS 12 5 2 retenir otto 3 22 Retained Accessory Power RAP 3 23 Starting the Engine sseeseeesesss 3 23 Fast Idle System perier eoe edens 3 25 Engine Coolant Heater ssssssessssss 3 25 Automatic Transmission Operation Six Speed Automatic Transmission 3 26 Automatic Transmission Operation Four Speed Automatic Transmission 3 31 Tow Haul Mode ceceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeerees 3 33 Parking Brake 22 iir een retenta 3 35 Shifting Into Park seeeeeeeee 3 36 Shifting Out of Park ieres siioni 3 37 Parking Over Things That Burn 3 38 Engine Exhalust 22 teer oett eet 3 38 Running the Vehicle While Parked 3 39 3 1 Section 3 Features and Controls MII OTS ororen nnn ea a Ea 3 40 Outside Power Mirrors eee 3 41 Manual Rearview Mirror esuessee 3 40 Outside Convex Mirror esee 3 41 Outside Manual Mirrors eese 3 40 Outside Heated Mirrors eese 3 42 Outside Towing Mirrors eeeenee 3 40 Storage Areas eR 3 42 Keys A WARNING Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition key is dangerous for many reasons children or others could be badly injured or even killed They could operate the power windows or other controls or e
9. 6 1 sf MEME 6 3 a E M MEME 6 5 Checking Things Under the Hood 6 12 All Wheel Drive sseeemmmme 6 45 Rear Axle sirere taen eir Ie tede decidi 6 46 ErODUAXlO Qon testes in e etui et eei s 6 46 Noise Control System s 6 47 Bulb Replacement essses 6 48 Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement 6 54 TIS perire E E E t ee qUEE ed 6 55 Appearance Care ssssssss 6 96 Vehicle Identification si ESSA PAYER RESE 6 103 Electrical System ceee 6 104 Capacities and Specifications 6 110 Maintenance Schedule eese 7 1 Maintenance Schedule Customer Assistance Information 8 1 Customer Assistance and Information 8 2 Reporting Safety Defects areas 8 14 Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy _ 8 16 lIfid x iicet isa Euer y sound ko ERAI S POIL M EE CEUEPRATUN 1 GENERAL MOTORS GM the GMC Emblem GMC the GMC Truck Emblem and the name SAVANA are registered trademarks of General Motors Corporation This manual describes features that may or may not be on your specific vehicle either because they are options that you did not purchase or due to changes subsequent to the printing of this owner manual Please refer to the purchase documentation relating to your specific vehicle to confirm each of the features found on your ve
10. 6 6 Specifications essen 6 6 Glass Enhanced Technology 3 19 GM Mobility Reimbursement Program 8 6 Halogen Bulb sis imet tr Pee ette eus 6 49 Hazard Warning Flashers iaaa 4 3 Head Restraints 2 eene 2 2 Headlamp Wiring eeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 6 104 Headlamps aissd tosccsneapiedtiatadontentanietiateedreccenaeas 6 49 Bulb Replacement sees 6 48 Daytime Running Lamps DRL 4 11 Exterior LAMPS siceraria 4 9 Flashicto Pass eoo entes R Re ERR PEERS 4 5 Headlamps cont Front Turn Signal Sidemarker and Parking AMPS oo ssec deep ede bes t eu EEUU Sexe 6 51 High Low Beam Changer sessssess 4 5 On Remlrider vcs cccctecad nep ettere sade Eanan ain 4 11 itin 4 15 Engine Coolant sseeeene 3 25 Highbeam On Light 5 tecto tee 4 36 Highway Hypnosis eA 5 12 Hill and Mountain Roads eese 5 13 Hood Checking Things Under sees 6 12 Release usitate intria enh cede tae ee RENE 6 13 nies HR PIETPRU ERE 4 3 How to Wear Safety Belts Properly 2 15 Igintion POSITIONS zc itecto ure reed ttr teta 3 22 Infants and Young Children Restraints 2 33 Inflation Tire Pressure eese 6 63 Instrument Panel Brightness SIRE UICE 4 12 GI 4 21 Intr
11. E Rim Diameter Diameter of the wheel in inches F Load Range Load Range G Service Description The service description indicates the load index and speed rating of a tire If two numbers are given as in the example 120 116 then this represents the load index for single versus dual wheel usage single dual The speed rating is the maximum speed a tire is certified to carry a load This does not apply to Goodyear LT225 75R16 G949 RSA and Goodyear LT225 75R16 G933 RSD commercial truck tires see the dual tire and single tire maximum load and load range letter designations on the tire sidewall 6 59 Tire Terminology and Definitions Air Pressure The amount of air inside the tire pressing outward on each square inch of the tire Air pressure is expressed in pounds per square inch psi or kilopascal kPa Accessory Weight This means the combined weight of optional accessories Some examples of optional accessories are automatic transmission power steering power brakes power windows power seats and air conditioning Aspect Ratio The relationship of a tire s height to its width Belt A rubber coated layer of cords that is located between the plies and the tread Cords may be made from steel or other reinforcing materials Bead The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped by steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim Bias Ply Tire A pneumatic tire in which the plies are laid at alternate angles l
12. United States Canada To turn the right front passenger airbag on again insert the ignition key into the switch push in and move the switch to the on position The right front passenger frontal airbag is now enabled may inflate See Airbag Off Light on page 4 24 or more information 2 71 Passenger Sensing System If the instrument panel has one of the indicators pictured in the following illustrations the vehicle has a passenger sensing system unless there is an airbag off switch located on the instrument panel If there is an airbag off switch the vehicle does not have a passenger sensing system See Airbag Off Switch on page 2 69 for more information PASSENGER AIRBAG 4 2 OFF ON United States Canada The passenger airbag status indicator will be visible on the instrument panel when the vehicle is started The words ON and OFF or the symbol for on and off will be visible during the system check When the system check is complete either the word ON or the word OFF or the symbol for on or the symbol for off will be visible See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 4 26 2 72 The passenger sensing system will turn off the right front passenger frontal airbag under certain conditions The driver airbag and roof rail airbags if equipped are not part of the passenger sensing system The passenger sensing system works with sensors that are
13. 3 20 PASS Key IIl Electronic Immobilizer Operation p 3 20 ulace t 4 3 Time SENJ uii cere useiepurtert a reto dre ae aa 4 60 Uc EE E I I 6 55 Aluminum Wheels Cleaning 6 101 Buying New Tiles cer rere 6 73 CHAINS 2 xisizscncsacaseaatasngenmesnnatgucecattannotagnaee enh 6 78 Changing a Flat Tire sees 6 80 CIC ANING seesama a na decns E he acien 6 102 Different Size sse 6 74 Dual Tire Operation sess 6 64 It a Tire Goes Flat sinini one vetros 6 79 Inflation Tire Pressure esses 6 63 Inspection and Rotation esses 6 69 Installing the Spare Tire ssssssss 6 85 Pressure Light i ie aves ove 4 30 Pressure Monitor Operation sss 6 66 Pressure Monitor System sssssss 6 65 Tires cont Removing the Flat Tire ssessseusse 6 85 Removing the Spare Tire and Tools 6 81 Secondary Latch System ssessss 6 92 Sidewall Labeling eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeen eens 6 56 Spare ec 6 96 Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools 6 94 Terminology and Definitions 6 60 Uniform Tire Quality Grading 6 75 Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance 6 76 Wheel Replacement eese 6 76 When It Is Time for New Tires
14. PASS Key Ill Electronic Immobilizer See Radio Frequency Statement on page 8 18 for information regarding Part 15 of the Federal Communications Commission FCC Rules and RSS 210 211 of Industry and Science Canada 3 20 PASS Key Ill Electronic Immobilizer Operation Your vehicle is equipped with the PASS Key Ill Personalized Automotive Security System theft deterrent system PASS Key Ill is a passive theft deterrent system The system is automatically armed when the key is removed from the ignition You do not have to manually arm or disarm the system The security light will come on if there is a problem with arming or disarming the theft deterrent system When the PASS Key IIl system senses that someone is using the wrong key it shuts down the vehicle s starter and fuel systems The starter will not work and fuel will stop being delivered to the engine Anyone using a trial and error method to start the vehicle will be discouraged because of the high number of electrical key codes If the engine does not start and the security message comes on the key may have a damaged transponder Turn the ignition off and try again If the engine still does not start and the key appears to be undamaged try another ignition key At this time you may also want to check the instrument panel PASS KEY fuse If the engine still does not start with the other key your vehicle needs service If your vehicle does start the
15. 4 19 Rear Heating System sssssssssss 4 18 Climate Controls 2 2 rette tee de ole Res 1 12 Glock Setting socie ern or toe eretere eret 4 60 Collision Damage Repair sees 8 10 COMPASS aenn cease eate ioe Spe DAN D AA 4 43 Control of a Vehicle sse 5 3 Coolant Engine erosen 6 28 Engine Temperature Gage sssssse 4 30 Cooling System essa oce rikene iMac inknn E 6 26 Courtesy Transportation Program 8 9 Gruise Control size eicere e eee ene serere key rus 4 6 PAG ieee sete nm 4 36 Customer Assistance 0 ceceeee eee eeeeeeeeneeeeeneees 8 5 ucc p TL 8 5 Text Telephone TTY Users sess 8 5 Customer Information Service Publications Ordering Information 8 15 Customer Satisfaction Procedure 8 2 Damage Repair Collision sssss 8 10 Data Recorders Event cccccceceeeeeeeeeeees 8 16 Daytime Running Lamps DRL 4 11 Defensive Driving cceceeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeners 5 2 Delayed LOCKING ecd tote ette ta ntmtr ts 3 9 DIC COMPASS m 4 43 DISC MP3s tutesstectsenep t pe iius 4 72 Doing Your Own Service Work 6 4 Dome Lamp Override essessssses 4 13 Dome Lamps x5xuexcdtetuc ten tiet teuren m aai 4 12 Door 60 40 Swing Out Side Door 3
16. Cruise Grade Braking Six Speed Automatic Transmission Cruise Grade Braking operates only while cruise control is engaged in Tow Haul mode Cruise Grade Braking assists in maintaining desired vehicle speeds when driving on downhill grades in cruise control by automatically shifting to lower gears when the cruise Set speed is exceeded While in the Range Selection Mode RSM mode cruise grade braking is not available See Automatic Transmission Operation Six Speed Automatic Transmission on page 3 26 or Automatic Transmission Operation Four Speed Automatic Transmission on page 3 31 Parking Brake To set the parking brake hold the regular brake pedal then push down the parking brake pedal If the ignition is on the brake system warning light will come on To release the parking brake hold the regular brake pedal down Pull the handle located just above the parking brake pedal with the parking brake symbol to release the parking brake If the ignition is on when the parking brake is released the brake system warning light will go off Notice Driving with the parking brake on can overheat the brake system and cause premature wear or damage to brake system parts Verify that the parking brake is fully released and the brake warning light is off before driving If you are towing a trailer and are parking on a hill see Towing a Trailer on page 5 26 3 35 Shifting Into Park A WARNING
17. If the tire pressure display shows dashes instead of a value there may be a problem with your vehicle If this consistently occurs see your dealer retailer for service 4 41 Engine Hours Press the vehicle information button until ENGINE HOURS displays This display shows the total number of hours the engine has run Relearn Tire Positions Your vehicle may have this display To access this display the vehicle must be in P Park If your vehicle has the Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS after rotating the tires or after replacing a tire or sensor the system must re learn the tire positions To re learn the tire positions see Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 6 65 See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 6 69 and DIC Warnings and Messages on page 4 44 for more information Change Compass Zone Your vehicle may have this feature To change the compass zone through the DIC see DIC Compass on page 4 43 Calibrate Compass Your vehicle may have this feature The compass can be manually calibrated To calibrate the compass through the DIC see DIC Compass on page 4 43 4 42 Relearn Remote Key To access this display the vehicle must be in P Park This display allows you to match Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitters to your vehicle This procedure will erase all previously learned transmitters Therefore they must be relearned as additional transmitters To match an RKE transmitter to your vehicle
18. It can be dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in P Park with the parking brake firmly set The vehicle can roll If you have left the engine running the vehicle can move suddenly You or others could be injured To be sure the vehicle will not move even when you are on fairly level ground use the steps that follow If you are pulling a trailer see Towing a Trailer on page 5 26 1 Hold the brake pedal down and set the parking brake See Parking Brake on page 3 35 2 Move the shift lever into P Park by pulling the shift lever toward you and moving it up as far as it will go 3 Turn the ignition key to LOCK OFF 4 Remove the key and take it with you If you can leave the vehicle with the ignition key in your hand the vehicle is in P Park 3 36 Leaving the Vehicle With the Engine Running Z WARNING It can be dangerous to leave the vehicle with the engine running The vehicle could move suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in P Park with the parking brake firmly set And if you leave the vehicle with the engine running it could overheat and even catch fire You or others could be injured Do not leave the vehicle with the engine running If you have to leave the vehicle with the engine running be sure the vehicle is in P Park and the parking brake is firmly set before you leave it After you move the shift lever into P Park hold the regular brake pedal down
19. Servicing Your Airbag Equipped Vehicle Airbags affect how the vehicle should be serviced There are parts of the airbag system in several places around the vehicle Your dealer retailer and the service manual have information about servicing the vehicle and the airbag system To purchase a service manual see Service Publications Ordering Information on page 8 15 A WARNING For up to 10 seconds after the ignition is turned off and the battery is disconnected an airbag can still inflate during improper service You can be injured if you are close to an airbag when it inflates Avoid yellow connectors They are probably part of the airbag system Be sure to follow proper service procedures and make sure the person performing work for you is qualified to do so 2 77 Adding Equipment to Your Air Q A 2 78 bag Equipped Vehicle Is there anything might add to or change about the vehicle that could keep the airbags from working properly Yes If you add things that change the vehicle s frame bumper system height front end or side sheet metal they may keep the airbag system from working properly Changing or moving any parts of the front seats safety belts the airbag sensing and diagnostic module steering wheel instrument panel roof rail airbag modules ceiling headliner or pillar garnish trim front sensors or airbag wiring can affect the operation of the airbag system In addition the vehicle may
20. VNCode Transmission SbakPlugGap 1 01 mm 0 040 in 1 01 mm 0 040 in 5 3L V8 6 0L V8 6 111 4 NOTES 6 112 Section 7 Maintenance Schedule Maintenance Schedule cccccccccsseeeeereees 7 2 Recommended Fluids and Lubricants 7 11 Introduction 7 2 Maintenance Replacement Parts 7 13 Scheduled Maintenance nee 7 3 Engine Drive Belt Routing 7 14 Owner Checks and Services oo 7 9 Maintenance Record cccccceeeeeeee eee eeeeas 7 15 Maintenance Schedule Introduction This maintenance section applies to vehicles with a gasoline engine For diesel engine vehicles see the maintenance schedule section in the DURAMAX Diesel manual Notice Maintenance intervals checks inspections recommended fluids and lubricants are necessary to keep this vehicle in good working condition Damage caused by failure to follow scheduled maintenance might not be covered by the vehicle warranty Proper vehicle maintenance helps to keep the vehicle in good working condition improves fuel economy and reduces vehicle emissions for better air quality Because of all the different ways people use vehicles maintenance needs vary The vehicle might need more frequent checks and services Please read the information under Scheduled Maintenance To keep the vehicle in good condition see your dealer retailer The maintenance
21. 2 Press and release the transmitter s lock button then immediately press and hold the remote vehicle start button for four seconds or until the vehicle s turn signal lamps flash When the vehicle s engine starts the parking lamps will turn on and remain on while the engine is running The vehicle s doors will be locked The airbag readiness light will be on during a remote start It should turn off when the ignition is turned to ON RUN See Airbag Readiness Light on page 4 23 for more information 3 If it is the first remote start since the vehicle has been driven repeat these steps while the engine is still running to extend the engine running time by 10 minutes Remote start can be extended one time After entering the vehicle during a remote start insert and turn the key to ON RUN to drive the vehicle After a remote start the engine will automatically shut off after 10 minutes unless a time extension has been done or the vehicle s key is inserted into the ignition switch and turned to ON RUN The maximum number of remote starts between ignition cycles with the key is two If the remote start procedure is used again before the first 10 minute time frame has ended the first 10 minutes will immediately expire and the second 10 minute time frame will start After your vehicle s engine has been started two times using the remote start button the vehicle s ignition switch must be turned to ON RUN and then b
22. Aftermarket parts are not covered by your GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty and any vehicle failure related to such parts are not covered by that warranty Repair Facility We recommend that you choose a collision repair facility that meets your needs before you ever need collision repairs Your dealer retailer may have a collision repair center with GM trained technicians and state of the art equipment or be able to recommend a collision repair center that has GM trained technicians and comparable equipment Insuring Your Vehicle Protect your investment in your GM vehicle with comprehensive and collision insurance coverage There are significant differences in the quality of coverage afforded by various insurance policy terms Many insurance policies provide reduced protection to your GM vehicle by limiting compensation for damage repairs by using aftermarket collision parts Some insurance companies will not specify aftermarket collision parts When purchasing insurance we recommend that you assure your vehicle will be repaired with GM original equipment collision parts If such insurance coverage is not available from your current insurance carrier consider switching to another insurance carrier If your vehicle is leased the leasing company may require you to have insurance that assures repairs with Genuine GM Original Equipment Manufacturer OEM parts or Genuine Manufacturer replacement parts Read your lease carefully as yo
23. Then see if you can move the shift lever away from P Park without first pulling it toward you If you can it means that the shift lever was not fully locked into P Park Torque Lock If you are parking on a hill and you do not shift the vehicle into P Park properly the weight of the vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl in the transmission You may find it difficult to pull the shift lever out of P Park This is called torque lock To prevent torque lock set the parking brake and then shift into P Park properly before you leave the driver seat To find out how see Shifting Into Park on page 3 36 When you are ready to drive move the shift lever out of P Park before you release the parking brake If torque lock does occur you may need to have another vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the pressure from the parking pawl in the transmission so you can pull the shift lever out of P Park Shifting Out of Park The vehicle has an automatic transmission shift lock control system You have to fully apply the brakes before you can shift from P Park when the ignition is in ON RUN See Automatic Transmission Operation Six Speed Automatic Transmission on page 3 26 or Automatic Transmission Operation Four Speed Automatic Transmission on page 3 31 The shift lock control system is designed to do the following Prevent the ignition key from being removed unless the shift lever is
24. wheel nuts or Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS sensors replace them only with new GM original equipment parts This way you will be sure to have the right wheel wheel bolts wheel nuts and TPMS sensors for the vehicle A WARNING Using the wrong replacement wheels wheel bolts or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be dangerous It could affect the braking and handling of your vehicle make your tires lose air and make you lose control You could have a collision in which you or others could be injured Always use the correct wheel wheel bolts and wheel nuts for replacement Notice The wrong wheel can also cause problems with bearing life brake cooling speedometer or odometer calibration headlamp aim bumper height vehicle ground clearance and tire or tire chain clearance to the body and chassis Whenever a wheel wheel bolt or wheel nut is replaced on a dual wheel setup check the wheel nut torque after 100 1 000 and 6 000 miles 160 1 600 and 10 000 km of driving For proper torque see Wheel Nut Torque under Capacities and Specifications on page 6 110 See Changing a Flat Tire on page 6 80 for more information Used Replacement Wheels A WARNING Putting a used wheel on the vehicle is dangerous You cannot know how it has been used or how far it has been driven It could fail suddenly and cause a crash If you have to replace a wheel use a new GM original equipment wheel 6 77 Tire Ch
25. 20 mph for 30 seconds 4 50 The StabiliTrak system is not functional until the light has turned off See StabiliTrak System on page 5 5 for more information STABILITRAK OFF If your vehicle has StabiliTrak this message displays when you turn off StabiliTrak or when the stability control has been automatically disabled To limit wheel spin and realize the full benefits of the stability enhancement system you should normally leave StabiliTrak on However you should turn StabiliTrak off if your vehicle gets stuck in sand mud ice or snow and you want to rock your vehicle to attempt to free it or if you are driving in extreme off road conditions and require more wheel spin See f Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand Mud Ice or Snow on page 5 16 To turn the StabiliTrak system on or off see StabiliTrak System on page 5 5 There are several conditions that can cause this message to appear One condition is overheating which could occur if StabiliTrak activates continuously for an extended period of time The message also displays if the brake system warning light is on See Brake System Warning Light on page 4 28 The message could display if the stability system takes longer than usual to complete its diagnostic checks due to driving conditions The message displays if an engine or vehicle related problem has been detected and the vehicle needs service See your dealer retailer The message turns off as soo
26. 3 42 Outside Manual Mirrors eese 3 40 Outside Power Mirrors eeeeeee 3 41 Outside Towing Mirrors eeesessse 3 40 Wil stc ERE ENS PH N N 4 72 N Navigation System Privacy sess 8 17 New Vehicle Break In ssssss 3 22 Noise Control System Tampering 6 47 iG re oT Ts 4 22 cA 4 22 Off Road ROCOVETY m 5 8 Oil e 6 15 Engine Oil Life System sssssssss 6 18 Pressure Gage cseseseeen 4 34 Pressure Light cete t rct exu 4 35 Older Children Restraints sssesesee 2 30 Online Owner Center ssse 8 4 Sasicicliuii nd 8 17 Outlet Adjustment esee 4 17 Outlets Accessory POWOF neruis enian 4 14 Outside Convex Mirror sese 3 41 Heated Mirrors csse 3 42 Manual Mirrors 25e tarena tr rk PER Rete eran 3 40 Power Mirrors ccceccecceeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeneeenes 3 41 TOWING MINOIS 9 Hevea ieee i hele 3 40 Owner Checks and Services ssssss 7 9 Owners Canadian cessere iii Paint Damage sssesssssssssseee 6 102 Park Shining INO ger rt 3 36 Shifting Out of cca cusses nere retener 3 37 Parking Brake soins 3 35 Over Things That Burn cceeeeeeeeeneee tenes 3 38 Passenger Airb
27. 6 104 Electrical System Engine Compartment Fuse Block 6 106 Floor Console Fuse Block 6 104 Fuses and Circuit Breakers 6 104 Headlamp Wiring Leeessesssss 6 104 Windshield Wiper Fuses sss 6 104 Electronic Immobilizer PASS Key Ille 3 20 Electronic Immobilizer Operation PASS Key Ille 3 20 Engine Air Cleaner Filter ccccceceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeees 6 19 Check and Service Engine Soon Lamp 4 31 Compartment Overview eee 6 14 Gel sets 6 28 Coolant Heater eseeeeeeeeeeen 3 25 Coolant Temperature Gage ssss 4 30 Cooling System artes ter reinen e 6 26 Drive Belt Routing eese 7 14 EX iBUSl ercran nsa uten ed eur quiunq E 3 38 Engine cont Fan NOISE onea E A 6 34 Fast Idle System oe eerie 3 25 pM LT 6 15 Overliealirig enere dte ect rne nmt reru 6 33 Starting oasian e eto rete bene Qe UMANE a eras 3 23 Engine Oil Life Systenr 23i tto hie eet 6 18 Enhanced Technology Glass ssessse 3 19 Entry Exit Lighting ccr 4 13 Event Data Recorders eese 8 16 Extender Safety Belt sss 2 29 Exterior Lamps iere eene e mre iden ta 4 9 Fast Idle System sss 3 25 Filter Engine Air Cleaner ssseeses 6 19 F
28. A WARNING A child in a rear facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag inflates This is because the back of the rear facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating airbag A child ina forward facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag inflates and the passenger seat is in a forward position Even if the passenger sensing system or airbag switch has turned off the right front passenger frontal airbag no system is fail safe No one can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy under some unusual circumstance even though it is turned off WARNING Continued WARNING Continued Secure rear facing child restraints in a rear seat even if the airbag is off If you secure a forward facing child restraint in the right front seat always move the front passenger seat as far back as it will go It is better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat When securing a child restraint in a rear seating position study the instructions that came with the child restraint to make sure it is compatible with this vehicle If the vehicle does not have a rear seat that will accommodate a rear facing child restraint a rear facing child restraint should not be installed in the vehicle even if the airbag is off Wherever a child restraint is installed be sure to secure the child restraint properly Keep in mind
29. Ethanol eseesssess 6 8 Fuels in Foreign Countries sssssssse 6 9 Filling the Tank aiii tte 6 10 Filling a Portable Fuel Container 6 12 Checking Things Under the Hood 6 12 Hood Release anena aan 6 13 Engine Compartment Overview 6 14 zise 1 005 Mer 6 15 Engine Oil Life System ssessssss 6 18 Engine Air Cleaner Filter sssss 6 19 Automatic Transmission Fluid 4 Speed TRANSMISSION swistecetscecevecac d teea aari 6 20 Automatic Transmission Fluid 6 Speed TFANSMISSION occisi penetret Fa Ed 6 23 Cooling System sse 6 26 Engine Coolant uoc ae aceite 6 28 Engine Overheating ssesseesess 6 33 Engine Fan NOG accro reet mnc 6 34 Power Steering Fluid eesssss 6 35 Windshield Washer Fluid esses 6 36 Brakes eben biete deoa te tee ae eiie ai 6 37 ru Me ETE EE 6 40 Jump Starting eeina anei 6 41 All Wheel Drive sssemm es 6 45 Rear Axle aote erede kitten 6 46 Front Axle e Eee eed end 6 46 Noise Control System sssssssss 6 47 Tampering with Noise Control System Prohibited acere terror er todos 6 47 Bulb Replacement l a 6 48 Halogen Bulbs erinnert eterne 6 49 Headlamps ter eor hne eee Eten 6 49 Front Turn Signal Sidemarker and Parking LAMPS
30. Never put flammable items in the ashtray To remove the ashtray pull it out from the console or from the slide out door To reinstall the ashtray slide it back to the original position To use the cigarette lighter if the vehicle has one push it in all the way and let go When it is ready for use it will pop back out by itself Do not use the lighter to plug in accessory devices Use the power outlets provided Notice Holding a cigarette lighter in while it is heating does not let the lighter back away from the heating element when it is hot Damage from overheating can occur to the lighter or heating element or a fuse could be blown Do not hold a cigarette lighter in while it is heating Climate Controls Climate Control System The heating cooling and ventilation for the vehicle can be controlled with this system Vehicles Without Air Conditioning A Fan Control B Temperature Control C Air Delivery Mode Control gg Fan Control Turn the knob clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the fan speed O Off Turns the system off Temperature Control Turn the knob clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the temperature inside the vehicle Air Delivery Mode Control Turn the knob clockwise or counterclockwise to change the current airflow mode A Vent Air is directed to the instrument panel outlets De Bi Level Air is divided between the instrument panel and floor
31. Without safety belts they could have been badly hurt or killed After more than 40 years of safety belts in vehicles the facts are clear In most crashes buckling up does matter a lot Why Safety Belts Work When you ride in or on anything you go as fast as it goes Take the simplest vehicle Suppose it is just a seat on wheels Put someone on it Get it up to speed Then stop the vehicle The rider does not stop The person keeps going until stopped by something In or the instrument panel a real vehicle it could be the windshield 2 13 Questions and Answers About Safety Belts Q Will be trapped in the vehicle after a crash if I am wearing a safety belt A You could be whether you are wearing a safety belt or not But your chance of being conscious during and after an accident so you can unbuckle and get out is much greater if you are belted And you can unbuckle a safety belt even if you are upside down Q If my vehicle has airbags why should I have to wear safety belts A Airbags are supplemental systems only so they or the safety belts work with safety belts not instead of them Whether or not an airbag is provided all occupants still have to buckle up to get the most protection That is true not only in frontal collisions but especially in side and other collisions With safety belts you slow down as the vehicle does You get more time to stop You stop over more
32. and handle pivot points lubrication See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 7 11 More frequent lubrication may be required when vehicle is exposed to a corrosive environment Applying silicone grease on weatherstrips with a clean cloth makes them last longer seal better and not stick or squeak Restraint system component check See Checking the Restraint Systems on page 2 79 Automatic transmission fluid level check and adding fluid if needed See Automatic Transmission Fluid 4 Speed Transmission on page 6 20 or Automatic Transmission Fluid 6 Speed Transmission on page 6 23 All wheel drive vehicles Transfer case fluid level check and adding fluid if needed Engine air cleaner filter inspection See Engine Air Cleaner Filter on page 6 19 Vehicles with diesel engine or GVWR above 4 536 kg 10 000 Ibs only Shields inspection for damage or looseness Adjust or replace as required This is a Noise Emission Control Service Applicable to vehicles sold in the United States and recommended for vehicles sold in Canada Additional Required Services At the First 160 km 100 Miles 1 600 km 1 000 Miles and 10 000 km 6 000 Miles For vehicles with dual wheels Check dual wheel nut torque For proper torque see Capacities and Specifications on page 6 110 At Each Fuel Stop Engine oil level check See Engine Oil on page 6 15 Engine coolant level check See Engine Coolant on page 6 28 Windshield washer flu
33. and the date MM DD month and day and DD MM day and month displays 2 Press the pushbutton located under the desired option 3 Press the MENU button again to apply the selected default or let the screen time out 4 62 Radio s ac ee eee ene ee en Buge AM FM 12 AUX AM FM Radio shown Radio with CD Base similar 9 3809 750 Y 96 1 f 98 5 X41 AM 640 C680 a EET lt a lt D BAND SEEK SEEK REV Fwo ff CD AUX Radio with CD MP3 shown Radio with Six Disc CD MP3 similar The vehicle has one of these radios as its audio system Radio Data System RDS The Radio may have a Radio Data System RDS The RDS feature is available for use only on FM stations that broadcast RDS information This system relies upon receiving specific information from these stations and only works when the information is available While the radio is tuned to an FM RDS station the station name or call letters displays In rare cases a radio station could broadcast incorrect information that causes the radio features to work improperly If this happens contact the radio station Playing the Radio d Power Volume Press to turn the system on and off Turn clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the volume When the radio is turned on it plays at the volume level that was last set The volume can be adjusted using this knob i Information AM FM Radio
34. car wash that has silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes could damage the aluminum or chrome plated wheels The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty Never drive a vehicle that has aluminum or chrome plated wheels through an automatic car wash that uses silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes 6 101 Tires To clean the tires use a stiff brush with tire cleaner Notice Using petroleum based tire dressing products on the vehicle may damage the paint finish and or tires When applying a tire dressing always wipe off any overspray from all painted surfaces on the vehicle Sheet Metal Damage If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal repair or replacement make sure the body repair shop applies anti corrosion material to parts repaired or replaced to restore corrosion protection Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide the corrosion protection while maintaining the vehicle warranty Finish Damage Any stone chips fractures or deep scratches in the finish should be repaired right away Bare metal will corrode quickly and may develop into major repair expense Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch up materials available from your dealer retailer Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected in your dealer s retailer s body and paint shop 6 102 Underbody Maintenance Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust control can collect on the underbody If these are
35. exterior lamps except headlamps D Manual operation of the headlamps and other exterior lamps For more information see e Exterior Lamps on page 4 9 Headlamps on Reminder on page 4 11 Daytime Running Lamps DRL on page 4 11 Automatic Headlamp System on page 4 11 Windshield Wiper Washer The lever is located on the left side of the steering column S2 Use for a single wiping cycle Turn the band to adjust the delay time between wipes Turn the band up or down for more frequent wipes or less frequent wipes 1 12 GB Slow wipes EB Fast wipes Q Turns the wipers off WV Push the paddle on top of the multifunction lever to spray washer fluid on the windshield See Windshield Wipers on page 4 5 and Windshield Washer on page 4 6 Climate Controls The vehicle s heating cooling and ventilation can be controlled with these systems Vehicles Without Air Conditioning A Fan Control B Temperature Control C Air Delivery Mode Control Vehicles With Air Conditioning A Fan Control B Temperature Control C Air Delivery Mode Control D Rear Window Defogger See Climate Control System on page 4 15 See Rear Heating System on page 4 18 If Equipped or Rear Air Conditioning and Heating System on page 4 19 If Equipped Vehicle Features Radio s 9 AM 640 9 389 680 Y 750 Y 96 1 98 5 X41 a EET el I lt 1 D gt Radio with CD MP3 D Press to turn t
36. have a shift position indicator within the instrument panel cluster There are several different positions for the shift lever PRNDM1 See Range Selection Mode later in this section P Park This position locks the rear wheels It is the best position to use when starting the engine because the vehicle cannot move easily When parked on a hill especially when the vehicle has a heavy load you might notice an increase in the effort to shift out of P Park See Torque Lock Automatic Transmission under Shifting Into Park on page 3 36 for more information A WARNING It is dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in P Park with the parking brake firmly set The vehicle can roll Do not leave the vehicle when the engine is running unless you have to If you have left the engine running the vehicle can move suddenly You or others could be injured To be sure the vehicle will not move even when you are on fairly level ground always set the parking brake and move the shift lever to P Park See Shifting Into Park on page 3 36 lf you are pulling a trailer see Towing a Trailer on page 5 26 R Reverse Use this gear to back up Notice Shifting to R Reverse while the vehicle is moving forward could damage the transmission The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty Shift to R Reverse only after the vehicle is stopped To rock the vehicle back and forth to get out of
37. have questions about your tire warranty and where should be checked when your vehicle s to obtain service see your vehicle Warranty tires are cold See Inflation Tire Pressure on page 6 63 Overinflated tires are more likely to be booklet for details For additional information refer to the tire manufacturer cut punctured or broken by a sudden impact such as when you hit a pothole Keep tires at the recommended pressure Worn old tires can cause accidents If the tire s tread is badly worn or if your vehicle s tires have been damaged replace them Z WARNING Poorly maintained and improperly used tires are dangerous Overloading your vehicle s tires can cause overheating as a result of too much flexing You could have an air out and a serious accident See Loading the Vehicle on page 5 17 Underinflated tires pose the same danger as overloaded tires The resulting accident could cause serious injury Check all tires frequently to maintain the WARNING Continued 6 55 Tire Sidewall Labeling Useful information about a tire is molded into the sidewall The following illustrations are examples of a typical P Metric and a LT Metric tire sidewall TPC SPEC 1153 yg Passenger P Metric Tire A Tire Size The tire size code is a combination of letters and numbers used to define a particular tire s width height aspect ratio construction type and service description See the Tire Si
38. light then goes off If the light comes on and stays on it means that oil is not flowing through the engine properly The vehicle could be low on oil and it might have some other system problem Security Light AN WARNING For information regarding this light and the vehicle s security system see Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low The PASS Key Ill Electronic engine can become so hot that it catches fire Immobilizer Operation Someone could be burned Check the oil as soon on page 3 20 as possible and have the vehicle serviced Notice Lack of proper engine oil maintenance can damage the engine The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty Always follow the maintenance schedule in this manual for changing engine oil 4 35 Cruise Control Light The cruise control light comes on whenever the 4a cruise control is set The light goes out when the cruise control is turned off See Cruise Control on page 4 6 for more information Highbeam On Light This light comes on when the high beam headlamps are in use See Headlamp High Low Beam Changer on page 4 5 for more information Tow Haul Mode Light This light comes on when the Tow Haul mode has been activated For more information see Tow Haul Mode on page 3 33 Fuel Gage Canada United States The fuel gage when the ignition is on indicates how much fuel is left in the vehicle s fuel tank An arrow on the fuel gage i
39. the vehicle can move suddenly You or others could be injured To be sure the vehicle will not move even when you are on fairly level ground always set the parking brake and move the shift lever to P Park See Shifting Into Park on page 3 36 lf you are pulling a trailer see Towing a Trailer on page 5 26 There are several different positions for your shift lever Make sure the shift lever is fully in P Park before starting the engine The vehicle has an automatic P Park This position locks your rear wheels It is transmission shift lock control system You must first the best position to use when you start the engine press the brake pedal before you can shift from P Park because the vehicle cannot move easily with the ignition in ON RUN If you cannot shift out of P Park ease pressure on the shift lever and push the shift lever all the way into P Park as you maintain brake application Then move the shift lever into another gear See Shifting Out of Park on page 3 37 3 31 R Reverse Use this gear to back up Notice Shifting to R Reverse while the vehicle is moving forward could damage the transmission The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty Shift to R Reverse only after the vehicle is stopped To rock the vehicle back and forth to get out of snow ice or sand without damaging the transmission see If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand Mud Ice or Snow on page 5 16 N Neutral
40. vehicle make model and model year Vehicle Identification Number VIN insurance company and policy number and a general description of the damage to the other vehicle If possible call your insurance company from the scene of the crash They will walk you through the information they will need If they ask for a police report phone or go to the police department headquarters the next day and you can get a copy of the report for a nominal fee In some states provinces with no fault insurance laws a report may not be necessary This is especially true if there are no injuries and both vehicles are driveable Choose a reputable collision repair facility for your vehicle Whether you select a dealer retailer or a private collision repair facility to fix the damage make sure you are comfortable with them Remember you will have to feel comfortable with their work for a long time Once you have an estimate read it carefully and make sure you understand what work will be performed on your vehicle If you have a question ask for an explanation Reputable shops welcome this opportunity Managing the Vehicle Damage Repair Process In the event that your vehicle requires damage repairs GM recommends that you take an active role in its repair If you have a pre determined repair facility of choice take your vehicle there or have it towed there Specify to the facility that any required replacement collision parts be original e
41. weather conditions at or below 0 F 18 C Vehicles with an engine coolant heater should be plugged in at least four hours before starting An internal thermostat in the plug end of the cord may exist which will prevent engine coolant heater operation at temperatures above 0 F 18 C 3 25 To Use the Engine Coolant Heater 1 Turn off the engine 2 Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord The cord for the engine coolant heater is located on the driver side of the engine compartment and is attached to the hose for the power steering reservoir 3 Plug it into a normal grounded 110 volt AC outlet A WARNING Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet could cause an electrical shock Also the wrong kind of extension cord could overheat and cause a fire You could be seriously injured Plug the cord into a properly grounded three prong 110 volt AC outlet If the cord will not reach use a heavy duty three prong extension cord rated for at least 15 amps 4 Before starting the engine be sure to unplug and store the cord as it was before to keep it away from moving engine parts and prevent damage 3 26 The length of time the heater should remain plugged in depends on several factors Ask a dealer retailer in the area where you will be parking the vehicle for the best advice on this Automatic Transmission Operation Six Speed Automatic Transmission Vehicles with a six speed automatic transmission
42. works with the main climate control system in the rear seating area vehicle A High This position supplies the most amount of heat to the rear seating area E Medium This position supplies half the amount of heat to the rear seating area v Low This position supplies the least amount of heat to the rear seating area O Off Turns the rear heating system off er gt E EE LE cc Rear Air Conditioning and Heating System For vehicles with a rear heating and air conditioning system it maintains the temperature fan speed and air delivery for the rear seat passengers only It also works with the main climate control system in the vehicle Front Climate Control Panel Use this control panel to maintain a separate temperature setting Adjust the direction of the airflow or adjust the fan speed for the rear seat passenger s Rear Climate Control Panel A Fan Control B Air Delivery Mode Control C Temperature Control If the vehicle has a 343 cm 135 inch wheelbase a rear control panel for this system is located in the second row behind the driver in the rear of the vehicle The temperature air delivery mode and the fan speed can be adjusted for the rear seating area by a rear seat passenger AUX Auxiliary Turn the fan knob on the front climate control panel to AUX to let rear seat p
43. 13 Automatic Door Lock eeeeeeeeeee 3 10 Automatic Door Unlock esee 3 10 Cargo Door Relocking eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee es 3 9 Delayed Locking eese 3 9 LOCKS MU 3 8 Power LOCKS irrito ree E E Dentes 3 9 Programmable Automatic Door Locks 3 10 Rear Door Security LOCKS sssss 3 11 Rear Doots eee ioeere tener Erbe hii ened 3 15 Sliding Side Door mersedes aE NE a EE sah 3 12 Drive Systems All Whael Dive e tere ite tete ten 6 45 Driver Information Center DIC 4 37 DIC Operation and Displays 4 38 DIC Vehicle Customization ssss 4 52 DIC Warnings and Messages 4 44 Driving At Nigkil oreet per tete eid 5 10 Before a Long Trip eese 5 12 Defensive c 5 2 BiU dace ecc T 5 2 Highway HYPNOSIS sare oer atr reme 5 12 Hill and Mountain Roads sssssss 5 13 In Rain and on Wet Roads ssssse 5 11 Loss of Control eiecit tete teet 5 9 Off Road Recovery eseseeseeene 5 8 Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out 5 16 le aN 5 14 Driving for Better Fuel Economy 1 18 Dual Tire Operation sse 6 64 E85 FUG sirosis 6 8 da E 8 16 Electrical Equipment Add On
44. 18 Rear Seat Operation eese 2 6 Rearview Mirrors aitciiiean anisi aaa 3 40 Reclining Seatbacks eese 2 4 Recommended Fluids and Lubricants 7 11 Recreational Vehicle Towing ss 5 22 Reimbursement Program GM Mobility 8 6 Remote Keyless Entry RKE System 3 4 Remote Vehicle Start sesesseeseeess 3 6 Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the GTI cae 6 85 Removing the Spare Tire and Tools 6 81 Replacement Bulbs eeeeeeeseeeesess 6 53 Replacement Parts Maintenance ccecsesccucsee exa cade RR Ras 7 18 Reporting Safety Defects Canadian Government ssssessss 8 14 General Motors sess 8 14 U S Government sse 8 14 Restraint System Check Checking the Restraint Systems 2 79 Replacing Restraint System Parts After CE Mm 2 80 Retained Accessory Power RAP 3 23 Roadside Assistance Program 8 6 Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out 5 16 Running the Vehicle While Parked 3 39 Safety Belts Sri gm 6 99 mareld c S 2 29 How to Wear Safety Belts Properly 2 15 Lap Shoulder Belt ssssseeses 2 24 Reminders Cm 4 23 Safety Belts Are for Every
45. 2 Vehicle Locator Panic Alarm Press and release to locate the vehicle The turn signal lamps flash and the horn sounds three times Press and hold 4X for more than two seconds to activate the panic alarm The turn signal lamps flash and the horn sounds repeatedly for 30 seconds The alarm turns off when the ignition is moved to ON RUN or 4X is pressed again The ignition must be in LOCK OFF for the panic alarm to work Programming Transmitters to the Vehicle Only RKE transmitters programmed to the vehicle will work If a transmitter is lost or stolen a replacement can be purchased and programmed through your dealer retailer When the replacement transmitter is programmed to the vehicle all remaining transmitters must also be programmed Any lost or stolen transmitters no longer work once the new transmitter is programmed Each vehicle can have up to four transmitters programmed to it See Relearn Remote Key under DIC Operation and Displays on page 4 38 for instructions on how to match RKE transmitters to your vehicle Battery Replacement Replace the battery if the REPLACE BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY message displays in the DIC See REPLACE BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY under DIC Warnings and Messages on page 4 44 for additional information Notice When replacing the battery do not touch any of the circuitry on the transmitter Static from your body could damage the transmitter To replace the battery 1 Separate the tr
46. 4 Safety Belt Airbag On Off Switch If the instrument panel has one of the switches pictured in the following illustrations the vehicle has an airbag on off switch that you can use to manually turn on or off the right front passenger airbag Refer to the following sections for important information on how to use safety belts properly United States Canada Safety Belts They Are for Everyone on page 2 10 See Airbag Off Switch on page 2 69 for important How to Wear Safety Belts P 2 15 ow to Wear Safety Belts Properly on page 2 15 ORO Lap Shoulder Belt on page 2 24 Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children LATCH on page 2 42 1 8 Sensing System for Passenger Airbag The passenger sensing system if equipped will turn off the right front passenger frontal airbag under certain conditions The driver airbag and roof rail airbags if equipped are not affected by this If the vehicle has a passenger sensing system the passenger airbag status indicator will be visible on the instrument panel when the vehicle is started PASSENGER AIRBAG 1 OFF ON 2 AN NIA United States Canada See Passenger Sensing System on page 2 72 for important information Mirror Adjustment Exterior Mirrors Vehicles with outside manual mirrors can be adjusted by moving the mirror up and down or left to right so you can see a little of the side of your vehicle
47. CD icon and a message showing the disc and or track number displays when a CD is in the player Press again and the system automatically searches for an auxiliary input device such as a portable audio player If a portable audio player is not connected No Input Device Found may display Playing an MP3 CD R or CD RW Disc The radio with a Single CD player or a Six Disc CD player has the capability of playing an MP3 CD R or CD RW disc For more information on how to play an MP3 CD R or CD RW disc see Using an MP3 in the index CD Messages REMOVE CHECK DISC Radios with a Single CD player or radios with a Six Disc player displays CHECK DISC and or ejects the CD if an error occurs ERR Error If this message displays and or the CD comes out it could be for one of the following reasons Itis very hot When the temperature returns to normal the CD should play You are driving on a very rough road When the road becomes smoother the CD should play The CD is dirty scratched wet or upside down The air is very humid If so wait about an hour and try again There could have been a problem while burning the CD R or CD RW The label could be caught in the CD player NO This message displays if the EJECT or CD AUX buttons are pressed and a CD has not been inserted into the player If the CD is not playing correctly for any other reason try a known good CD If any error occurs repeatealy or if
48. Collision Damage Repair sseseesssse 8 10 Customer Assistance Information Reporting Safety Defects 8 14 Reporting Safety Defects to the United States Government 0 cece cece cece eee ec eee aai 8 14 Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian Government ree e rer Te E aneii 8 14 Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors sesesssseeeeee 8 14 Service Publications Ordering Information 8 15 Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy 8 16 Event Data Recorders ssssssussus 8 16 On StA aeea aa E ecd cse ccsced 8 17 Navigation System see 8 17 Radio Frequency Identification RFID 8 18 Radio Frequency Statement 8 18 Customer Assistance and Information Customer Satisfaction Procedure Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to your dealer and to GMC Normally any concerns with the sales transaction or the operation of the vehicle will be resolved by the dealer s sales or service departments Sometimes however despite the best intentions of all concerned misunderstandings can occur If your concern has not been resolved to your satisfaction the following steps should be taken STEP ONE Discuss your concern with a member of dealership management Normally concerns can be quickly resolved at that level If the matter has already been reviewed with the
49. In this position the engine does not connect with the wheels To restart the engine when the vehicle is already moving use N Neutral only Also use N Neutral when the vehicle is being towed Z WARNING Shifting into a drive gear while the engine is running at high speed is dangerous Unless your foot is firmly on the brake pedal the vehicle could move very rapidly You could lose control and hit people or objects Do not shift into a drive gear while the engine is running at high speed 3 32 Notice Shifting out of P Park or N Neutral with the engine running at high speed may damage the transmission The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty Be sure the engine is not running at high speed when shifting the vehicle D Drive This position is for normal driving It provides the best fuel economy If you need more power for passing and you are Going less than about 35 mph 55 km h push the accelerator pedal about halfway down Going about 35 mph 55 km h or more push the accelerator all the way down You will shift down to the next gear and have more power Downshifting the transmission in slippery road conditions could result in skidding see Skidding under Loss of Control on page 5 9 3 Third This position is also used for normal driving However it reduces vehicle speed more than D Drive without using the brakes You might choose 3 Third instead of D Drive when driv
50. Notice The chime signals related to safety belts parking brake and other functions of your vehicle operate through the radio entertainment system If that equipment is replaced or additional equipment is added to your vehicle the chimes may not work Make sure that replacement or additional equipment is compatible with your vehicle before installing it See Accessories and Modifications on page 6 3 The vehicle has Retained Accessory Power RAP With RAP the audio system can be played even after the ignition is turned off See Retained Accessory Power RAP on page 3 23 for more information 4 59 Setting the Clock AM FM Radio with Optional CD Player If your vehicle has an AM FM radio with an optional CD player it has a button for setting the time With these types of radios the clock can be set with either the radio turned on or off Set the time by following these steps 1 Press until the hour begins flashing on display Press this button a second time and the minutes begin flashing on display Press a third time and the 12HR or 24HR time format begins flashing 2 While either the hour or the minutes are flashing turn the 44 knob located on the upper right side of the radio clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the time While the 12HR or 24HR time format is flashing turn the 44 knob clockwise or counterclockwise to select the default time settings 3 Press again until the cloc
51. OnStar and GM Cardmember Services Earnings summaries Other Helpful Links GMC www gmc com GMC Merchandise www gmccollection com Help Center www gmc com helpcenter FAQ Contact Us My GM Canada Canada www gm ca My GM Canada is a password protected section of www gm ca where you can save information on GM vehicles get personalized offers and use handy tools and forms with greater ease Here are a few of the valuable tools and services you will have access to My Showroom Find and save information on vehicles and current offers in your area My Dealers Retailers Save details such as address and phone number for each of your preferred GM dealers retailers My Driveway Access quick links to parts and service estimates check trade in values or schedule a service appointment by adding the vehicles you own to your driveway profile My Preferences Manage your profile and use tools and forms with greater ease To sign up visit the My GM Canada section within www gm ca Customer Assistance for Text Telephone TTY Users To assist customers who are deaf hard of hearing or speech impaired and who use the Text Telephones TTYs GMC has TTY equipment available at its Customer Assistance Center Any TTY user can communicate with GMC by dialing 1 800 GMC 8583 462 8583 TTY users in Canada can dial 1 800 263 3830 Customer Assistance Offices GMC encourages customers to call the tol
52. Paint Spotting ssssss 6 102 Cleaning Exterior Lamps Lenses 6 100 Fabric Carpet eriiic eain ann tented 6 97 Finish Gare piirien IRR E 6 100 Finish Damage rrt a 6 102 Instrument Panel Vinyl and Other Plastic SUMACCS e eiere e aa a IM DUC RET 6 98 Interior Cleaning sese 6 96 Sheet Metal Damage sssessess 6 102 dcc 6 102 Underbody Maintenance suus 6 102 Washing Your Vehicle sesseeesesse 6 99 Wealliersttlps s2c ccssececccasagenmnsantenintecatian eite 6 99 Windshield and Wiper Blades 6 101 ciae E 4 15 Assistance Program Roadside 8 6 Audio SySter rromii cce ice tore e o eb Septem 4 59 Audio Steering Wheel Controls 4 77 Radio Reception oett ora 4 77 Setting the Clock 20 2 0 ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee een eees 4 60 Theft Deterrent Feature seussess 4 76 Audio System s cceceeeseeeeeeeeaeeeeeaeeaeeaeeeees 4 62 Automatic Door Lock sse 3 10 Automatic Door Unlock eseeeeeeeeee 3 10 Automatic Headlamp System 4 11 Automatic Transmission FIWIG pre 6 20 6 23 Operation esinin onina ie 3 26 3 31 Axle Beat onrera ia i rA ed Od eNi 6 46 Battery eM 6 40 Electric Power Management 4 13 Run Do
53. Signal Dark Green Right Rear Stop and Turn Signal Red Black Stripe Battery Feed 30A Fuse Brown Trailer Park Lamp Supply Voltage 15A fuse Yellow Left Rear Stop and Turn Signal 5 38 The four wire harness without connector contains the following circuits Black Ground Red White Battery Feed Dark Blue Trailer Brake Signal Light Blue CHMSL Stoplamp Supply Voltage f the vehicle is a cutaway with trailer provisions a 15 amp fuse will be shared for both left stop trailer turn and right stop trailer turn signals However the cutaway lighting connector will have a 10 amp fuse for each signal f the vehicle is a cutaway with trailer provisions a 15 amp fuse will be shared for trailer park lamps and cutaway rear lighting connector park lamps Also a 10 amp fuse will be shared for trailer back up lamps and cutaway rear lighting connector back up lamps Section 6 Service and Appearance Care Set AL e AE EE A etn S E E E 6 3 Accessories and Modifications 6 3 California Proposition 65 Warning 6 4 California Perchlorate Materials Requirements 6 4 Doing Your Own Service Work 6 4 Adding Equipment to the Outside of the Vehicle cL EE 6 5 il 6 5 Gasoline Octane sse 6 6 Gasoline Specifications esses 6 6 California Fuel eee 6 7 Polen EET 6 7 Fuel E85 85
54. a Trailer on page 5 26 for important information on towing a trailer towing safety rules and trailering tips Example 1 Item Description Totali Vehicle Capacity Weight for dea kg Example 1 9 Subtract Occupant Weight 150 Ibs 300 Ibs 136 kg 68 kg x 2 Example 2 ltem Description Total Vehicle Capacity A Weight for oen Example 2 g Subtract Occupant Weight 150 Ibs 750 Ibs 136 kg 68 kg x 5 Available Occupant Lc and Cargo Weight 003084919 59 Available Cargo EN Ee 250 Ibs 113 kg 5 19 Example 3 Item Description Vehicle Capacity A Weight for Example 3 1 000 Ibs 453 kg 1000 Ibs 453 kg 0 Ibs 0 kg Subtract Occupant Weight 200 Ibs 91 kg x 5 Available Cargo 5 20 Refer to your vehicle s tire and loading information label for specific information about your vehicle s capacity weight and seating positions The combined weight of the driver passengers and cargo should never exceed your vehicle s capacity weight Certification Tire Label GAWR FRT GAWR RR COLD TIRE PRESSURE LL Cc SEE OWNER S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION A vehicle specific Certification Tire label is found on the rear edge of the driver door The label shows the size of your vehicle s original tires and the inflation pressures needed to obtain the gross weight capacity of your vehicle This is called Gross V
55. adjusts to driving conditions This means that all gears below that number are available When 5 Fifth is selected 1 First through 5 Fifth gears are automatically shifted by the vehicle but 6 Sixth cannot be used until the plus minus button located on the steering column lever is used to change to the gear 3 30 Grade Braking is not available when Range Selection Mode is active See Tow Haul Mode on page 3 33 While using Range Selection Mode cruise control and the Tow Haul mode can be used Notice Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle in one place on a hill using only the accelerator pedal may damage the transmission The repair will not be covered by the vehicle warranty If you are stuck do not spin the tires When stopping on a hill use the brakes to hold the vehicle in place Low Traction Mode Low Traction Mode can assist in vehicle acceleration when road conditions are slippery While the vehicle is at a stop select the second gear range using Range Selection Mode This will limit torque to the wheels after it detects wheel slip preventing the tires from spinning Automatic Transmission Operation Four Speed Automatic ANS WARNING Transmission l T l It is dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in P Park with the parking brake firmly set The vehicle can roll Do not leave the vehicle when the engine is running unless you have to If you have left the engine running
56. airbags may Airbags are designed to inflate only once After an have also damaged important functions in the airbag inflates you will need some new parts for vehicle such as the fuel system brake and the airbag system If you do not get them the airbag steering systems etc Even if the vehicle appears system will not be there to help protect you in to be drivable after a moderate crash there may another crash A new system will include airbag be concealed damage that could make it difficult modules and possibly other parts The service to safely operate the vehicle manual for the vehicle covers the need to replace other parts Use caution if you should attempt to restart the engine after a crash has occurred The vehicle has a crash sensing and diagnostic module which records information after a crash See Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy on page 8 16 and Event Data Recorders on page 8 16 Let only qualified technicians work on the airbag Systems Improper service can mean that an airbag system will not work properly See your dealer retailer for service 2 68 Airbag Off Switch If the instrument panel has one of the switches pictured in the following illustrations the vehicle has an airbag on off switch that you can use to manually turn on or off the right front passenger airbag United States Canada If the vehicle does not have an airbag on off switch it may have a passenger sensing system See Passen
57. and have a clear view of objects behind you Vehicles with outside power mirrors have controls located on the driver side door Wi Select each mirror by turning the knob clockwise for the passenger side mirror or counterclockwise for the driver side mirror Adjust the mirror angle by moving the knob in the desired direction Keep the selector switch in the center position when not adjusting either outside mirror Vehicles with towing mirrors can be adjusted manually for a clear view of the objects behind you Manually fold the mirrors inward to prevent damage when going through an automatic car wash To fold pull the mirror toward the vehicle Push the mirror outward to return it to the original position Interior Mirror Hold the inside rearview mirror in the center to move it for a clearer view behind the vehicle Adjust the mirror to avoid glare from the headlamps behind Push the tab located at the base of the mirror forward for daytime use and pull it for nighttime use See Manual Rearview Mirror on page 3 40 Steering Wheel Adjustment For vehicles with a tilt steering wheel the lever is located on the left side of the steering column To adjust the steering wheel 1 Pull the lever to move the steering wheel up or down into a comfortable position 2 Release the lever to lock the steering wheel in place See Tilt Wheel on page 4 3 Interior Lighting Dome Lamp The dome lamps come on
58. areas The surface of a curve or an overpass can remain icy when the surrounding roads are clear Avoid sudden steering maneuvers and braking while on ice Turn off cruise control if equipped on slippery surfaces 5 14 Blizzard Conditions Being stuck in snow can be in a serious situation Stay with the vehicle unless there is help nearby If possible use the Roadside Assistance Program on page 8 6 To get help and keep everyone in the vehicle safe Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers on page 4 3 Tieared cloth to an outside mirror A WARNING Snow can trap engine exhaust under the vehicle This may cause exhaust gases to get inside Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide CO which cannot be seen or smelled It can cause unconsciousness and even death If the vehicle is stuck in the snow Clear away snow from around the base of your vehicle especially any that is blocking the exhaust pipe and or the fuel operated heater exhaust system if equipped If the vehicle has a diesel engine and a fuel operated heater see Fuel Operated Heater FOH in the diesel engine supplement WARNING Continued WARNING Continued Check again from time to time to be sure snow does not collect there Open a window about 5 cm two inches on the side of the vehicle that is away from the wind to bring in fresh air Fully open the air outlets on or under the instrument panel Adjust the Climate Control syst
59. away See Airbag Readiness Light on page 4 23 for more information including important safety information If the word ON or the on symbol is lit it means that the right front passenger frontal airbag is enabled may inflate See Airbag Off Switch on page 2 69 for more information including important safety information 4 25 Passenger Airbag Status Indicator If the vehicle has a passenger sensing system the instrument panel will have a passenger airbag status indicator See Passenger Sensing System on page 2 72 for important safety information The instrument panel has a passenger airbag status indicator PASSENGER AIRBAG 4 2 OFF ON United States Canada When the vehicle is started the passenger airbag status indicator will light ON and OFF or the symbol for on and off for several seconds as a system check Then after several more seconds the status indicator will light either ON or OFF or either the on or off symbol to let you know the status of the right front passenger frontal airbag 4 26 If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on the passenger airbag status indicator it means that the right front passenger frontal airbag is enabled may inflate If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on the airbag status indicator it means that the passenger sensing system has turned off the right front passenger frontal airbag If after several sec
60. be enough time to apply the brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops Always leave enough room up ahead to stop even with ABS Using ABS Do not pump the brakes Just hold the brake pedal down firmly and let antilock work The brakes might vibrate or some noise might be heard but this is normal Braking in Emergencies ABS allows the driver to steer and brake at the same time In many emergencies steering can help more than even the very best braking StabiliTrak System The vehicle may have a vehicle stability enhancement system called StabiliTrak It is an advanced computer controlled system that assists the driver with directional control of the vehicle in difficult driving conditions StabiliTrak activates when the computer senses a discrepancy between the intended path and the direction the vehicle is actually traveling StabiliTrak selectively applies braking pressure at any one of the vehicle s brakes to assist the driver with keeping the vehicle on the intended path When the vehicle is started and begins to move the system performs several diagnostic checks to insure there are no problems The system may be heard or felt while it is working This is normal and does not mean there is a problem with the vehicle The system should initialize before the vehicle reaches 20 mph 32 km h In some cases it may take approximately 2 miles 3 2 km of driving before the system initializes ee f ee Pr
61. child restraint would be very close to the inflating airbag A child ina forward facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag inflates and the passenger seat is in a forward position Even if the passenger sensing system has turned off the right front passenger frontal airbag no system is fail safe No one can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy under some unusual circumstance even though it is turned off WARNING Continued WARNING Continued Secure rear facing child restraints in a rear seat even if the airbag is off If you secure a forward facing child restraint in the right front seat always move the front passenger seat as far back as it will go It is better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat See Passenger Sensing System on page 2 72 for additional information If the vehicle does not have a rear seat that will accommodate a rear facing child restraint a rear facing child restraint should not be installed in the vehicle even if the airbag is off If the child restraint has the LATCH system see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children LATCH on page 2 42 for how and where to install the child restraint using LATCH If a child restraint is secured using a safety belt and it uses a top tether see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children LATCH on page 2 42 for top tether anchor locations Do not secure a child seat in a position without a to
62. comes on when the parking brake is set See Parking Brake on page 3 35 for more information The light stays on if the parking brake does not fully release If it stays on after the parking brake is fully released it means the vehicle has a brake problem If the light comes on while driving pull off the road and stop carefully The pedal might be harder to push or the pedal might go closer to the floor It could take longer to stop If the light is still on have the vehicle towed for service See Towing Your Vehicle on page 5 22 A WARNING The brake system might not be working properly if the brake system warning light is on Driving with the brake system warning light on can lead to a crash If the light is still on after the vehicle has been pulled off the road and carefully stopped have the vehicle towed for service Antilock Brake System ABS Warning Light For vehicles with the Antilock Brake System ABS this light comes on briefly when the engine is started If it does not have the vehicle serviced by your dealer retailer If the system is working normally the indicator light then goes off If the ABS light stays on turn the ignition off If the light comes on while driving stop as soon as it is safely possible and turn the ignition off Then start the engine again to reset the system If the ABS light stays on or comes on again while driving the vehicle needs service If the regular brake syste
63. compass direction and the outside air temperature when viewing the trip and fuel information The compass direction appears on the top right corner of the DIC display The outside air temperature automatically appears in the bottom right corner of the DIC display If there is a problem with the system that controls the temperature display the numbers will be replaced with dashes If this occurs have the vehicle serviced by your dealer retailer The DIC also allows some features to be customized See DIC Vehicle Customization on page 4 52 for more information 4 37 DIC Operation and Displays The DIC has different displays which can be accessed by pressing the DIC buttons located on the instrument panel next to the instrument panel cluster DIC Buttons The buttons are the trip fuel vehicle information customization and set reset buttons The button functions are detailed in the following pages ZN Trip Fuel Press this button to display the odometer trip odometers fuel range average economy fuel used timer average speed and digital tachometer 4 38 Ti Vehicle Information Press this button to display the oil life units tire pressure readings for vehicles with the Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS engine hours Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS programming for vehicles with the TPMS and without a Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter compass zone and compass calibration on vehicles with this
64. dealer non retailer accessories can affect the vehicle s performance See Accessories and Modifications on page 6 3 for more information Locking Rear Axle Vehicles with a locking rear axle can give more traction on snow mud ice sand or gravel It works like a standard axle most of the time but when traction is low this feature will allow the rear wheel with the most traction to move the vehicle All Wheel Drive AWD System If the vehicle has this feature engine power is sent to all four wheels when extra traction is needed This is like four wheel drive but there is no separate lever or switch to engage or disengage the front axle It is fully automatic and adjusts itself as needed for road conditions Steering Power Steering If power steering assist is lost because the engine stops or the system is not functioning the vehicle can be steered but it will take more effort Steering Tips It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed Traction in a curve depends on the condition of the tires and the road surface the angle at which the curve is banked and vehicle speed While in a curve speed is the one factor that can be controlled If there is a need to reduce speed do it before entering the curve while the front wheels are straight Try to adjust the speed so you can drive through the curve Maintain a reasonable steady speed Wait to accelerate until out of the curve and then accelerate gently i
65. die SI Ie yOu vane Top of hills Be alert something could be in your lane stalled car accident hot that they would not work well You would then have poor braking or even none going down a hill You could crash Shift down to let the engine Pay attention to special road signs falling rocks assist the brakes on a steep downhill slope area winding roads long grades passing or no passing zones and take appropriate action Winter Driving Driving on Snow or Ice Drive carefully when there is snow or ice between the tires and the road creating less traction or grip Wet ice can occur at about 0 C 32 F when freezing rain begins to fall resulting in even less traction Avoid driving on wet ice or in freezing rain until roads can be treated with salt or sand Drive with caution whatever the condition Accelerate gently so traction is not lost Accelerating too quickly causes the wheels to spin and makes the surface under the tires slick so there is even less traction Try not to break the fragile traction If you accelerate too fast the drive wheels will spin and polish the surface under the tires even more The Antilock Brake System ABS on page 5 4 improves vehicle stability during hard stops on a slippery roads but apply the brakes sooner than when on dry pavement Allow greater following distance on any slippery road and watch for slippery spots Icy patches can occur on otherwise clear roads in shaded
66. door to show the old mileage reading when the new odometer was installed 4 22 Trip Odometer The trip odometer can show how far the vehicle has been driven since the trip odometer was last set to zero Press the Trip Fuel button on the Driver Information Center DIC switch to display the trip odometer and the regular odometer information See DIC Operation and Displays on page 4 38 for more information on resetting the trip odometer To display the odometer reading with the ignition off press the Trip Fuel button on the Driver Information Center DIC switch Safety Belt Reminders Safety Belt Reminder Light When the engine is started a chime sounds for several seconds to remind a driver to fasten the safety belt unless the driver safety belt is already buckled The safety belt light comes on and stays on for several seconds then flashes for several more This chime and light are repeated if the driver remains unbuckled and the vehicle is in motion If the driver safety belt is already buckled neither the chime nor the light comes on Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light Several seconds after the engine is started a chime sounds for several seconds to remind the front passenger to buckle their safety belt The passenger safety belt light located on the instrument panel comes on and stays on for several seconds and then flashes for several more This chime and light are repeated if the passenger remains unb
67. eK 6 51 Center High Mounted Stoplamp CHMSL 6 51 Talllamps 52 5 2 n ritet an I ctum E 6 52 License Plate Lamp eee 6 53 Replacement Bulbs eeesesessse 6 53 Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement 6 54 Section 6 Service and Appearance Care D reU 6 55 Instrument Panel Vinyl and Other Plastic Tire Sidewall Labeling esses 6 56 SUMACES se E 6 98 Tire Terminology and Definitions 6 60 Care of Safety Belts eese 6 99 Inflation Tire Pressure esses 6 63 Weatherstrips esses 6 99 Dual Tire Operation eese 6 64 Washing Your Vehicle sssss 6 99 Tire Pressure Monitor System 6 65 Cleaning Exterior Lamps Lenses 6 100 Tire Pressure Monitor Operation 6 66 GI cane ted wcckdetababiianuehenlgeete 6 100 Tire Inspection and Rotation 6 69 Windshield and Wiper Blades 6 101 When It Is Time for New Tires 6 72 Aluminum Wheels eeceseeeseeese 6 101 Buying New Tires ote citet ene 6 73 Hc pee 6 102 Different Size Tires and Wheels 6 74 Sheet Metal Damage sssssessss 6 102 Uniform Tire Quality Grading 6 75 Finish Damage
68. engine is running the gage shows the condition of the charging system Readings between the low and high warning zones indicate the normal operating range Readings in the low warning zone may occur when a large number of electrical accessories are operating in the vehicle and the engine is left at an idle for an extended period This condition is normal since the charging system is not able to provide full power at engine idle As engine speeds are increased this condition should correct itself as higher engine speeds allow the charging system to create maximum power 4 27 The vehicle can be only driven for a short time with the reading in either warning zone If it must be driven turn off all unnecessary accessories Readings in either warning zone indicate a possible problem in the electrical system Have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible Brake System Warning Light The vehicle s hydraulic brake system is divided into two parts If one part is not working the other part can still work and stop the vehicle For good braking both need to work If the warning light comes on there could be a brake problem Have the brake system inspected right away Canada United States This light should come on briefly when ignition key is turned to ON RUN If it does not come on have it fixed so it will be ready to warn if there is a problem 4 28 When the ignition is on the brake system warning light also
69. feature and RKE transmitter programming Customization Press this button to customize the feature settings on your vehicle See DIC Vehicle Customization on page 4 52 for more information V Set Reset Press this button to set or reset certain functions and to turn off or acknowledge messages on the DIC Trip Fuel Menu Items ZN Trip Fuel Press this button to scroll through the following menu items Odometer Press the trip fuel button until XX km mi displays This display shows the distance the vehicle has been driven in either kilometers km or miles mi Trip Odometers Press the trip fuel button until A or B displays This display shows the current distance traveled in either kilometers km or miles mi since the last reset for each trip odometer Both trip odometers can be used at the same time Each trip odometer can be reset to zero separately by pressing the set reset button while the desired trip odometer is displayed The trip odometer has a feature called the retro active reset This can be used to set the trip odometer to the number of miles kilometers driven since the ignition was last turned on This can be used if the trip odometer is not reset at the beginning of the trip To use the retro active reset feature press and hold the set reset button for at least four seconds The trip odometer will display the number of kilometers km or miles mi driven since the ignition was last turned o
70. for your vehicle are listed on the Tire and Loading Information label located on the driver side center pillar B pillar See Loading the Vehicle on page 5 17 You may notice during cooler conditions that the low tire pressure warning light will appear when the vehicle is first started and then turn off as you drive This may be an early indicator that your tire pressures are getting low and the tires need to be inflated to the proper pressure Note The Tire Pressure Monitor can alert you about low tire pressure but it does not replace normal monthly tire maintenance It is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressures See Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 6 65 and Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on page 6 66 Engine Oil Life System The engine oil life system calculates engine oil life based on vehicle use and displays a DIC message when it is necessary to change the engine oil and filter The oil life system should be reset to 100 only following an oil change Resetting the Oil Life System 1 Turn the ignition to ON RUN with the engine off 2 Fully press and release the accelerator pedal three times within five seconds 3 Turn the key to LOCK OFF See Engine Oil Life System on page 6 18 Fuel E85 85 Ethanol If the vehicle has the 4 8L V8 engine VIN Code A the 5 3L V8 engine VIN Code 4 or the 6 0L V8 engine VIN Code G and the N15 flexible fuel option you can use either unleaded gasolin
71. front passenger frontal airbag the off indicator in the airbag off light should light and stay lit when the vehicle is started See Airbag Off Light on page 4 24 2 Put the child restraint on the seat 3 Pick up the latch plate and run the lap and shoulder portions of the vehicle s safety belt through or around the restraint The child restraint instructions will show you how 2 57 4 Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks 5 Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of Position the release button on the buckle so that the retractor to set the lock the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if necessary 2 58 6 To tighten the belt push down on the child restraint pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor When installing a forward facing child restraint it may be helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt 7 If the vehicle does not have a rear seat and the child restraint has a top tether follow the child restraint manufacturer s instructions regarding the use of the top tether See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children LATCH on page 2 42 for more information 8 Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure To remove the child restraint unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and let it return to the stowed position If
72. have a passenger sensing system for the right front passenger position which includes sensors that are part of the passenger seat The passenger sensing system may not operate properly if the original seat trim is replaced with non GM covers upholstery or trim or with GM covers upholstery or trim designed for a different vehicle Any object such as an aftermarket seat heater or a comfort enhancing pad or device installed under or on top of the seat fabric could also interfere with the operation of the passenger sensing system This could either prevent proper deployment of the passenger airbag s or prevent the passenger sensing system from properly turning off the passenger airbag s See Passenger Sensing System on page 2 72 If you have any questions about this you should contact Customer Assistance before you modify the vehicle The phone numbers and addresses for Customer Assistance are in Step Two of the Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this manual See Customer Satisfaction Procedure on page 8 2 If the vehicle has rollover roof rail airbags see Different Size Tires and Wheels on page 6 74 for additional important information Because have a disability have to get my vehicle modified How can find out whether this will affect my airbag system If you have questions call Customer Assistance The phone numbers and addresses for Customer Assistance are in Step Two of the Customer Satisfaction Procedure in
73. in the hoist shaft hole in the bumper clockwise to raise the cable back up 6 94 Have the hoist assembly inspected as soon as you can You will not be able to store a spare or flat tire using the hoist assembly until it has been repaired or replaced To continue changing the flat tire return to Step 4 of Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire on page 6 85 Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools A WARNING Storing a jack a tire or other equipment in the passenger compartment of the vehicle could cause injury In a sudden stop or collision loose equipment could strike someone Store all these in the proper place 1 Put the tire on the ground at the rear of the vehicle with the valve stem pointed down Pull the retaining bar through the center of the wheel making sure it is properly attached Pull the wheel toward the rear of the vehicle keeping the cable tight Put the chisel end of the hoist extension on an angle through the hole in the rear door frame above the bumper Raise the tire fully against the underside of the vehicle Continue turning the wheel wrench until the tire is secure and the cable is tight The spare tire hoist cannot be overtightened Make sure the tire is stored securely Push pull A and then try to turn B the tire If the tire moves use the wheel wrench to tighten the cable You will hear two clicks when the tire is up all the way
74. inflation pressure If your vehicle has DIC buttons tire pressure levels can be viewed by the driver For additional information and details about the DIC operation and displays see DIC Operation and Displays on page 4 38 and DIC Warnings and Messages on page 4 44 The low tire pressure warning light may come on in cool weather when the vehicle is first started and then turn off as you start to drive This could be an early indicator that the air pressure in the tire s are getting low and need to be inflated to the proper pressure A Tire and Loading Information label attached to your vehicle shows the size of your vehicle s original equipment tires and the correct inflation pressure for your vehicle s tires when they are cold See Loading the Vehicle on page 5 17 for an example of the Tire and Loading Information label and its location on your vehicle Also see nflation Tire Pressure on page 6 63 Your vehicle s TPMS can warn you about a low tire pressure condition but it does not replace normal tire maintenance See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 6 69 and Tires on page 6 55 Notice Liquid tire sealants could damage the Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS sensors Sensor damage caused by using a tire sealant is not covered by your warranty Do not use liquid tire sealants TPMS Malfunction Light and Message The TPMS will not function properly if one or more of the TPMS sensors are missing or inoperable When t
75. is off RES Resume Accelerate Press to make the vehicle accelerate or resume to a previously set speed SET Set Coast Press to set the speed or make the vehicle decelerate amp Cancel Press to cancel cruise control without erasing the set speed from memory Setting Cruise Control Cruise control will not work if the parking brake is set or if the master cylinder brake fluid level is low The cruise control light on the instrument panel cluster comes on after the cruise control has been set to the desired speed A WARNING If you leave your cruise control on when you are not using cruise you might hit a button and go into cruise when you do not want to You could be startled and even lose control Keep the cruise control switch off until you want to use cruise control 1 Press the fe button 2 Get up to the desired speed 3 Press the SET button located on the steering wheel and release it 4 Take your foot off the accelerator Resuming a Set Speed If the cruise control is set at a desired speed and then the brakes are applied this shuts off the cruise control But it does not need to be reset Once the vehicle speed reaches about 25 mph 40 km h or more press the RES button on the steering wheel The vehicle returns to the previously set speed and stays there Increasing Speed While Using Cruise Control To increase the cruise speed while using cruise control Press and hold
76. keep your feet on the floor in front of you The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on the hips just touching the thighs In a crash this applies force to the strong pelvic bones and you would be less likely to slide under the lap belt If you slid under it the belt would apply force on your abdomen This could cause serious or even fatal injuries The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces The shoulder belt locks if there is a sudden stop or crash Q What is wrong with this A WARNING You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is too loose In a crash you would move forward too much which could increase injury The shoulder belt should fit snugly against your body A The shoulder belt is too loose It will not give as much protection this way Q What is wrong with this A The lap belt is too loose It will not give nearly as much protection this way A WARNING You can be seriously hurt if your lap belt is too loose In a crash you could slide under the lap belt and apply force on your abdomen This could cause serious or even fatal injuries The lap belt should be worn low and snug on the hips just touching the thighs Q What is wrong with this A The belt is buckled
77. kg 12 000 Ibs 5 443 kg 4 10 7 400 Ibs 3 295 kg 13 000 Ibs 5 897 kg 6 0L V8 3 73 8 400 Ibs 3 810 kg 14 000 Ibs 6 350 kg i 4 10 10 000 Ibs 4 536 kg 16 000 Ibs 7 257 kg G3500 Cargo Van 2WD Long Wheelbase m 3 73 6 100 Ibs 2 767 kg 12 000 Ibs 5 443 kg 4 10 7 100 Ibs 3 221 kg 13 000 Ibs 5 897 kg 6 0L V8 8 200 Ibs 3 719 kg 14 000 Ibs 6 350 kg 4 10 10 000 Ibs 4 536 kg 16 000 Ibs 7 257 kg G3500 Passenger Van 2WD Short Wheelbase 6 0L V8 7 600 Ibs 3 447 kg 14 000 Ibs 6 350 kg G3500 Passenger Van 2WD Long Wheelbase 6 0L V8 7 300 Ibs 3 311 kg 14 000 Ibs 6 350 kg The Gross Combined Weight Rating GCWR is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle and trailer including any passengers cargo equipment and conversion The GCWR for the vehicle should not be exceeded Ask your dealer retailer for our trailering information or advice or write us at our Customer Assistance Offices See Customer Assistance Offices on page 8 5 for more information Weight of the Trailer Tongue The tongue load A of any trailer is an important weight to measure because it affects the total gross weight of the vehicle The Gross Vehicle Weight GVW includes the curb weight of the vehicle any cargo carried in it and the people who will be riding in the vehicle If there are a lot of options equipment passengers or cargo in the vehicle it will reduce the tongue weight the vehicle can carry which will als
78. memory For more information see Cruise Control on page 4 6 Power Outlets The accessory power outlets can be used to connect auxiliary electrical equipment such as a cellular phone The vehicle may have two accessory power outlets located on the instrument panel To use the accessory power outlet lift the cover See Accessory Power Outlet s on page 4 14 and Ashtray s and Cigarette Lighter on page 4 15 If Equipped Performance and Maintenance StabiliTrak The vehicle may have a traction control system that limits wheel spin and the StabiliTrak system that assists with directional control of the vehicle in difficult driving conditions Both systems turn on automatically every time the vehicle is started To turn off both traction control and Electronic Stability Control press and hold amp until amp illuminates and the appropriate DIC message displays See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 4 44 Press and release the button again to turn on both Systems For more information see StabiliTrak System on page 5 5 Tire Pressure Monitor This vehicle may have a Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS The Tire Pressure Monitor alerts you when a significant reduction in pressure occurs in one or e more of the vehicle s tires by illuminating the low tire pressure warning light on the instrument cluster The warning light will remain on until the tire pressure is corrected The proper tire pressures
79. not to do with safety belts A WARNING Do not let anyone ride where a safety belt cannot be worn properly In a crash if you or your passenger s are not wearing safety belts the injuries can be much worse You can hit things inside the vehicle harder or be ejected from the vehicle You and your passenger s can be seriously injured or killed In the same crash you might not be if you are buckled up Always fasten your safety belt and check that your passenger s are restrained properly too A WARNING It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and safety belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a safety belt properly This vehicle has indicators as a reminder to buckle the safety belts See Safety Belt Reminders on page 4 23 for additional information In most states and in all Canadian provinces the law requires wearing safety belts Here is why You never know if you will be in a crash If you do have a crash you do not know if it will be a serious one A few crashes are mild and some crashes can be so serious that even buckled up a person would not survive But most crashes are in between In many of them people who buckle up can survive and sometimes walk away
80. of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half 1 5 times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate Traction AA A B C The traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C Those grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction performance 6 75 Temperature A B C The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum require
81. oils with the starburst symbol that meet GM Standard GM6094M are all that is needed for good performance and engine protection Engine oil system flushes are not recommended and could cause engine damage not covered by the vehicle warranty Engine Oil Life System When to Change Engine Oil This vehicle has a computer system that indicates when to change the engine oil and filter This is based on engine revolutions and engine temperature and not on mileage Based on driving conditions the mileage at which an oil change is indicated can vary considerably For the oil life system to work properly the system must be reset every time the oil is changed When the system has calculated that oil life has been diminished it indicates that an oil change is necessary A CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message comes on See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 4 44 Change the oil as soon as possible within the next 1 000 km 600 miles It is possible that if driving under the best conditions the oil life system might not indicate that an oil change is necessary for over a year 6 18 However the engine oil and filter must be changed at least once a year and at this time the system must be reset Your dealer retailer has trained service people who will perform this work using genuine parts and reset the system It is also important to check the oil regularly and keep it at the proper level If the system is ever reset accidentally the oil must b
82. or towing arrangements Online Owner Center The Online Owner Center is a complimentary service that includes online service reminders vehicle maintenance tips online owner manual special privileges and more Sign up today at www gmownercenter com gmc U S or www gm ca Canada Section 2 Seats and Restraint System Head Restraints cccccccccccecccceeeeeeeeees 2 2 Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Seat ds Cm 2 49 Front Seals oon ree ee ees 2 2 Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front Manual Seats cesse 2 2 Seat Position With Passenger Sensing Power Seat x 2 3 SYS EM MEM CMM PN 2 52 Reclining Seatbacks sseeeseesess 2 4 Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front Rear Seats ooo ed aeann 2 6 Seat Position With Airbag On Off Switch 2 56 Rear Seat Operation sss eene 2 6 Airbag System e 2 60 Safety Belts ssssssemI 2 10 Where Are the Airbags ssssseeee 2 62 Safety Belts They Are for Everyone 2 10 When Should an Airbag Inflate 2 65 How to Wear Safety Belts Properly 2 15 What Makes an Airbag Inflate 2 66 Lap Shoulder Belt rede 2 24 How Does an Airbag Restrain 2 66 Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy 2 29 What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates 2 67 Safety Belt Extender
83. outlets with some air directed toward the windshield yi Floor Air is directed to the floor outlets with some air directed to the windshield and side windows Defog This mode clears the windows of fog or moisture Outside air is directed to the floor and defroster outlets Adjust the temperature knob for warmer or cooler air The air conditioning compressor might turn on in this setting to dehumidify the air qp Defrost This mode clears the windshield of fog or frost more quickly Air is directed to the windshield with some to the floor outlets and front side windows The air conditioning compressor might turn on in this setting to dehumidify the air Do not drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear Vehicles With Air Conditioning A Fan Control B Temperature Control C Air Delivery Mode Control D Rear Window Defogger On hot days open the windows to let hot inside air escape then close them This helps to reduce the time needed for the vehicle to cool down and the system operates more efficiently X Air Conditioning Cools and dehumidifies the air inside of the vehicle x Maximum Air Conditioning Cools the air inside the vehicle faster by recirculating the inside air Rear Window Defogger For vehicles with a rear window defogger a warming grid is used to remove fog or frost from the rear window It only works when the ignition is in ON RUN 3 Rear Window Defogger Press
84. page 4 4 Hazard Warning Flashers on page 4 3 Instrument Panel Cluster on page 4 21 Shift Lever See Starting the Engine on page 3 23 Climate Control System on page 4 15 Audio System s on page 4 59 Exterior Lamps on page 4 9 Instrument Panel Brightness on page 4 12 Cruise Control on page 4 6 Fast Idle System If Equipped See Duramax Diesel Manual for more information Ozzr CANDO D Tilt Wheel on page 4 3 Horn on page 4 3 Audio Steering Wheel Controls on page 4 77 Tow Haul Mode Button See Tow Haul Mode under Towing a Trailer on page 5 26 Accessory Power Outlet s on page 4 14 StabiliTrak System on page 5 5 If Equipped Airbag Off Switch on page 2 69 Storage Areas on page 3 42 Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 4 26 Rear Heating System on page 4 18 If Equipped Initial Drive Information This section provides a brief overview about some of the important features that may or may not be on your specific vehicle For more detailed information refer to each of the features which can be found later in this owner manual Remote Keyless Entry RKE System The RKE transmitter is used to remotely lock and unlock the doors from up to 20 m 65 feet away from the vehicle a a Press amp l to unlock the driver door 0 80m Press iil again within five seconds to unlock all remaining doors Press Bi to unlock only the cargo doors Press to lock all doors Lock and un
85. part of the right front passenger seat The sensors are designed to detect the presence of a properly seated occupant and determine if the right front passenger frontal airbag should be enabled may inflate or not Accident statistics show that children are safer if they are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat We recommend that children be secured in a rear seat including an infant or a child riding in a rear facing child restraint a child riding in a forward facing child seat an older child riding in a booster seat and children who are large enough using safety belts A label on the sun visor says Never put a rear facing child seat in the front This is because the risk to the rear facing child is so great if the airbag deploys A WARNING A child in a rear facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag inflates This is because the back of the rear facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating airbag A child ina forward facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag inflates and the passenger seat is in a forward position Even if the passenger sensing system has turned off the right front passenger frontal airbag no system is fail safe No one can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy under some unusual circumstance even though the airbag is turned off Secure rear facing child restrain
86. ply construction in the tire The letter R means radial ply construction the letter D means diagonal or bias ply construction and the letter B means belted bias ply construction E Rim Diameter Diameter of the wheel in inches F Service Description These characters represent the load index and speed rating of the tire The load index represents the load carry capacity a tire is certified to carry The speed rating is the maximum speed a tire is certified to carry a load LT245 75R16 E120 116S HI Light Truck LT Metric Tire A B C D A Light Truck LT Metric Tire The United States version of a metric tire sizing system The letters LT as the first two characters in the tire size means a light truck tire engineered to standards set by the U S Tire and Rim Association B Tire Width The three digit number indicates the tire section width in millimeters from sidewall to sidewall C Aspect Ratio A two digit number that indicates the tire height to width measurements For example if the tire size aspect ratio is 75 as shown in item C of the light truck LT Metric tire illustration it would mean that the tire s sidewall is 75 percent as high as it is wide D Construction Code A letter code is used to indicate the type of ply construction in the tire The letter R means radial ply construction the letter D means diagonal or bias ply construction and the letter B means belted bias ply construction
87. repaired by a qualified technician using the proper equipment and quality replacement parts Poorly performed collision repairs diminish your vehicle s resale value and safety performance can be compromised in subsequent collisions Collision Parts Genuine GM Collision parts are new parts made with the same materials and construction methods as the parts with which your vehicle was originally built Genuine GM Collision parts are your best choice to ensure that your vehicle s designed appearance durability and safety are preserved The use of Genuine GM parts can help maintain your GM New Vehicle Warranty Recycled original equipment parts may also be used for repair These parts are typically removed from vehicles that were total losses in prior crashes In most cases the parts being recycled are from undamaged sections of the vehicle A recycled original equipment GM part may be an acceptable choice to maintain your vehicle s originally designed appearance and safety performance however the history of these parts is not known Such parts are not covered by your GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty and any related failures are not covered by that warranty Aftermarket collision parts are also available These are made by companies other than GM and may not have been tested for your vehicle As a result these parts may fit poorly exhibit premature durability corrosion problems and may not perform properly in subsequent collisions
88. sales service or parts manager contact the owner of the dealership or the general manager STEP TWO If after contacting a member of dealership management it appears your concern cannot be resolved by the dealership without further help in the U S call the GMC Consumer Relations Manager at 1 800 GMC 8782 1 800 462 8782 Customer Assistance prompt In Canada call General Motors of Canada Customer Communication at 1 800 263 3777 English or 1 800 263 7854 French 8 2 We encourage you to call the toll free number in order to give your inquiry prompt attention Have the following information available to give the Customer Assistance Representative Vehicle Identification Number VIN This is available from the vehicle registration or title or the plate at the top left of the instrument panel and visible through the windshield Dealership name and location Vehicle delivery date and present mileage When contacting GMC remember that your concern will likely be resolved at a dealer s facility That is why we suggest following Step One first STEP THREE U S Owners Both General Motors and your dealer are committed to making sure you are completely satisfied with your new vehicle However if you continue to remain unsatisfied after following the procedure outlined in Steps One and Two you can file with the Better Business Bureau BBB Auto Line Program to enforce your rights The BBB Auto Line Program is
89. setting is displayed on the DIC APPROACH LIGHTING This feature allows you to select whether or not to have the exterior lights turn on briefly during low light periods after unlocking the vehicle using the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter Press the customization button until APPROACH LIGHTING appears on the DIC display Press the set reset button once to access the settings for this feature Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings OFF The exterior lights will not turn on when you unlock the vehicle with the RKE transmitter ON default If it is dark enough outside the exterior lights will turn on briefly when you unlock the vehicle with the RKE transmitter The lights will remain on for 20 seconds or until the lock button on the RKE transmitter is pressed or the vehicle is no longer off See Remote Keyless Entry RKE System Operation on page 3 4 for more information NO CHANGE No change will be made to this feature The current setting will remain To select a setting press the set reset button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC CHIME VOLUME This feature allows you to select the volume level of the chime Press the customization button until CHIME VOLUME appears on the DIC display Press the set reset button once to access the settings for this feature Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings NORMAL The chime volum
90. snow ice or sand without damaging the transmission see f Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand Mud Ice or Snow on page 5 16 N Neutral In this position the engine does not connect with the wheels To restart when you are already moving use N Neutral only Also use N Neutral when the vehicle is being towed A WARNING Shifting into a drive gear while the engine is running at high speed is dangerous Unless your foot is firmly on the brake pedal the vehicle could move very rapidly You could lose control and hit people or objects Do not shift into a drive gear while the engine is running at high speed Notice Shifting out of P Park or N Neutral with the engine running at high speed may damage the transmission The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty Be sure the engine is not running at high speed when shifting the vehicle 3 27 D Drive This position is for normal driving It provides the best fuel economy If you need more power for passing and you are Going less than about 35 mph 55 km h push the accelerator pedal about halfway down Going about 35 mph 55 km h or more push the accelerator all the way down By doing this the vehicle shifts down to the next gear and has more power D Drive can be used when towing a trailer carrying a heavy load or driving on steep hills You might want to shift the transmission to a lower gear selection if the transmission shifts
91. start it again If it still does not start have your vehicle serviced by your dealer retailer DIC Vehicle Customization Your vehicle may have customization capabilities that allow you to program certain features to one preferred setting Customization features can only be programmed to one setting on the vehicle and cannot be programmed to a preferred setting for two different drivers All of the customization options may not be available on your vehicle Only the options available will be displayed on the DIC The default settings for the customization features were set when your vehicle left the factory but may have been changed from their default state since then The customization preferences are automatically recalled To change customization preferences use the following procedure Entering the Feature Settings Menu 1 Turn the ignition on and place the vehicle in P Park To avoid excessive drain on the battery it is recommended that the headlamps are turned off 2 Press the customization button to enter the feature settings menu If the menu is not available FEATURE SETTINGS AVAILABLE IN PARK will display Before entering the menu make sure the vehicle is in P Park Feature Settings Menu Items The following are customization features that allow you to program settings to the vehicle DISPLAY IN ENGLISH This feature will only display if a language other than English has been set This feature allow
92. switch to the ACC ACCESSORY or LOCK OFF position Notice Cranking the engine for long periods of time by returning the key to the START position immediately after cranking has ended can overheat and damage the cranking motor and drain the battery Wait at least 15 seconds between each try to let the cranking motor cool down 3 24 2 If the engine does not start after 5 10 seconds especially in very cold weather below 0 F or 18 C it could be flooded with too much gasoline Try pushing the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and holding it there as you hold the key in START for up to 15 seconds Wait at least 15 seconds between each try to allow the cranking motor to cool down When the engine starts let go of the key and accelerator If the vehicle starts briefly but then stops again do the same thing This clears the extra gasoline from the engine Do not race the engine immediately after starting it Operate the engine and transmission gently until the oil warms up and lubricates all moving parts Notice The engine is designed to work with the electronics in the vehicle If you add electrical parts or accessories you could change the way the engine operates Before adding electrical equipment check with your dealer retailer If you do not the engine might not perform properly Any resulting damage would not be covered by the vehicle warranty Fast Idle System Fast Idle System with Switch If the vehicle
93. system comes on immediately Once the vehicle leaves the garage it takes approximately 30 seconds for the automatic headlamp system to change to DRL if it is light outside During that delay the instrument panel cluster may not be as bright as usual Make sure the instrument panel brightness control is in the full bright position See nstrument Panel Brightness on page 4 12 Instrument Panel Brightness The knob for this feature is located next to the exterior lamps control es Instrument Panel Lights Push the knob to extend and then turn clockwise or counterclockwise to brighten or dim the instrument panel lights and the radio display This only works if the headlamps or parking lamps are on To turn on the dome lamps with the vehicle doors closed turn the knob all the way clockwise 4 12 Dome Lamps The dome lamps come on when any door is opened They turn off after all the doors are closed The dome lamps can also be turned on by turning the instrument panel brightness knob located on the instrument panel to the left of the steering column clockwise to the farthest position In this position the dome lamps remain on whether a door is opened or closed Dome Lamp Override The dome lamp override button is located next to the exterior lamps control The dome lamp override sets the dome lamps to remain off or come on automatically when a door is opened p Dome Lamp Override Press the button in and
94. terminals instead of the terminals on the battery The remote positive terminal is located behind a red plastic cover near the engine accessory drive bracket on the driver s side of the engine compartment below the alternator To uncover the remote positive terminal open the red plastic cover The remote negative terminal is located on the engine drive bracket on all V8 engines and is marked GND Ground On V6 engines the remote negative terminal is located on a tab attached to the engine accessory drive bracket and is marked GND Ground 6 42 A WARNING Using an open flame near a battery can cause battery gas to explode People have been hurt doing this and some have been blinded Use a flashlight if you need more light Be sure the battery has enough water You do not need to add water to the battery installed in your new vehicle But if a battery has filler caps be sure the right amount of fluid is there If it is low add water to take care of that first If you do not explosive gas could be present Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you Do not get it on you If you accidentally get it in your eyes or on your skin flush the place with water and get medical help immediately A WARNING Fans or other moving engine parts can injure you badly Keep your hands away from moving parts once the engine is running 5 Check that the jumper cables do not have loose or missing insulat
95. the indicated intervals and the maintenance be recorded First Engine Oil Change After Every First Engine Oil Change After Every 160 000 km 100 000 Miles 240 000 km 150 000 Miles Automatic transmission fluid change normal Engine cooling system drain flush and refill service See Automatic Transmission Fluid 4 Speed Transmission on page 6 20 or Automatic Transmission Fluid 6 Speed Transmission on page 6 23 All wheel drive only Transfer case fluid change normal service Check vent hose at transfer case for kinks and proper installation Check to be sure vent hose is unobstructed clear and free of debris During any maintenance if a power washer is used to clean mud and dirt from the underbody care should be taken to not directly spray the transfer case output seals High pressure water can overcome the seals and contaminate the transfer case fluid Contaminated fluid will decrease the life of the transfer case and should be replaced Spark plug replacement and spark plug wires inspection An Emission Control Service cooling system and cap pressure check and cleaning of outside of radiator and air conditioning condenser or every 5 years whichever occurs first See Engine Coolant on page 6 28 An Emission Control Service Engine accessory drive belt inspection for fraying excessive cracks or obvious damage and replacement if needed An Emission Control Service Scheduled Maintenance Service Change
96. the contact continues slow down until it stops Driving too fast or spinning the wheels with chains on will damage your vehicle If a Tire Goes Flat It is unusual for a tire to blowout while you are driving especially if you maintain your vehicle s tires properly If air goes out of a tire it is much more likely to leak out slowly But if you should ever have a blowout here are a few tips about what to expect and what to do If a front tire fails the flat tire creates a drag that pulls the vehicle toward that side Take your foot off the accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly Steer to maintain lane position and then gently brake to a stop well out of the traffic lane A rear blowout particularly on a curve acts much like a skid and may require the same correction you would use in a skid In any rear blowout remove your foot from the accelerator pedal Get the vehicle under control by steering the way you want the vehicle to go It may be very bumpy and noisy but you can still steer Gently brake to a stop well off the road if possible A WARNING Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do maintenance or repairs is dangerous without the appropriate safety equipment and training If a jack is provided with the vehicle it is designed only for changing a flat tire If it is used for anything else you or others could be badly injured or killed if the vehicle slips off the jack If a jack is provided with t
97. the first playlist Play begins from the first track in the first folder and continues sequentially through all tracks in each folder When the last track of the last folder has played play continues from the first track of the first folder When play enters a new folder the display does not automatically show the new folder name unless you have chosen the folder mode as the default display The new track name displays File System and Naming The song name that displays is the song name that is contained in the ID3 tag If the song name is not present in the ID3 tag then the radio displays the file name without the extension Such as mp3 as the track name Track names longer than 32 characters or four pages are shortened Parts of words on the last page of text and the extension of the filename does not display 4 74 Preprogrammed Playlists Preprogrammed playlists that were created using WinAmp MusicMatch or Real Jukebox software can be accessed however they cannot be edited using the radio These playlists are treated as special folders containing compressed audio song files Playing an MP3 Insert a CD R or CD RW partway into the slot Single CD Player or press the load button and wait for the message to insert disc Six Disc CD Player label side up The player pulls it in and the CD R or CD RW should begin playing If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD R or CD RW in the player it s
98. the floor rails 6 Remove the seat from the vehicle 7 For the first row rear seat stow the safety belt latch by attaching the clip on the safety belt latch to the trim just inside the side door Three Passenger Seat Shown The passenger side pin has a black cap with a white R marked on it For the remaining rear seats stow the safety belt On a four passenger seat each half of the seat has latch plate on the clip at the window trim a set of pins The driver side has a set marked L and the passenger side has a set marked R If the vehicle has floor mats the pins will be located under a flap that has been cut into the mat 3 Pull the pin handle up to disengage the pin from the retaining clip then pull the pin out 4 Repeat this procedure for the other pins Replacing the Rear Seats A seat that is not locked into place properly can move around in a collision or sudden stop People in the vehicle could be injured Be sure to lock the seat into place properly when installing it A safety belt that is improperly routed not properly attached or twisted will not provide the protection needed in a crash The person wearing the belt could be seriously injured After raising the rear seatback always check to be sure that the safety belts are properly routed and attached and are not twisted Position the seat into the open slots in both rails Push the seat forward in the rail hooking both seat bas
99. the safety belt can be WARNING Continued removed from the guide Slide the guide into its storage pocket on the side of the seatback 4 Buckle position and release the safety belt as described in previously in this section Make 2 28 Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy Safety belts work for everyone including pregnant women Like all occupants they are more likely to be seriously injured if they do not wear safety belts A pregnant woman should wear a lap shoulder belt and the lap portion should be worn as low as possible below the rounding throughout the pregnancy The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the mother When a safety belt is worn properly it is more likely that the fetus will not be hurt in a crash For pregnant women as for anyone the key to making safety belts effective is wearing them properly Safety Belt Extender If the vehicle s safety belt will fasten around you you should use it But if a safety belt is not long enough your dealer retailer will order you an extender When you go in to order it take the heaviest coat you will wear so the extender will be long enough for you To help avoid personal injury do not let someone else use it and use it only for the seat it is made to fit The extender has been designed for adults Never use it for securing child seats To wear it attach it to the regular safety belt For more information see the instruction sheet that comes wi
100. this manual See Customer Satisfaction Procedure on page 8 2 In addition your dealer retailer and the service manual have information about the location of the airbag sensors sensing and diagnostic module and airbag wiring Restraint System Check Checking the Restraint Systems Safety Belts Now and then check that the safety belt reminder light safety belts buckles latch plates retractors and anchorages are all working properly Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system parts that might keep a safety belt system from doing its job See your dealer retailer to have it repaired Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a crash They can rip apart under impact forces If a belt is torn or frayed get a new one right away Make sure the safety belt reminder light is working See Safety Belt Reminders on page 4 23 for more information Keep safety belts clean and dry See Care of Safety Belts on page 6 99 Airbags The airbag system does not need regularly scheduled maintenance or replacement Make sure the airbag readiness light is working See Airbag Readiness Light on page 4 23 for more information Notice f an airbag covering is damaged opened or broken the airbag may not work properly Do not open or break the airbag coverings If there are any opened or broken airbag covers have the airbag covering and or airbag module replaced For the location of the airbag modules see What Makes a
101. too often Downshifting the transmission in slippery road conditions could result in skidding See Skidding under Loss of Control on page 5 9 The vehicle has a shift stabilization feature that adjusts the transmission shifting to the current driving conditions in order to reduce rapid upshifts and downshifts This shift stabilization feature is designed to determine before making an upshift if the engine is able to maintain vehicle speed by analyzing things such as vehicle speed throttle position and vehicle load If the shift stabilization feature determines that a current vehicle speed cannot be maintained the transmission does not upshift and instead 3 28 holds the current gear In some cases this could appear to be a delayed shift however the transmission is operating normally The transmission uses adaptive shift controls Adaptive shift controls continually compares key shift parameters to pre programmed ideal shifts stored in the transmissions computer The transmission constantly makes adjustments to improve vehicle performance according to how the vehicle is being used such as with a heavy load or when temperature changes During this adaptive shift control process shifting might feel different as the transmission determines the best settings The shift quality of a new vehicle may not be ideal because the Adaptive Shift Control process may not have determined the best settings for a particular shift or condition
102. volume compensation The display times out after approximately 10 seconds Each higher setting allows for more radio volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds 4 64 Finding a Station BAND Press to switch between FM1 and FM2 and AM The selection displays 44 Tune Turn clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the station frequency K SEEK D Press the arrows to go to the previous or to the next station and stay there To scan stations press and hold either arrow for two seconds until a beep sounds The radio goes to a station plays for a few seconds then goes to the next station For AM FM Radio and Radio with CD Base the station frequency flashes while the radio is in the scan mode Press either arrow again to stop scanning The radio seeks and scans stations only with a strong signal that are in the selected band For AM FM Radio and Radio with CD Base scan presets within the current selected band by pressing and holding either SEEK arrow for four seconds until a double beep sounds The radio goes to a stored preset plays for a few seconds if a strong signal is present then goes to the next stored preset The station frequency flashes while the radio is in the scan mode Setting Preset Stations If the radio does not have a FAV button up to 18 stations six FM1 six FM2 and six AM can be programmed on the six numbered pushbuttons by performing the following steps 1 Turn the rad
103. washer fluid on the windshield The wipers will clear the window and then either stop or return to the preset speed Z WARNING In freezing weather do not use your washer until the windshield is warmed Otherwise the washer fluid can form ice on the windshield blocking your vision Cruise Control A WARNING Cruise control can be dangerous where you cannot drive safely at a steady speed So do not use the cruise control on winding roads or in heavy traffic Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery roads On such roads fast changes in tire traction can cause excessive wheel slip and you could lose control Do not use cruise control on slippery roads With cruise control a speed of about 25 mph 40 km h or more can be maintained without keeping your foot on the accelerator Cruise control does not work at speeds below about 25 mph 40 km h When the brakes are applied cruise control is turned off If the vehicle has StabiliTrak and the system begins to limit wheel spin cruise control will automatically disengage See StabiliTrak System on page 5 5 When road conditions allow the cruise control to be safely used again it can be turned back on The cruise control buttons are located on left side of the steering wheel B amp On Off This button can both activate and turn off the system The indicator light on the button turns on when cruise control is on and turns off when cruise control
104. when any door is opened They turn off after all the doors are closed To manually turn on the dome lamps turn the instrument panel brightness knob located on the instrument panel to the left of the steering column clockwise to the farthest position In this position the dome lamps remain on whether a door is opened or closed p The dome lamp override button is located next to the exterior lamps control Press the button in and the dome lamps remain off when a door is opened Press the button again to return it to the extended position so that the dome lamps come on when a door is opened Reading Lamps For vehicles with reading lamps press the button located next to each lamp to turn it on or off The vehicle may also have reading lamps in other locations The lamps cannot be adjusted For more information on interior lighting see Instrument Panel Brightness on page 4 12 Entry Exit Lighting on page 4 13 Exterior Lighting The exterior lamps control is located on the instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel D Briefly turn the control to this position to turn the automatic headlamps and daytime running lamps DRL off or back on For vehicles first sold in Canada the off position only works for vehicles that are shifted into the P Park position AUTO Automatic operation of the headlamps at normal brightness and other exterior lamp 200 Manual operation of the parking lamps and other
105. your safety belt even with airbags The driver should sit as far back as possible while still maintaining control of the vehicle Occupants should not lean on or sleep against the door or side windows in seating positions with roof rail airbags 2 61 Where Are the Airbags A WARNING Children who are up against or very close to any airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured or killed Airbags plus lap shoulder belts offer protection for adults and older children but not for young children and infants Neither the vehicle s safety belt system nor its airbag system is designed for them Young children and infants need the protection that a child restraint system can provide Always secure children properly in your vehicle To read how see Older Children on page 2 30 or Infants and Young Children on page 2 33 There is an airbag readiness light on the instrument panel which shows the airbag symbol The driver frontal airbag is in the middle of the steering wheel The system checks the airbag electrical system for malfunctions The light tells you if there is an electrical problem See Airbag Readiness Light on page 4 23 for more information 2 62 If the vehicle has one the right front passenger airbag is in the instrument panel on the passenger side 2 Yih E N Driver Side shown Passenger Side similar If the vehicle is a cargo or passenger van with a sliding door and it has a roo
106. yourself be sure to follow all the instructions here or you could get a false reading on the dipstick Notice Too much or too little fluid can damage your transmission Too much can mean that some of the fluid could come out and fall on hot engine parts or exhaust system parts starting a fire Too little fluid could cause the transmission to overheat Be sure to get an accurate reading if you check your transmission fluid Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the transmission fluid level if you have been driving When outside temperatures are above 32 C 90 F At high speed for quite a while n heavy traffic especially in hot weather While pulling a trailer To get the right reading the fluid should be at normal operating temperature which is 82 C to 93 C 180 F to 200 F Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about 24 km 15 miles when outside temperatures are above 10 C 50 F If it is colder than 10 C 50 F drive the vehicle in D DRIVE until the engine temperature gage moves and then remains steady for 10 minutes A cold fluid check can be made after the vehicle has been sitting for eight hours or more with the engine off but this is used only as a reference Let the engine run at idle for five minutes if outside temperatures are 50 F 10 C or more If it is colder than 10 C 50 F you may have to idle the engine longer Should the fluid level be low during this cold check you mus
107. 0 people injured For persons under 21 it is against the law in every U S state to drink alcohol There are good medical psychological and developmental reasons for these laws The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol and then drive Medical research shows that alcohol in a person s system can make crash injuries worse especially injuries to the brain spinal cord or heart This means that when anyone who has been drinking driver or passenger is in a crash that person s chance of being killed or permanently disabled is higher than if the person had not been drinking Control of a Vehicle The following three systems help to control the vehicle while driving brakes steering and accelerator At times as when driving on snow or ice it is easy to ask more of those control systems than the tires and road can provide Meaning you can lose control of the vehicle Adding non dealer non retailer accessories can affect vehicle performance See Accessories and Modifications on page 6 3 Braking See Brake System Warning Light on page 4 28 Braking action involves perception time and reaction time Deciding to push the brake pedal is perception time Actually doing it is reaction time Average reaction time is about three fourths of a second But that is only an average It might be less with one driver and as long as two or three seconds or more w
108. 1 Press the vehicle information button until PRESS V TO RELEARN REMOTE KEY displays 2 Press the set reset button until REMOTE KEY LEARNING ACTIVE is displayed 3 Press and hold the lock and unlock buttons on the first transmitter at the same time for about 15 seconds A chime will sound indicating that the transmitter is matched 4 To match additional transmitters at this time repeat Step 3 Each vehicle can have a maximum of four transmitters matched to it 5 To exit the programming mode you must cycle the key to LOCK OFF Blank Display This display shows no information DIC Compass Your vehicle may have a compass in the Driver Information Center DIC Compass Zone Your dealer retailer will set the correct zone for your location Under certain circumstances such as during a long distance cross country trip or moving to a new state or province it will be necessary to compensate for compass variance by resetting the zone through the DIC if the zone is not set correctly Compass variance is the difference between the earth s magnetic north and true geographic north If the compass is not set to the zone where you live the compass may give false readings The compass must be set to the variance zone in which the vehicle is traveling To adjust for compass variance use the following procedure Compass Variance Zone Procedure 1 Do not set the compass zone when the vehicle is moving Only set it wh
109. 2 MS e AT XX PSI c S c5S DOT Oro 69 oo Oe SAC 7 2 HS L Le On C 22 G Q lt re a Mid y aS X xxx vna OY rites w 9 z E A 2i INS P ps Lovan oe Y NE S Ay F o py Colas Maais eO YO1 q100 9 Light Truck LT Metric Tire A Tire Size The tire size code is a combination of letters and numbers used to define a particular tire s width height aspect ratio construction type and service description See the Tire Size illustration later in this section for more detail B TPC Spec Tire Performance Criteria Specification Original equipment tires designed to GM s specific tire performance criteria have a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall GM s TPC specifications meet or exceed all federal safety guidelines This does not apply to Goodyear LT225 75R16 G949 RSA and Goodyear LT225 75R16 G933 RSD commercial truck tires C Dual Tire Maximum Load Maximum load that can be carried and the maximum pressure needed to support that load when used in a dual configuration For information on recommended tire pressure see Inflation Tire Pressure on page 6 63 and Loading the Vehicle on page 5 17 D DOT Department of Transportation The Department of Transportation DOT code indicates that the tire is in compliance with the U S Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle Safety Standards E Tire Identification Number TIN The letters and n
110. 2010 GMC Savana Owner Manual M Iri Brio oret iet cte bte eb 1 1 Instrument Panel sssesem 1 2 Initial Drive Information esee 1 4 Vehicle Features eem 1 13 Performance and Maintenance 1 16 Seats and Restraint System sssssss 2 1 Head Restraints sssessssseenme 2 2 Front Seats amnre aeaa ea E eene 2 2 Rear SealS uisi tipiURU aai 2 6 Safety Belts essssesssssee 2 10 Child Restraints seem 2 30 Airbag System sss 2 60 Restraint System Check 2 79 Features and Controls eeseeeeesee 3 1 KW NM 3 3 Doors and Locks eene 3 8 WINDOWS nicncesiivdoesewsecertme anhdatiamobadees 3 16 Theft Deterrent Systems ssss 3 20 Starting and Operating Your Vehicle 3 22 ulli c 3 40 Storage Areas Instrument Panel enm 4 1 Instrument Panel Overview sese 4 3 Climate Controls esessenmm 4 15 Warning Lights Gages and Indicators 4 20 Driver Information Center DIC 4 37 Audio System s sseessessseeeeee 4 59 Driving Your Vehicle m 5 1 Your Driving the Road and the Vehicle 5 2 Towing Inneren 5 22 Service and Appearance Care
111. 3 How to Check Use a good quality pocket type gage to check tire pressure You cannot tell if your tires are properly inflated simply by looking at them Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they are underinflated Check the tire s inflation pressure when the tires are cold Cold means your vehicle has been sitting for at least three hours or driven no more than 1 mile 1 6 km Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve to get a pressure measurement If the cold tire inflation pressure matches the recommended pressure on the Tire and Loading Information label no further adjustment is necessary If the pressure is low add air until you reach the recommended amount If you overfill the tire release air by pushing on the metal stem in the center of the tire valve Recheck the tire pressure with the tire gage Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt and moisture 6 64 Dual Tire Operation When the vehicle is new or whenever a wheel wheel bolt or wheel nut is replaced check the wheel nut torque after 100 1 000 and 6 000 miles 160 1 600 and 10 000 km of driving For proper wheel nut tightening information see Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire later in this section under Changing a Flat Tire on page 6 80 Also see Wheel Nut Torque under Capacities and Specifications on
112. A V Previous Next Press the arrows to go to the previous or to the next radio station and stay there Press the arrows to go to the previous or to the next radio station stored as a Favorite The radio only seeks stations with a strong signal that are in the selected band To scan stations press and hold the down arrow for two seconds until SCAN displays and a beep sounds The radio goes to a station plays for a few seconds then goes to the next station Press the down arrow again to stop scanning When a CD is playing press either arrow to go to the next or previous track Mute Press this button to silence the system Press this button again to turn the sound on SRCE Source Press this button to switch between the radio CD and auxiliary input jack c Volume Press the plus or minus volume button to increase or to decrease the volume Dbl Seek Press the seek arrow to go to the next radio station while in AM or FM Press the seek arrow to go to the next track while sourced to the CD Radio Reception Frequency interference and static can occur during normal radio reception if items such as cell phone chargers vehicle convenience accessories and external electronic devices are plugged into the accessory power outlet If there is interference or static unplug the item from the accessory power outlet 4 77 AM The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM especially at night The l
113. Brake on page 3 35 on page 3 35 Do not use the accelerator pedal and be ready to Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if turn off the engine immediately if it starts the vehicle begins to move 3 Try to start the engine in each gear The vehicle 3 With the engine off turn the ignition to ON RUN should start only in P Park or N Neutral If the but do not start the engine Without applying the vehicle starts in any other position contact regular brake try to move the shift lever out your dealer retailer for service of P Park with normal effort If the shift lever moves out of P Park contact your dealer retailer for service Ignition Transmission Lock Check While parked and with the parking brake set try to turn the ignition to LOCK OFF in each shift lever position The ignition should turn to LOCK OFF only when the shift lever is in P Park The ignition key should come out only in LOCK OFF Contact your dealer retailer if service is required Parking Brake and Automatic Transmission P Park Mechanism Check A WARNING When you are doing this check the vehicle could begin to move You or others could be injured and property could be damaged Make sure there is room in front of the vehicle in case it begins to roll Be ready to apply the regular brake at once should the vehicle begin to move Park on a fairly steep hill with the vehicle facing downhill Keeping your foot on the regular
114. DIVING En 5 2 Control of a Vehicle ccceeeeeeneeeeee eee eeneees 5 3 Braking sctss iia ioter beue Repas sies E MEME 5 3 Antilock Brake System ABS 5 4 Braking in Emergencies sess 5 5 StabiliTrak System ccccccccccesseeseeeeeeeeeeeees 5 5 Locking Rear Axle eesseeseeeseseees 5 7 All Wheel Drive AWD System 5 7 Tn 5 7 Off Road Recovery sse 5 8 siat 5 9 Loss of Control ssssA 5 9 Driving Your Vehicle Driving at NIQht sicctevetacicot aremriewiniacanestecsminas 5 10 Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads 5 11 Before Leaving on a Long Trip 5 12 Highway Hypnosis seee 5 12 Hill and Mountain Roads seeseess 5 13 Winter Driving ici feng vent etre RE BERE Ern ret eps 5 14 If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand Mud lce OR SNOW aeaea a a a a G 5 16 Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out 5 16 Loading the Vehicle esesessse 5 17 MOWING 2c carece inea EE EA 5 22 Towing Your Vehicle sseeeeeeeee 5 22 Recreational Vehicle Towing 5 22 Towing a Trailer iae etna 5 26 5 1 Your Driving the Road and the Vehicle Defensive Driving Defensive driving means always expect the unexpected The first step in driving defensively is to wear your
115. Engine coolant level check See Engine Coolant on page 6 28 Windshield washer fluid level check See Windshield Washer Fluid on page 6 36 Tire inflation check See nflation Tire Pressure on page 6 63 Tire wear inspection See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 6 69 Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 6 69 Fluids visual leak check or every 12 months whichever occurs first A leak in any system must be repaired and the fluid level checked Engine air cleaner filter inspection vehicles driven in dusty conditions only See Engine Air Cleaner Filter on page 6 19 Brake system inspection or every 12 months whichever occurs first Maintenance II Perform all services described in Maintenance I Steering and suspension inspection Visual inspection for damaged loose or missing parts or signs of wear Lubricate the front suspension kingpin bushings steering linkage and rear driveline center splines Engine cooling system inspection Visual inspection of hoses pipes fittings and clamps and replacement if needed Windshield wiper blade inspection for wear cracking or contamination and windshield and wiper blade cleaning if contaminated See Windshield and Wiper Blades on page 6 101 Worn or damaged wiper blade replacement See Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement on page 6 54 Body hinges and latches key lock cylinders folding seat hardware and rear compartment hinges linkage
116. G embossed in the trim or on an attached label near the deployment opening For frontal airbags the word AIRBAG will appear on the middle part of the steering wheel for the driver and on the instrument panel for the right front passenger With roof rail airbags the word AIRBAG will appear along the headliner or trim Here are the most important things to know about the airbag system A WARNING You can be severely injured or killed in a crash if you are not wearing your safety belt even if you have airbags Airbags are designed to work with safety belts but do not replace them Also airbags are not designed to deploy in every crash In some crashes safety belts are your only restraint See When Should an Airbag Inflate on page 2 65 Wearing your safety belt during a crash helps reduce your chance of hitting things inside the vehicle or being ejected from it Airbags are supplemental restraints to the safety belts Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety belt properly whether or not there is an airbag for that person A WARNING Airbags inflate with great force faster than the blink of an eye Anyone who is up against or very close to any airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured or killed Do not sit unnecessarily close to the airbag as you would be if you were sitting on the edge of your seat or leaning forward Safety belts help keep you in position before and during a crash Always wear
117. If the holes are not sealed deadly carbon monoxide CO from the engine s exhaust can get into the vehicle as well as dirt and water See Carbon Monoxide under Engine Exhaust on page 3 38 Safety Chains Always attach chains between the vehicle and the trailer Cross the safety chains under the tongue of the trailer to help prevent the tongue from contacting the road if it becomes separated from the hitch Always leave just enough slack so the rig can turn Never allow safety chains to drag on the ground Tow Haul Mode Pressing this button at the end of the shift lever turns on and off the tow haul mode This indicator light on the instrument panel cluster comes on when the tow haul mode is on Tow Haul is a feature that assists when pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load See Tow Haul Mode on page 3 33 for more information 5 33 Tow Haul is designed to be most effective when the vehicle and trailer combined weight is at least 75 percent of the vehicle s Gross Combined Weight Rating GCWR See Weight of the Trailer later in the section Tow Haul is most useful under the following driving conditions When pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load through rolling terrain When pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load in stop and go traffic When pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load in busy parking lots where improved low speed control of the vehicle is desir
118. OCK OFF Notice Using a tool to force the key to turn in the ignition could cause damage to the switch or break the key Use the correct key make sure it is all the way in and turn it only with your hand If the key cannot be turned by hand see your dealer retailer B ACC ACCESSORY This is the position in which you can operate things like the radio and the windshield wipers when the engine is off C ON RUN This position can be used to operate the electrical accessories and to display some instrument panel cluster warning and indicator lights The switch stays in this position when the engine is running If you leave the key in the ACC ACCESSORY or ON RUN position with the engine off the battery could be drained You may not be able to start the vehicle if the battery is allowed to drain for an extended period of time D START This is the position that starts the engine When the engine starts release the key The ignition switch returns to ON RUN for driving A warning tone will sound when the driver door is opened the ignition is in ACC ACCESSORY or LOCK OFF and the key is in the ignition Retained Accessory Power RAP These vehicle accessories can be used for up to 10 minutes after the engine is turned off Audio System Power Windows if equipped These features will work when the ignition key is in ON RUN or ACC ACCESSORY Once the key is turned from ON RUN to LOCK OFF power to the radio will continu
119. PASS Key Ill Electronic Immobilizer Operation on page 3 20 for more information SERVICE TIRE MONITOR SYSTEM If your vehicle has the Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS this message displays if a part on the system is not working properly The tire pressure light also flashes and then remains on during the same ignition cycle See Tire Pressure Light on page 4 30 Several conditions may cause this message to appear See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on page 6 66 for more 4 49 information If the warning comes on and stays on there may be a problem with the TPMS See your dealer retailer SERVICE TRACTION CONTROL If your vehicle has StabiliTrak this message displays when there is a problem with the Traction Control System TCS When this message displays the system will not limit wheel spin Adjust your driving accordingly See your dealer retailer for service See StabiliTrak System on page 5 5 for more information SERVICE TRANSMISSION This message displays when there is a problem with the transmission See your dealer retailer for service SERVICE VEHICLE SOON This message displays when a non emissions related malfunction occurs Have the vehicle serviced by your dealer retailer as soon as possible STABILITRAK NOT READY If your vehicle has StabiliTrak this message may display and the StabiliTrak indicator light on the instrument panel cluster may be on after first driving the vehicle and exceeding 32 km h
120. Player LOAD 7 Press to load CDs into the CD player This CD player holds up to six CDs To insert one CD do the following 1 Press and release the 7 button 2 Wait for the message to insert the disc 3 Load a CD Insert the CD partway into the slot label side up The player pulls the CD in To insert multiple CDs do the following 1 Press and hold the 7 button for two seconds A beep sounds and Load All Discs displays 2 Follow the displayed instruction on when to insert the discs The CD player takes up to six CDs 3 Press the X7 button again to cancel loading more CDs Insert a CD partway into the slot label side up The player pulls it in and the CD should begin playing If you want to insert a CD with the ignition off first press the amp button or the DISP knob If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in the player it stays in the player When the ignition or radio is turned on the CD starts to play where it stopped if it was the last selected audio source 4 68 When the CD is inserted the CD symbol displays As each new track starts to play the track number displays The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch 8 cm single CDs with an adapter ring Full size CDs and the smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner Care of Your CDs and DVDs If playing a CD R the sound quality can be reduced due to CD R or CD RW quality the method of recording the quality of the music that has been r
121. Return the jacking equipment to the proper location Secure the items and replace the jack cover 6 95 Spare Tire This vehicle when new may have had a fully inflated spare tire A spare tire may lose air over time so check its inflation pressure regularly See Inflation Tire Pressure on page 6 63 and Loading the Vehicle on page 5 17 for information regarding proper tire inflation and loading the vehicle For instruction on how to remove install or store a spare tire see Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire on page 6 85 and Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools on page 6 94 After installing the spare tire on the vehicle you should stop as soon as possible and make sure the spare is correctly inflated The spare tire is made to perform well at speeds up to 70 mph 112 km h at the recommended inflation pressure so you can finish your trip Have the damaged or flat road tire repaired or replaced as soon as you can and installed back onto the vehicle This way a spare tire will be available in case you need it again Do not mix tires and wheels of different sizes because they will not fit Keep the spare tire and its wheel together 6 96 Appearance Care Interior Cleaning The vehicle s interior will continue to look its best if it is cleaned often Although not always visible dust and dirt can accumulate on the upholstery Dirt can damage carpet fabric leather and plastic surfaces Regular v
122. Shift quality will improve with continued driving When temperatures are very cold the transmission s gear shifting could be delayed providing more stable shifts until the engine warms up Shifts could be more noticeable with a cold transmission This difference in shifting is normal M Manual Mode This position lets drivers select the range of gears appropriate for current driving conditions If the vehicle has this feature see Range Select Mode later in this section 3 Third This position is also used for normal driving It reduces vehicle speed more than D Drive without using the brakes You might choose 3 Third instead of D Drive when driving on hilly winding roads when towing a trailer so there is less shifting between gears and when going down a steep hill See Range Select Mode later in this section 2 Second This position reduces vehicle speed even more than 3 Third without using the brakes You can use 2 Second on hills It can help control vehicle speed as you go down steep mountain roads but then you would also want to use the brakes off and on See Range Select Mode later in this section If you manually select 2 Second in an automatic transmission the transmission will start in second gear You can use this feature for reducing the speed of the rear wheels when you are trying to start the vehicle from a stop on slippery road surfaces 1 First This position reduces vehicle speed without usin
123. Slip in Tube GM 9985830 Spline Maintenance Replacement Parts If the vehicle has the DURAMAX Diesel engine see the DURAMAX Diesel manual for more information Replacement parts identified below by name part number or specification can be obtained by your dealer retailer art GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number Pra 4 8L V8 5 3L V8 6 0L V8 PF48 Wiper Blades 22n 66 0cm 25949887 Engine Drive Belt Routing V6 Engines V8 Engines If your vehicle has the DURAMAX Diesel engine see the DURAMAX Diesel manual for more information Maintenance Record After the scheduled services are performed record the date odometer reading who performed the service and the type of services performed in the boxes provided Retain all maintenance receipts Maintenance Record Maintenance Record cont d Maintenance Record cont d Maintenance Record cont d Section 8 Customer Assistance and Information 8 2 Customer Satisfaction Procedure 8 2 Online Owner Center sss 8 4 Customer Assistance for Text Telephone AUEDSMILIIONM c Em 8 5 Customer Assistance Offices 8 5 GM Mobility Reimbursement Program 8 6 Roadside Assistance Program 8 6 Scheduling Service Appointments 8 9 Courtesy Transportation Program 8 9
124. Star Terms and Conditions for information on data collection and use Navigation System If your vehicle has a navigation system use of the System may result in the storage of destinations addresses telephone numbers and other trip information Refer to the navigation system operating manual for information on stored data and for deletion instructions Radio Frequency Identification RFID RFID technology is used in some vehicles for functions such as tire pressure monitoring and ignition system security as well as in connection with conveniences such as key fobs for remote door locking unlocking and starting and in vehicle transmitters for garage door openers RFID technology in GM vehicles does not use or record personal information or link with any other GM system containing personal information Radio Frequency Statement This vehicle has systems that operate on a radio frequency that comply with Part 15 of the Federal Communications Commission FCC Rules and with RSS 210 211 of Industry and Science Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 The device may not cause interference 2 The device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device Changes or modifications to any of these systems by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment A Accessories and Modifications
125. This data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur Important EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only if a non trivial crash situation occurs no data is recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data e g name gender age and crash location is recorded However other parties such as law enforcement could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation To read data recorded by an EDR special equipment is required and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed In addition to the vehicle manufacturer other parties such as law enforcement that have the special equipment can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR GM will not access this data or share it with others except with the consent of the vehicle owner or if the vehicle is leased with the consent of the lessee in response to an official request of police or similar government office as part of GM s defense of litigation through the discovery process or as required by law Data that GM collects or receives may also be used for GM research needs or may be made available to others for research purposes where a need is shown and the data is not tied to a specific vehicle or vehicle owner OnStar If your vehicle has OnStar and you subscribe to the OnStar services please refer to the On
126. ace your vehicle s tires with those that do not have a TPC Spec number make sure they are the same size load range speed rating and construction type radial and bias belted tires as your vehicle s original tires 6 73 Vehicles that have a tire pressure monitoring system could give an inaccurate low pressure warning if non TPC Spec rated tires are installed on your vehicle Non TPC Spec rated tires may give a low pressure warning that is higher or lower than the proper warning level you would get with TPC Spec rated tires See Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 6 65 Your vehicle s original equipment tires are listed on the Tire and Loading Information label See Loading the Vehicle on page 5 17 for more information about the Tire and Loading Information label and its location on your vehicle Different Size Tires and Wheels If you add wheels or tires that are a different size than your original equipment wheels and tires this could affect the way your vehicle performs including its braking ride and handling characteristics stability and resistance to rollover Additionally if your vehicle has electronic systems such as anti lock brakes rollover airbags traction control and electronic stability control the performance of these systems can be affected 6 74 A WARNING If you add different sized wheels your vehicle may not provide an acceptable level of performance and safety if tires not recommended for
127. ack to LOCK OFF using the key before the remote start procedure can be used again To manually shut off the engine after a remote start Aim the RKE transmitter at the vehicle and press the remote start button until the parking lamps turn off Turn on the hazard warning flashers See Hazard Warning Flashers on page 4 3 Insert the vehicle s key into the ignition switch and turn the switch to ON RUN and then back to LOCK OFF The remote vehicle start feature will not operate if The remote start system is disabled through the DIC The vehicle s key is in the ignition The vehicle s hood is open The hazard warning flashers are on There is an emission control system malfunction See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 4 31 The engine coolant temperature is too high The oil pressure is low Two remote vehicle starts have already been provided Doors and Locks Door Locks A WARNING Unlocked doors can be dangerous Passengers especially children can easily open the doors and fall out of a moving vehicle When a door is locked the handle will not open it The chance of being thrown out of the vehicle in a crash is increased if the doors are not locked So all passengers should wear safety belts properly and the doors should be locked whenever the vehicle is driven Young children who get into unlocked vehicles may be unable to get out A child can be overcome by extreme heat and can suffer perm
128. acuuming is recommended to remove particles from the upholstery It is important to keep the upholstery from becoming and remaining heavily soiled Soils should be removed as quickly as possible The vehicle s interior may experience extremes of heat that could cause stains to set rapidly Lighter colored interiors may require more frequent cleaning Use care because newspapers and garments that transfer color to home furnishings may also transfer color to the vehicle s interior When cleaning the vehicle s interior only use cleaners specifically designed for the surfaces being cleaned Permanent damage may result from using cleaners on surfaces for which they were not intended Use glass cleaner only on glass Remove any accidental over spray from other surfaces immediately To prevent over spray apply cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth Notice Using abrasive cleaners when cleaning glass surfaces on the vehicle could scratch the glass and or cause damage to the rear window defogger When cleaning the glass on the vehicle use only a soft cloth and glass cleaner Many cleaners contain solvents that may become concentrated in the vehicle s breathing space Before using cleaners read and adhere to all safety instructions on the label While cleaning the vehicle s interior maintain adequate ventilation by opening the vehicle s doors and windows Dust may be removed from small buttons and knobs using a small brush with s
129. ag Status Indicator 4 26 Passenger Sensing System ssss 2 72 Passing kasae E 5 9 PASS Key Ill Electronic Immobilizer 3 20 PASS Key IIl Electronic Immobilizer is run 3 20 Perchlorate Materials Requirements California 6 4 Power Door LOCKS 5 1 E Letra tree EE REPAS 3 9 Retained Accessory RAP esses 3 23 OAL M 2 3 Steering Fluid 2 1 6 35 WINGOWS secina Reit Ra ned mente durer malen 3 17 Pregnancy Using Safety Belts 2 29 PRIVACY EE 8 16 Navigation System ssssseee 8 17 uci EFA 8 17 Radio Frequency Identification RFID 8 18 Program Courtesy Transportation sese 8 9 Programmable Automatic Door Locks 3 10 Proposition 65 Warning California 6 4 10 Radio Frequency Identification RFID 1 erre 8 18 Statement ooo cte cre aeeiiaii 8 18 lap C 4 62 Radios Reception Cx 4 77 Setting the Clock sees 4 60 Thett Deterrent cernit the 4 76 Reading Eamps ene tte Pe pIEAE 4 13 Rear Air Conditioning and Heating System 4 19 Rear Axle iis med eile PDEF PR Ape metes 6 46 LOCKING EE D D LS 5 7 Rear Door Security Locks ssessusss 3 11 Rear Doors icusco este tier ede oe REIR SAU PES 3 15 Rear Heating System ssssssssse 4
130. ains A WARNING If your vehicle has dual wheels or P245 70R17 or LT245 75R16 size tires do not use tire chains They can damage your vehicle because there is not enough clearance Tire chains used on a vehicle without the proper amount of clearance can cause damage to the brakes suspension or other vehicle parts The area damaged by the tire chains could cause you to lose control of your vehicle and you or others may be injured in a crash Use another type of traction device only if its manufacturer recommends it for use on your vehicle and tire size combination and road conditions Follow that manufacturer s instructions WARNING Continued 6 78 WARNING Continued To help avoid damage to your vehicle drive slowly readjust or remove the device if it is contacting your vehicle and do not spin the vehicle s wheels If you do find traction devices that will fit install them on the rear tires Notice f your vehicle does not have dual wheels and has a tire size other than P245 70R17 or LT245 75R16 use tire chains only where legal and only when you must Use chains that are the proper size for your tires Install them on the tires of the rear axle Do not use chains on the tires of the front axle Tighten them as tightly as possible with the ends securely fastened Drive slowly and follow the chain manufacturer s instructions If you can hear the chains contacting your vehicle stop and retighten them If
131. all the doors This feature will not operate if the key is in the ignition This feature can be programmed using the Driver Information Center DIC See DELAY DOOR LOCK under DIC Vehicle Customization on page 4 52 Programmable Automatic Door Locks The vehicle is programmed so that when the doors are closed the ignition is on and the shift lever is moved out of P Park all the doors will lock The doors will unlock every time you stop the vehicle and move the shift lever back into P Park If someone needs to exit the vehicle once the doors are locked have that person use the manual lever or power door lock switch for the rear doors When the door is closed again it will not lock automatically Use the manual lever or the power door lock switch to lock the door The power door locks can be programmed through the Driver Information Center DIC For more information on programming see DIC Vehicle Customization on page 4 52 Automatic Door Lock The doors will automatically lock when the shift lever is moved out of P Park The automatic door locking feature cannot be disabled Automatic Door Unlock The doors will automatically unlock when the shift lever is moved into P Park The automatic unlock feature can be disabled or programmed in different ways if the vehicle has an automatic transmission For more information on programming see DIC Vehicle Customization on page 4 52 Rear Door Security Locks Sec
132. allowing the passenger even if belted to hit the dashboard or windshield in a crash ZN WARNING If the right front passenger s airbag is turned off for a person who is not in a risk group identified by the national government that person will not have the extra protection of an airbag In a crash the airbag will not be able to inflate and help protect the person sitting there Do not turn off the passenger s airbag unless the person sitting there is in a risk group 2 70 United States Canada To turn off the right front passenger frontal airbag insert the ignition key into the switch push in and move the Switch to the off position The airbag off light will come on to let you know that the right front passenger airbag is off The airbag off light will stay on to remind you that the airbag is off See Airbag Off Light on page 4 24 The airbag off light will stay on to remind you that the airbag is off The right front passenger airbag will remain off until you turn it back on again ZN WARNING If the airbag readiness light ever comes on and stays on it means that something may be wrong with the airbag system For example the right front passenger airbag could inflate even though the airbag on off switch is turned off To help avoid injury to yourself or others have the vehicle serviced right away See Airbag Readiness Light on page 4 23 for more information including important safety information
133. amp 4 NOTES vi Section 1 In Brief Instrument Panel ssssseeee 1 2 Vehicle Features 0 0 0 eesti 1 13 Initial Drive Information o on TE pc Rua eee EA E uu sque M Steering Wheel Controls eec 1 15 Ber E OE SLANI asaini sit gis euti rent utate dede 15 Cruise Control ette riesen ret eere 1 15 vicia nie c E 1 6 Power Outlets ssseee 1 16 Seat Adjustment cec 1 8 Performance and Maintenance 00 1 16 Safety Belt 1 8 Stabili take c 2 oeste te cate eet he eher pe creep pecu 1 16 Airbag On Off Switch ssseeeee 1 8 Tire Pressure MoOnllOF 2 2 enero ntt enne ass 1 17 Sensing System for Passenger Airbag 1 9 Engine Oil Life System 1 17 Mirror Adjustment ccssseee 1 9 Fuel E85 85 Ethanol sseeee 1 18 Steering Wheel Adjustment 1 10 Driving for Better Fuel Economy 1 18 Interior Lighting 1 11 Roadside Assistance Program 1 18 Exterior Lighting innt 1 11 Windshield Wiper Washer ssssesse 1 12 Climate Controls sese 1 12 14 Instrument Panel c rommoomr Outlet Adjustment on page 4 17 Driver Information Center DIC on page 4 37 Turn Signal Multifunction Lever on
134. an error cannot be corrected contact your dealer retailer If the radio displays an error message write it down and provide it to your dealer retailer while reporting the problem Using the Auxiliary Input Jack Your radio system has an auxiliary input jack located on the lower right side of the faceplate This is not an audio output do not plug the headphone set into the front auxiliary input jack An external audio device such as an iPod laptop computer MP3 player CD changer etc can be connected to the auxiliary input jack for use as another source for audio listening Drivers are encouraged to set up any auxiliary device while the vehicle is in P Park See Defensive Driving on page 5 2 for more information on driver distraction To use a portable audio player connect a 3 5 mm 1 8 inch cable to the radio s front auxiliary input jack When a device is connected press the radio CD AUX button to begin playing audio from the device over the vehicle speakers D Power Volume Turn clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the volume of the portable player You might need to do additional volume adjustments from the portable device if the volume is not loud or soft enough 4 71 BAND Press to listen to the radio while a portable audio device is playing The portable audio device continues playing so you might want to stop it or turn it off CD AUX CD Auxiliary Press to play a CD while a portable audio
135. an occur to both the safety belt and the vehicle Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster The vehicle has a shoulder belt height adjuster for the driver and right front passenger positions Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of the belt is centered on the shoulder The belt should be away from the face and neck but not falling off of the shoulder Improper shoulder belt height adjustment could reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash To move it down pull on the center adjuster control labeled PULL You can move the height adjuster up just by pushing up on the shoulder belt guide After the adjuster is set to the desired position try to move it down without pushing in to make sure it has locked into position 2 26 Safety Belt Pretensioners If the GVWR Gross Vehicle Weight Rating of the vehicle is below 8 500 Ib 3 855 kg then the vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for the front outboard occupants See Loading the Vehicle on page 5 17 to locate the certification label which contains the GVWR Although the safety belt pretensioners cannot be seen they are part of the safety belt assembly They can help tighten the safety belts during the early stages of a moderate to severe frontal near frontal or rear crash if the threshold conditions for pretensioner activation are met And if the vehicle has side impact airbags safety belt pretensioners can help tighten the safety belts in a side crash o
136. an out of court program administered by the Council of Better Business Bureaus to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle repairs or the interpretation of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Although you may be required to resort to this informal dispute resolution program prior to filling out a court action use of the program is free of charge and your case will generally be heard within 40 days If you do not agree with the decision given in your case you may reject it and proceed with any other venue for relief available to you You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program using the toll free telephone number or write them at the following address BBB Auto Line Program Council of Better Business Bureaus Inc 4200 Wilson Boulevard Suite 800 Arlington VA 22203 1838 Telephone 1 800 955 5100 dr bbb org goauto This program is available in all 50 states and the District of Columbia Eligibility is limited by vehicle age mileage and other factors General Motors reserves the right to change eligibility limitations and or discontinue its participation in this program STEP THREE Canadian Owners In the event that you do not feel your concerns have been addressed after following the procedure outlined in Steps One and Two General Motors of Canada Limited wants you to be aware of its participation in a no charge Mediation Arbitration Program General Motors of Canada Limited has committed to binding arbitration of owner d
137. and supported service people Genuine GM parts have one of these marks ACDelco 5l Parts EJ Goodwrench E Accessories Accessories and Modifications When non dealer non retailer accessories are added to the vehicle they can affect vehicle performance and safety including such things as airbags braking stability ride and handling emissions systems aerodynamics durability and electronic systems like antilock brakes traction control and stability control Some of these accessories could even cause malfunction or damage not covered by the vehicle warranty Damage to vehicle components resulting from the installation or use of non GM certified parts including control module modifications is not covered under the terms of the vehicle warranty and may affect remaining warranty coverage for affected parts GM Accessories are designed to complement and function with other systems on the vehicle Your GM dealer retailer can accessorize the vehicle using genuine GM Accessories When you go to your GM dealer retailer and ask for GM Accessories you will know that GM trained and supported service technicians will perform the work using genuine GM Accessories Also see Adding Equipment to Your Airbag Equipped Vehicle on page 2 78 California Proposition 65 Warning Most motor vehicles including this one contain and or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproduct
138. and Radio with CD Base Press to switch the display between the radio station frequency and the time While the ignition is off press to display the time i Information MP3 and RDS Features Press to display additional text information related to the current FM RDS station or MP3 song A choice of additional information such as Channel Song Artist and CAT category can display Continue pressing to highlight the desired label or press the pushbutton positioned under any one of the labels and the information about that label displays When information is not available No Info displays 4 63 Clock AM FM Radio and Radio with CD Base The radio has a clock button for setting the time With this type of radio the clock can be set with either the radio turned on or off See Setting the Clock on page 4 60 for more information Speed Compensated Volume SCV Radios with Speed Compensated Volume SCV automatically adjusts the radio volume to compensate for road and wind noise as you speed up or slow down while driving That way the volume level should sound about the same as you drive To activate SCV 1 Set the radio volume to the desired level 2 Press the MENU button to display the radio setup menu 3 Press the pushbutton under the AUTO VOLUM label on the radio display 4 Press the pushbutton under the desired Speed Compensated Volume setting OFF Low Med or High to select the level of radio
139. anent injuries or even death from heat stroke Always lock the vehicle whenever leaving it Outsiders can easily enter through an unlocked door when you slow down or stop your vehicle Locking your doors can help prevent this from happening To lock the door from the inside slide the manual lever on the door down To unlock the door slide the manual lever up From the outside use the key If the vehicle is equipped with keyless entry see Remote Keyless Entry RKE System on page 3 4 for more information Power Door Locks On vehicles with power door locks the switches are located on the doors amp Press the bottom of the switch to lock all the doors at once Press the top of the switch to unlock all the doors at once When a door is locked the inside door handle will not work Cargo Door Relocking If the cargo door is open when the lock button is pressed on the door or the RKE transmitter all doors will lock except the cargo door The cargo door will only lock when they are closed or when the delayed locking feature functions Delayed Locking When locking the doors with the power lock switch and a door open the doors will lock five seconds after the last door is closed You will hear three chimes to signal that the delayed locking feature is in use Pressing the power lock switch twice or the lock button on the RKE transmitter twice will override the delayed locking feature and immediately lock
140. ansmitter with a flat thin object inserted into the notch on the side of the transmitter 2 Remove the old battery Do not use a metal object 3 Insert the new battery positive side facing down Replace with a CR2032 or equivalent battery 4 Snap the transmitter back together Remote Vehicle Start Your vehicle may have a remote start feature This feature allows you to start the engine from outside the vehicle It may also start the vehicle s heating or air conditioning systems See Climate Control System on page 4 15 for additional information Laws in some local communities may restrict the use of remote starters For example some laws may require a person using remote start to have the vehicle in view when doing so Check local regulations for any requirements on remote starting of vehicles Do not use the remote start feature if your vehicle is low on fuel Your vehicle may run out of fuel If your vehicle has the remote start feature the RKE transmitter functions will have an increased range of operation However the range may be less while the vehicle is running There are other conditions which can affect the performance of the transmitter see Remote Keyless Entry RKE System on page 3 4 for additional information Q Remote Vehicle Start This button will be on the RKE transmitter if you have remote start To start the engine using the remote start feature 1 Aim the RKE transmitter at the vehicle
141. ard side position of the seats 2 Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked 2 4 A WARNING Sitting in a reclined position when the vehicle is in motion can be dangerous Even when buckled up the safety belts cannot do their job when reclined like this The shoulder belt cannot do its job because it will not be against your body Instead it will be in front of you In a crash you could go into it receiving neck or other injuries The lap belt cannot do its job either In a crash the belt could go up over your abdomen The belt forces would be there not at your pelvic bones This could cause serious internal injuries For proper protection when the vehicle is in motion have the seatback upright Then sit well back in the seat and wear the safety belt properly Do not have a seatback reclined if the vehicle is moving Rear Seats Rear Seat Operation Removing the Rear Seat Disconnect the quick release latch plates for the lap shoulder belts on the bench seat to be removed 1 To do this press the tip of a key into the release hole of the safety belt buckle while pulling up on the safety belt 2 Locate the pins On a three passenger seat there are two pins located on the inboard sides of the rear seats Three Passenger Seat Shown The driver side pin has a gray cap with a black L marked on it 5 Pull the seat rearward about 2 inches 5 cm and then lift the seat from
142. arge leak then it may be necessary to have the vehicle towed to a dealer retailer service department and have it repaired before driving the vehicle further Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed in Scheduled Maintenance on page 7 3 and be sure to use the transmission fluid listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 7 11 How to Check Automatic Transmission Fluid Because this operation can be difficult it is recommended to have this check done at the dealer retailer service department which can monitor the transmission temperature The transmission fluid level increases with temperature To obtain a highly accurate fluid level check the transmission temperature must be measured 6 23 If it is decided to check the fluid level be sure to follow all the instructions here or a false reading on the dipstick may occur Notice Too much or too little fluid can damage your transmission Too much can mean that some of the fluid could come out and fall on hot engine parts or exhaust system parts starting a fire Too little fluid could cause the transmission to overheat Be sure to get an accurate reading if you check your transmission fluid Wait at least 30 minutes with the engine Off before checking the transmission fluid level if the vehicle has been driven n hot weather when outside temperatures are above 32 C 90 F The vehicle is heavily loaded At high speed for quite a while in hot
143. assengers use the control panel in the rear seating area This disables the front control panel To return control to the front panel move the fan knob out of AUX Q Turns the system off gg Fan Control Turn clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the fan speed in the rear seating area Temperature Control Turn clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the temperature in the rear seating area The air conditioning system on the main climate control panel must be turned on to direct cooled air to the rear of the vehicle If it is not on then the temperature in the rear of the vehicle remains at cabin temperature Air Delivery Mode Control Turn clockwise or counterclockwise to change the direction of the airflow in the rear seating area To change the current mode select one of the following A Vent Air is directed to the upper outlets with some directed to the floor outlets Floor Air is directed to the floor outlets Be sure to keep the area under the front seats clear of any objects so that the air inside of the vehicle can circulate effectively For information on how to use the main climate control system see Climate Control System on page 4 15 For information on ventilation see Outlet Adjustment on page 4 17 4 20 Warning Lights Gages and Indicators Warning lights and gages can signal that something is wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause an expensi
144. at a time and keep the CD player and the loading slot free of foreign materials liquids and debris If an error displays see CD Messages later in this section amp EJECT Press to eject the CD If the CD is not removed after several seconds the CD automatically pulls back into the player For the Six Disc CD player press and hold for two seconds to eject all discs 44 Tune Turn to select tracks on the CD currently playing Ki SEEK D Press the left arrow to go to the start of the current track if more than ten seconds have played Press the right arrow to go to the next track If either arrow is held or pressed multiple times the player continues moving backward or forward through the CD lt lt REV Fast Reverse Press and hold to reverse playback quickly within a track Sound is heard at a reduced volume Release to resume playing the track The elapsed time of the track displays bb FWD Fast Forward Press and hold to advance playback quickly within a track Sound is heard at a reduced volume Release to resume playing the track The elapsed time of the track displays RDM Random Tracks can be listened to in random rather than sequential order on one CD or all CDs in a six disc CD player To use random on the Base Radio with Single CD player do the following Press the RDM button to play tracks from a CD in random order The random icon displays Press again to turn off random play T
145. ather than the front seat See Where to Put the Restraint on page 2 40 for additional information 2 45 Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the LATCH System A WARNING Z WARNING If a LATCH type child restraint is not attached to anchors the child restraint will not be able to protect the child correctly In a crash the child Do not attach more than one child restraint to a single anchor Attaching more than one child restraint to a single anchor could cause the anchor or attachment to come loose or even break during a crash A child or others could be injured To reduce the risk of serious or fatal injuries during a crash attach only one child restraint per anchor A WARNING Children can be seriously injured or strangled if a shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck and the safety belt continues to tighten Buckle any could be seriously injured or killed Install a LATCH type child restraint properly using the anchors or use the vehicle s safety belts to secure the restraint following the instructions that came with the child restraint and the instructions in this manual unused safety belts behind the child restraint so children cannot reach them Pull the shoulder belt all the way out of the retractor to set the lock if your vehicle has one after the child restraint has been installed 2 46 Notice Do not let the LATCH attachments rub 2 If the child restraint manufacturer recommends that agains
146. ber blades using a lint free cloth or paper towel soaked with windshield washer fluid or a mild detergent Wash the windshield thoroughly when cleaning the blades Bugs road grime sap and a buildup of vehicle wash wax treatments may cause wiper streaking Replace the wiper blades if they are worn or damaged Wipers can be damaged by Extreme dusty conditions Sand and salt Heat and sun Snow and ice without proper removal Aluminum Wheels Notice Using strong soaps chemicals abrasive polishes cleaners brushes or cleaners that contain acid on aluminum or chrome plated wheels could damage the surface of the wheel s The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty Use only approved cleaners on aluminum or chrome plated wheels Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild soap and water Rinse with clean water After rinsing thoroughly dry with a soft clean towel A wax may then be applied Notice Using chrome polish on aluminum wheels could damage the wheels The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty Use chrome polish on chrome wheels only The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted surface of the vehicle Do not use strong soaps chemicals abrasive polishes abrasive cleaners cleaners with acid or abrasive cleaning brushes on them because the surface could be damaged Do not use chrome polish on aluminum wheels Notice Driving the vehicle through an automatic
147. brake set the parking brake To check the parking brake s holding ability With the engine running and the transmission in N Neutral slowly remove foot pressure from the regular brake pedal Do this until the vehicle is held by the parking brake only To check the P Park mechanism s holding ability With the engine running shift to P Park Then release the parking brake followed by the regular brake Contact your dealer retailer if service is required Recommended Fluids and Usage Fhidub can Lubricants me Optikleen Washer Solvent This maintenance section applies to vehicles with a Chassis Lubricant GM Part gasoline engine If the vehicle has a diesel engine see Parking Brake No U S lou cone in the maintenance schedule section in the DURAMAX Cable Guides Canada 88901242 or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI 2 Category LB or GC LB Fluids and lubricants identified below by name part GMP St Fluid number or specification can be obtained from your Power Steering GM Part No ide ae 184 dealer retailer System Canada 89021 186 Automatic DEXRON VI Automatic Usage Fluid Lubricant Transmission Transmission Fluid Engine oil which meets GM Key Lock Multi Purpose Lubricant Superlube Standard GM6094M and displays C i d GM Part No U S 12346241 in the American Petroleum Institute yingers tie 10953474 Certified for Gasoline Engines Engine Oil starburst symbol To det
148. bs 2 495 kg 2 800 Ibs 1 270 kg at the front axle and 2 700 Ibs 1 225 kg at the rear axle It has a GVWR of 7 200 Ibs 3 266 kg a RGAWR of 4 000 Ibs 1 814 kg and a GCWR Gross Combination Weight Rating of 14 000 Ibs 6 350 kg The trailer rating should be 14 000 Ibs 6350 kg 5 500 Ibs 2495 kg GCWR Vehicle Weight 8 500 Ibs 3855 kg Trailer Rating Expect tongue weight to be at least 10 percent of trailer weight 850 Ibs 386 kg and because the weight is applied well behind the rear axle the effect on the rear axle is greater than just the weight itself as much as 1 5 times as much The weight at the rear axle could be 850 Ibs 386 kg X 1 5 1 275 Ibs 578 kg Since the rear axle already weighs 2 700 Ibs 1 225 kg adding 1 275 lbs 578 kg brings the total to 3 975 Ibs 1 803 kg This is very close to but within the limit for RGAWR as well The vehicle is set to trailer up to 8 500 Ibs 3 856 kg If the vehicle has many options and there is a front seat passenger and two rear seat passengers with some luggage and gear in the vehicle as well 300 Ibs 136 kg could be added to the front axle weight and 400 Ibs 181 kg to the rear axle weight The vehicle now weighs 2 800 Ibs 1270kg 2 700 Ibs 1225kg 300 Ibs 136 kg Front 400 Ibs 181 kg Rear 6 200 Ibs 2812 kg Total Weight is still below 7 200 Ibs 3 266 kg and you might think 700 additional pounds 318 kg should be subtract
149. cal failures may be covered however any cost for parts and labor for repairs not covered by the warranty are the owner responsibility Scheduling Service Appointments When your vehicle requires warranty service contact your dealer retailer and request an appointment By scheduling a service appointment and advising your service consultant of your transportation needs your dealer retailer can help minimize your inconvenience If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service department immediately keep driving it until it can be scheduled for service unless of course the problem is safety related If it is please call your dealership retailer let them know this and ask for instructions If the dealer retailer requests you to bring the vehicle for service you are urged to do so as early in the work day as possible to allow for the same day repair Courtesy Transportation Program To enhance your ownership experience we and our participating dealers are proud to offer Courtesy Transportation a customer support program for vehicles with the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Base Warranty Coverage period in Canada and extended powertrain and hybrid specific warranty in both the U S and Canada The Courtesy transportation program is no longer available for cutaway vehicles Several courtesy transportation options are available to assist in reducing your inconvenience when warranty repairs are required Courtesy Transpor
150. calibrate the compass use the following procedure Compass Calibration Procedure 1 Before calibrating the compass make sure the compass zone is set to the variance zone in which the vehicle is located See Compass Variance Zone Procedure earlier in this section Do not operate any switches such as window sunroof climate controls seats etc during the calibration procedure 4 44 2 Press the vehicle information button until PRESS V TO CALIBRATE COMPASS displays 3 Press the set reset button to start the compass calibration 4 The DIC will display CALIBRATING DRIVE IN CIRCLES Drive the vehicle in tight circles at less than 5 mph 8 km h to complete the calibration The DIC will display CALIBRATION COMPLETE for a few seconds when the calibration is complete The DIC display will then return to PRESS TO CALIBRATE COMPASS DIC Warnings and Messages Messages are displayed on the DIC to notify the driver that the status of the vehicle has changed and that some action may be needed by the driver to correct the condition Multiple messages may appear one after another Some messages may not require immediate action but you can press any of the DIC buttons on the instrument panel to acknowledge that you received the messages and to clear them from the display Some messages cannot be cleared from the DIC display because they are more urgent These messages require action before they can be cleared You should ta
151. ccessories Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas that can explode You can be badly hurt if you are not careful See Jump Starting on page 6 41 for tips on working around a battery without getting hurt contain lead and lead compounds chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer cable from the battery to keep the battery from and reproductive harm Wash hands after handling running down Infrequent Usage Remove the black negative Extended Storage Remove the black negative cable from the battery or use a battery trickle charger 6 40 Jump Starting If the vehicle battery has run down you may want to use another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your vehicle Be sure to use the following steps to do it safely Z WARNING Batteries can hurt you They can be dangerous because They contain acid that can burn you They contain gas that can explode or ignite They contain enough electricity to burn you If you do not follow these steps exactly some or all of these things can hurt you Notice Ignoring these steps could result in costly damage to the vehicle that would not be covered by the warranty Trying to start the vehicle by pushing or pulling it will not work and it could damage the vehicle 1 Check the other vehicle It must have a 12 volt battery with a negative ground system Notice f the other vehicle s system is not a 12 volt system with a
152. ce How to Add Automatic Transmission Fluid Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of transmission fluid to use See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 7 11 Using a funnel add fluid down the transmission dipstick tube only after checking the transmission fluid while it is hot A cold check is used only as a reference If the fluid level is low add only enough of the proper fluid to bring the level up to the HOT area for a hot check It does not take much fluid generally less than one pint 0 5 L Do not overfill Notice Use of the incorrect automatic transmission fluid may damage the vehicle and the damages may not be covered by the vehicle s warranty Always use the automatic transmission fluid listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 7 11 After adding fluid recheck the fluid level as described under How to Check Automatic Transmission Fluid earlier in this section When the correct fluid level is obtained push the dipstick back in all the way then flip the handle down to lock the dipstick in place Automatic Transmission Fluid 6 Speed Transmission When to Check and Change Automatic Transmission Fluid It is usually not necessary to check the transmission fluid level The only reason for fluid loss is a transmission leak or overheating the transmission If a small leak is suspected use the following procedures to check the fluid level However if there is a l
153. center positions 2 44 Do not install three child restraints in the same row at the same time and never install two top tethers using the same top tether anchor dli Top Tether Anchor Seating positions with top tether anchors Front Passenger Position The second third and fourth row with three passenger seats have exposed metal lower anchors located in the crease between the seatback and the seat cushion Second Third and Fourth Row with Three Passenger Seat Passenger Van There are two top tether anchors in the second third and fourth rows To install a child restraint in the rear driver side seating positions use anchor point A To install a child restraint in the rear passenger side seating positions use anchor point B To install a child restraint in the rear center seating positions use anchor point B Never install two top tethers using the same top tether anchor Front Passenger Position There is a top tether anchor for the front passenger position with a front passenger seat The anchor is located at the rear of the seat cushion on the right front passenger s seat Do not secure a child restraint in a position without a top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the top tether be attached or if the instructions that come with the child restraint say that the top tether must be attached Accident statistics show that children are safer if they are restrained in the rear r
154. ching process stops and you need to start over 6 68 The TPMS sensor matching process is outlined below 1 Set the parking brake 2 Turn the ignition switch to ON RUN with the engine off 3 Press the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter s LOCK and UNLOCK buttons at the same time for approximately five seconds The horn sounds twice to signal the receiver is in relearn mode and TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE message displays on the DIC screen If your vehicle does not have RKE press the Driver Information Center DIC vehicle information button until the PRESS TO RELEARN TIRE POSITIONS message displays The horn sounds twice to signal the receiver is in relearn mode and TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE message displays on the DIC screen If your vehicle does not have RKE or DIC buttons press the trip odometer reset stem located on the instrument panel cluster until the PRESS V TO RELEARN TIRE POSITIONS message displays The horn sounds twice to signal the receiver is in relearn mode and TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE message displays on the DIC screen 4 Start with the driver side front tire 11 Remove the valve cap from the valve cap stem Activate the TPMS sensor by increasing or decreasing the tire s air pressure for five seconds or until a horn chirp sounds The horn chirp which may take up to 30 seconds to sound confirms that the sensor identification code has been matched to this tire and wheel position Proceed to the passenger sid
155. cle including brake system performance ride and handling traction control and tire pressure monitoring performance GM s TPC Spec number is molded onto the tire s sidewall near the tire size If the tires have an all season tread design the TPC spec number will be followed by a MS for mud and snow See Tire Sidewall Labeling on page 6 56 for additional information GM recommends replacing tires in sets of four or six if your vehicle has dual rear wheels This is because uniform tread depth on all tires will help keep your vehicle performing most like it did when the tires were new Replacing less than a full set of tires can affect the braking and handling performance of your vehicle See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 6 69 for information on proper tire rotation A WARNING Mixing tires could cause you to lose control while driving If you mix tires of different sizes brands or types radial and bias belted tires the vehicle may not handle properly and you could have a crash Using tires of different sizes brands or types may also cause damage to your vehicle Be sure to use the correct size brand and type of tires on your vehicle s wheels A WARNING If you use bias ply tires on the vehicle the wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after many miles of driving A tire and or wheel could fail suddenly causing a crash Use only radial ply tires with the wheels on the vehicle If you must repl
156. cted by a circuit breaker and a fuse If the motor overheats due to heavy snow etc the wiper will stop until the motor cools Although the circuit is protected from electrical overload overload due to heavy snow etc may cause wiper linkage damage Always clear ice and heavy snow from the windshield before using the windshield wipers If the overload is caused by some electrical problem and not snow etc be sure to get it fixed Fuses and Circuit Breakers The wiring circuits in the vehicle are protected from short circuits by a combination of fuses and circuit breakers This greatly reduces the chance of fires caused by electrical problems Look at the silver colored band inside the fuse If the band is broken or melted replace the fuse Be sure you replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical size and rating Floor Console Fuse Block The floor console fuse block is located under the driver seat K1 Es lo n F21 Dre Min Fuse Usage Auxiliary Parking Lamps Cut Away F13 Heating Ventilation and Air Conditioning 2 F14 Heating Ventilation and Air Conditioning 1 F21 Remote Function Actuator Tire Pressure Monitor 6 105 Min Fuse Usage Ignition Switch Discrete Logic Ignition Sensor PK3 Heating Ventilation and Air Conditioning Control F31 Front Door Lock F34 F35 F36 F37 F38 F24 F28 F29 F31 Rear Passenger Door Unlock Driver Doo
157. ction system it can often help to free a stuck vehicle Refer to the vehicle s traction System in the Index If stuck too severely for the traction System to free the vehicle turn the traction system off and use the rocking method A WARNING If the vehicle s tires spin at high speed they can explode and you or others could be injured The vehicle can overheat causing an engine compartment fire or other damage Spin the wheels as little as possible and avoid going above 55 km h 35 mph as shown on the speedometer For information about using tire chains on the vehicle see Tire Chains on page 6 78 Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out Turn the steering wheel left and right to clear the area around the front wheels Turn off any traction or stability system Shift back and forth between R Reverse and a forward gear spinning the wheels as little as possible To prevent transmission wear wait until the wheels stop spinning before shifting gears Release the accelerator pedal while shifting and press lightly on the accelerator pedal when the transmission is in gear Slowly spinning the wheels in the forward and reverse directions causes a rocking motion that could free the vehicle If that does not get the vehicle out after a few tries it might need to be towed out If the vehicle does need to be towed out see Towing Your Vehicle on page 5 22 Loading the Vehicle It is very important to know how much weight your ve
158. ctrical loads A high electrical load occurs when several of the following are on such as headlamps high beams fog lamps rear window defogger climate control fan at high speed heated seats engine cooling fans trailer loads and loads plugged into accessory power outlets EPM works to prevent excessive discharge of the battery It does this by balancing the generator s output and the vehicle s electrical needs It can increase engine idle speed to generate more power whenever needed It can temporarily reduce the power demands of some accessories Normally these actions occur in steps or levels without being noticeable In rare cases at the highest levels of corrective action this action may be noticeable to the driver If so a Driver Information Center DIC message might be displayed such as BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW or LOW BATTERY If this message is displayed it is recommended that the driver reduce the electrical loads as much as possible See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 4 44 Battery Run Down Protection This feature shuts off the dome lamps if they are left on for more than 10 minutes when the ignition is in LOCK OFF This helps to prevent the battery from running down 4 14 Accessory Power Outlet s The accessory power outlets can be used to connect auxiliary electrical equipment such as a cellular phone The vehicle may have two accessory power outlets located on the instrume
159. d To reset the timer to zero press and hold the set reset button while TIMER is displayed Average Speed Press the trip fuel button until AVERAGE SPEED displays This display shows the average speed of the vehicle in kilometers per hour km h or miles per hour mph This average is calculated based on the various vehicle speeds recorded since the last reset of this value To reset the value press and hold the set reset button The display will return to zero Digital Tachometer Press the trip fuel button until Tachometer 00 RPM displays This display shows the engine speed in revolutions per minute RPM Blank Display This display shows no information Vehicle Information Menu Items i Vehicle Information Press this button to scroll through the following menu items Oil Life Press the vehicle information button until OIL LIFE REMAINING displays This display shows an estimate of the oil s remaining useful life If you see 99 OIL LIFE REMAINING on the display that means 99 of the current oil life remains The engine oil life system will alert you to change the oil on a schedule consistent with your driving conditions When the remaining oil life is low the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message will appear on the display See CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON under DIC Warnings and Messages on page 4 44 You should change the oil as soon as possible See Engine Oil on page 6 15 In addition to the engine oil life syste
160. d by law It should be noted that the temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded Excessive speed underinflation or excessive loading either separately or in combination can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure 6 76 Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance The tires and wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced carefully at the factory to give you the longest tire life and best overall performance Adjustments to wheel alignment and tire balancing will not be necessary on a regular basis However if you notice unusual tire wear or your vehicle pulling to one side or the other the alignment might need to be checked If you notice your vehicle vibrating when driving on a smooth road the tires and wheels might need to be rebalanced See your dealer retailer for proper diagnosis Wheel Replacement Replace any wheel that is bent cracked or badly rusted or corroded If wheel nuts keep coming loose the wheel wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced If the wheel leaks air replace it except some aluminum wheels which can sometimes be repaired See your dealer retailer if any of these conditions exist Your dealer retailer will Know the kind of wheel you need Each new wheel should have the same load carrying capacity diameter width offset and be mounted the same way as the one it replaces If you need to replace any of the wheels wheel bolts
161. d then vacuum 6 97 To clean 1 Saturate a lint free clean white cloth with water or club soda 2 Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture 3 Start on the outside edge of the soil and gently rub toward the center Continue cleaning using a clean area of the cloth each time it becomes soiled 4 Continue to gently rub the soiled area until the cleaning cloth remains clean 5 f the soil is not completely removed use a mild soap solution and repeat the cleaning process that was used with plain water If any of the soil remains a commercial fabric cleaner or spot lifter may be necessary When a commercial upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to be used test a small hidden area for colorfastness first If the locally cleaned area gives any impression that a ring formation may result clean the entire surface After the cleaning process has been completed a paper towel can be used to blot excess moisture from the fabric or carpet 6 98 Instrument Panel Vinyl and Other Plastic Surfaces A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to remove dust If a more thorough cleaning is necessary a clean soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution can be used to gently remove dust and dirt Never use spot lifters or removers on plastic surfaces Many commercial cleaners and coatings that are sold to preserve and protect soft plastic surfaces may permanently change the appearance and feel of the interior and are not reco
162. dditional systems that need lubrication Transfer Case When to Check Lubricant Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how often to check the lubricant See Scheduled Maintenance on page 7 3 How to Check Lubricant To get an accurate reading the vehicle should be on a level surface eS hon K o g S 7 D A EOF Ey em I Jy If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole you ll need to add some lubricant Add enough lubricant to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole Use care not to overtighten the plug What to Use Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of lubricant to use See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 7 11 6 45 Rear Axle When to Check Lubricant Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how often to check the lubricant See Scheduled Maintenance on page 7 3 How to Check Lubricant s A gt ME SAL To get an accurate reading the vehicle should be on a level surface 6 46 If you have the 1500 Series the proper level is from 5 8 inch 15 mm to 1 5 8 inch 40 mm below the bottom of the filler plug hole The proper level for the 2500 and 3500 Series is from 0 to 1 4 6 mm below the bottom of the filler plug hole Add only enough fluid to reach the proper level What to Use Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of lubricant to use See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on pa
163. device is playing Press again and the system begins playing audio from the connected portable audio player If a portable audio player is not connected the message No Aux Input Device displays Using an MP3 MP3 CD R or CD RW Disc The radio plays MP3 files that were recorded on a CD R or CD RW disc The files can be recorded with the following fixed bit rates 32 kbps 40 kbps 56 kbps 64 kbps 80 kbps 96 kbps 112 kbps 128 kbps 160 kbps 192 kbps 224 kbps 256 kbps and 320 kbps or a variable bit rate Song title artist name and album are available for display by the radio when recorded using ID3 tags version 1 and 2 Compressed Audio The radio also plays discs that contain both uncompressed CD audio CDA files and MP3 files By default the radio shows the MP3 label on the left side of the screen but plays both file formats in the order in which they were recorded to the disc 4 72 MP3 Format If you burn your own MP3 disc on a personal computer Make sure the MP3 files are recorded on a CD R or CD RW disc Do not mix standard audio and MP3 files on one disc The CD player is able to read and play a maximum of 50 folders 15 playlists and 512 folders and files Create a folder structure that makes it easy to find songs while driving Organize songs by albums using one folder for each album Each folder or album should contain 18 songs or less Avoid subfolders The system can support up to eight
164. ding important safety information A label on the sun visor says Never put a rear facing child seat in the front This is because the risk to the rear facing child is so great if the airbag deploys 2 56 A WARNING A child in a rear facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag inflates This is because the back of the rear facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating airbag A child ina forward facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag inflates and the passenger seat is in a forward position Even if the airbag switch has turned off the right front passenger frontal airbag no system is fail safe No one can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy under some unusual circumstance even though it is turned off Secure rear facing child restraints in a rear seat even if the airbag is off If you secure a forward facing child restraint in the right front seat always move the front passenger seat as far back as it will go It is better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat A WARNING If the airbag readiness light ever comes on and stays on it means that something may be wrong with the airbag system For example the right front passenger airbag could inflate even though the airbag on off switch is turned off To help avoid injury to yourself or others have the vehicle serviced right away Se
165. distance and your strongest bones take the forces That is why safety belts make such good sense Q If I am a good driver and never drive far from home why should wear safety belts A You may be an excellent driver but if you are in a crash even one that is not your fault you and your passenger s can be hurt Being a good driver does not protect you from things beyond your control such as bad drivers Most accidents occur within 25 miles 40 km of home And the greatest number of serious injuries and deaths occur at speeds of less than 40 mph 65 km h Safety belts are for everyone How to Wear Safety Belts Properly This section is only for people of adult size Be aware that there are special things to know about safety belts and children And there are different rules for smaller children and infants If a child will be riding in the vehicle see Older Children on page 2 30 or Infants and Young Children on page 2 33 Follow those rules for everyone s protection It is very important for all occupants to buckle up Statistics show that unbelted people are hurt more often in crashes than those who are wearing safety belts Occupants who are not buckled up can be thrown out of the vehicle in a crash And they can strike others in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts First before you or your passenger s wear a safety belt there is important information you should know Sit up straight and always
166. dows or other controls or even make the vehicle move The windows will function and they could be seriously injured or killed if caught in the path of a closing window Do not leave keys in a vehicle with children When there are children in the rear seat use the window lockout button to prevent unintentional operation of the windows If the vehicle has power windows the controls are located on each of the side doors AUTO The driver door has a switch for the passenger window also The power windows will work when the ignition has been turned to ON RUN or ACC ACCESSORY or when Retained Accessory Power RAP is active See Retained Accessory Power RAP on page 3 23 Press the switch to lower the window Pull up on the front edge of the switch to raise the window 3 17 Express Down The driver window switch also has an express down feature that allows the window to be lowered without holding the switch Press fully and release the window switch marked AUTO to activate the express down mode This mode can be cancelled at any time by pulling up on the switch To open the window part way lightly tap the switch until the window is at the desired position Swing Out Windows Side Swing Out Window To open the side door swing out window pull up on the latch at the edge of the window Swing the window out and push down on the latch to lock the window into place To close th
167. drop or scratch the bulb You or others could be injured Be sure to read and follow the instructions on the bulb package Headlamps To remove the headlamp assembly from the vehicle and access the bulbs 1 Open the hood See Hood Release on page 6 13 for more information 2 Remove the two bolts from the headlamp assembly Remove the two pins on the top of the headlamp assembly To remove the pins turn the outer pin clockwise and pull it straight up To remove the inner pin turn it counterclockwise and pull it straight up Lift the inboard side of the headlamp to release the inboard tab from the radiator support 10 11 Lift the outboard side of the headlamp to release the outboard tab from the radiator support Lower the headlamp to allow the vertical adjustor to clear the tie bar Turn the headlamp forward and upward to remove it from the grille Turn the bulb connector counterclockwise and pull it out of the housing Without removing the headlamp assembly itself remove the bulb socket from the back of the headlamp on the driver s side Turn the bulb counterclockwise one quarter turn to remove it from the socket On the passenger s side turn the bulb clockwise one turn 6 50 12 Install the new bulb into the socket then reinstall it into the headlamp assembly 13 Reverse the steps to reinstall the headlamp assembly Front Turn Signal Sidemarker and 6 Replace the bulb Park
168. dy airflow or tail pipes The exhaust smells or sounds strange or different The exhaust system leaks due to corrosion or damage The vehicle s exhaust system has been modified damaged or improperly repaired There are holes or openings in the vehicle body from damage or after market modifications that are not completely sealed If unusual fumes are detected or if it is suspected that exhaust is coming into the vehicle Drive it only with the windows completely down Have the vehicle repaired immediately Never park the vehicle with the engine running in an enclosed area such as a garage or a building that has no fresh air ventilation Running the Vehicle While Parked It is better not to park with the engine running But if you ever have to here are some things to know ZN WARNING Idling a vehicle in an enclosed area with poor ventilation is dangerous Engine exhaust may enter the vehicle Engine exhaust contains Carbon Monoxide CO which cannot be seen or smelled It can cause unconsciousness and even death Never run the engine in an enclosed area that has no fresh air ventilation For more information see Engine Exhaust on page 3 38 A WARNING It can be dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the automatic transmission shift lever is not fully in P Park with the parking brake firmly set The vehicle can roll Do not leave the vehicle when the engine is running unless you have to If you have left th
169. e VIN Code G and the N15 flexible fuel option you can use either regular unleaded gasoline or ethanol fuel containing up to 85 ethanol E85 See Fuel E85 85 Ethanol on page 6 8 For all other gasoline engines use only regular unleaded gasoline Gasoline Octane Use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octane rating of 87 or higher If the octane rating is less than 87 an audible knocking noise commonly referred to as spark knock might be heard when driving If this occurs use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as soon as possible If heavy knocking is heard when using gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher the engine needs service Gasoline Specifications At a minimum gasoline should meet ASTM specification D 4814 in the United States or CAN CGSB 3 5 or 3 511 in Canada Some gasolines contain an octane enhancing additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl MMT We recommend against the use of gasolines containing MMT See Additives on page 6 7 for additional information California Fuel If the vehicle is certified to meet California Emissions Standards it is designed to operate on fuels that meet California specifications See the underhood emission control label If this fuel is not available in states adopting California emissions standards the vehicle will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal specifications but emission control system performance might be affected The
170. e s engine specifications and replacement parts See Engine Specifications under Capacities and Specifications on page 6 110 for the vehicle s engine code Service Parts Identification Label This label on the front passenger door frame has the following information Vehicle Identification Number VIN Model designation Paint information Production options and special equipment Do not remove this label from the vehicle 6 103 Electrical System Add On Electrical Equipment Notice Do not add anything electrical to the vehicle unless you check with your dealer retailer first Some electrical equipment can damage the vehicle and the damage would not be covered by the vehicle s warranty Some add on electrical equipment can keep other components from working as they should Add on equipment can drain the vehicle battery even if the vehicle is not operating The vehicle has an airbag system Before attempting to add anything electrical to the vehicle see Servicing Your Airbag Equipped Vehicle on page 2 77 and Adding Equipment to Your Airbag Equipped Vehicle on page 2 78 Headlamp Wiring The headlamp wiring is protected by fuses in the engine compartment fuse block An electrical overload will cause the lamps to flicker on and off or in some cases to remain off If this happens have your headlamp wiring checked right away 6 104 Windshield Wiper Fuses The windshield wiper motor is prote
171. e A fluid loss in this system could indicate a problem Have the system inspected and repaired How to Check Power Steering Fluid To check the power steering fluid do the following 1 Turn the key off and let the engine compartment cool down 2 Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean 3 Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a clean rag 4 Replace the cap and completely tighten it 5 Then remove the cap again and look at the fluid level on the dipstick The level should be at the COLD FILL mark If necessary add only enough fluid to bring the level up to the mark To prevent contamination of brake fluid never check or fill the power steering reservoir with the brake master cylinder cover off What to Use To determine what kind of fluid to use see Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 7 11 Always use the proper fluid Failure to use the proper fluid can cause leaks and damage hoses and seals 6 35 Windshield Washer Fluid Notice When using concentrated washer fluid follow What to Use the manufacturer s instructions for adding When you need windshield washer fluid be sure to read watch the manufacturer s instructions before use If you will Do not mix water with ready to use washer fluid be operating your vehicle in an area where the Water can cause the solution to freeze and temperature may fall below freezing use a fluid that has damage your washer fluid tank and other parts suff
172. e changed at 5 000 km 3 000 miles since the last oil change Remember to reset the oil life system whenever the oil is changed How to Reset the Engine Oil Life System The Engine Oil Life System calculates when to change the engine oil and filter based on vehicle use Whenever the oil is changed reset the system so it can calculate when the next oil change is required If a situation occurs where the oil is changed prior to a CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message being turned on reset the system To reset the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message 1 Turn the ignition key to ON RUN with the engine off 2 Fully press and release the accelerator pedal slowly three times within five seconds 3 Turn the key to LOCK OFF If the message comes back on when the vehicle is started the engine oil life system has not reset Repeat the procedure If it still does not reset see your dealer retailer for service What to Do with Used Oil Used engine oil contains certain elements that can be unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long Clean your skin and nails with soap and water or a good hand cleaner Wash or properly dispose of clothing or rags containing used engine oil See the manufacturer s warnings about the use and disposal of oil products Used oil can be a threat to the environment If you change your own oil be sure to drain all the oil from the filter before disposal Nev
173. e on page 2 66 The parts of the airbag that come into contact with you may be warm but not too hot to touch There may be some smoke and dust coming from the vents in the deflated airbags Airbag inflation does not prevent the driver from seeing out of the windshield or being able to steer the vehicle nor does it prevent people from leaving the vehicle A WARNING When an airbag inflates there may be dust in the air This dust could cause breathing problems for people with a history of asthma or other breathing trouble To avoid this everyone in the vehicle should get out as soon as it is safe to do so If you have breathing problems but cannot get out of the vehicle after an airbag inflates then get fresh air by opening a window or a door If you experience breathing problems following an airbag deployment you should seek medical attention The vehicle has a feature that may automatically unlock the doors if equipped with power door locks turn on the interior lamps and hazard warning flashers and shut off the fuel system after the airbags inflate You can lock the doors turn off the interior lamps and turn the hazard warning flashers by using the controls for those features 2 67 In many crashes severe enough to inflate the airbag R windshields are broken by vehicle deformation A WARNING Additional windshield breakage may also occur from the right front passenger airbag A crash severe enough to inflate the
174. e 6 18 for information on how to reset the message See Engine Oil on page 6 15 and Scheduled Maintenance on page 7 3 for more information CHECK TIRE PRESSURE or TIRE LOW ADD AIR TO TIRE If your vehicle has the Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS this message displays when the pressure in one or more of the vehicle s tires is low The low tire pressure warning light will also come on See Tire Pressure Light on page 4 30 This message will also 4 45 indicate which tire needs to be checked You can receive more than one tire pressure message at a time To read the other messages that may have been sent at the same time press the set reset button If a tire pressure message appears on the DIC stop as soon as you can Have the tire pressures checked and set to those shown on the Tire Loading Information label See Tires on page 6 55 Loading the Vehicle on page 5 17 and Inflation Tire Pressure on page 6 63 The DIC also shows the tire pressure values See DIC Operation and Displays on page 4 38 DRIVER DOOR OPEN This message displays and a chime sounds if the driver door is not fully closed and the vehicle is in a drive gear Stop and turn off the vehicle check the door for obstructions and close the door again Check to see if the message still appears on the DIC ENGINE HOT A C Air Conditioning OFF This message displays when the engine coolant becomes hotter than the normal operating temperature See Engine Co
175. e Airbag Readiness Light on page 4 23 for more information including important safety information If the vehicle does not have a rear seat that will accommodate a rear facing child restraint a rear facing child restraint should not be installed in the vehicle even if the airbag is off If the child restraint has the LATCH system see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children LATCH on page 2 42 for how and where to install the child restraint using LATCH If a child restraint is secured using a safety belt and it uses a top tether see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children LATCH on page 2 42 for top tether anchor locations Do not secure a child seat in a position without a top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the top tether be anchored or if the instructions that come with the child restraint say that the top strap must be anchored In Canada the law requires that forward facing child restraints have a top tether and that the tether be attached You will be using the lap shoulder belt to secure the child restraint in this position Follow the instructions that came with the child restraint 1 Move the seat as far back as it will go before securing the forward facing child restraint If you have no other choice but to install a rear facing child restraint in this seat make sure the airbag is off once the child restraint has been installed When the airbag off switch has turned off the right
176. e Delayed Locking on page 3 9 for more information Press the customization button until DELAY DOOR LOCK appears on the DIC display Press the set reset button once to access the settings for this feature Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings OFF There will be no delayed locking of the vehicle s doors ON default The doors will not lock until five seconds after the last door is closed 4 56 NO CHANGE No change will be made to this feature The current setting will remain To select a setting press the set reset button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC EXIT LIGHTING This feature allows you to select the amount of time you want the exterior lamps to remain on when it is dark enough outside This happens after the key is turned from ON RUN to LOCK OFF Press the customization button until EXIT LIGHTING appears on the DIC display Press the set reset button once to access the settings for this feature Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings OFF The exterior lamps will not turn on 10 SECONDS default The exterior lamps will stay on for 10 seconds 1 MINUTE The exterior lamps will stay on for one minute 2 MINUTES The exterior lamps will stay on for two minutes NO CHANGE No change will be made to this feature The current setting will remain To select a setting press the set reset button while the desired
177. e because the E85 fuel is not properly formulated for your climate If this happens switching to gasoline or adding gasoline to the fuel tank can improve starting For good starting and heater efficiency below 32 F 0 C the fuel mix in the fuel tank should contain no more than 70 ethanol It is best not to alternate repeatedly between gasoline and E85 If you do switch fuels it is recommended that you add as much fuel as possible do not add less than three gallons 11 L when refueling You should drive the vehicle immediately after refueling for at least seven miles 11 km to allow the vehicle to adapt to the change in ethanol concentration E85 has less energy per gallon than gasoline so you will need to refill the fuel tank more often when using E85 than when you are using gasoline See Filling the Tank on page 6 10 Notice Some additives are not compatible with E85 fuel and can harm the vehicle s fuel system Do not add anything to E85 Damage caused by additives would not be covered by the vehicle warranty Notice This vehicle was not designed for fuel that contains methanol Do not use fuel containing methanol It can corrode metal parts in the fuel system and also damage plastic and rubber parts That damage would not be covered under the vehicle warranty Fuels in Foreign Countries If you plan on driving in another country outside the United States or Canada the proper fuel might be hard to find Never u
178. e engine running the vehicle can move suddenly You or others could be injured To be sure the vehicle will not move even when you are on fairly level ground always set the parking brake and move the shift lever to P Park Follow the proper steps to be sure the vehicle will not move See Shifting Into Park on page 3 36 If parking on a hill and pulling a trailer see Towing a Trailer on page 5 26 3 39 Mirrors Manual Rearview Mirror Hold the inside rearview mirror in the center to move it for a clearer view behind your vehicle Adjust the mirror to avoid glare from the headlamps behind Push the tab forward for daytime use and pull it for nighttime use If you have a cargo van without the rear door glass the vehicle may not have an inside rearview mirror Outside Manual Mirrors Adjust the mirrors by pressing the mirror up and down and left and right so you can see a little of the side of your vehicle and have a clear view of objects behind you The mirrors can be manually folded in or out On the lower portion of each mirror is an auxiliary convex mirror A convex mirror s surface is curved so you can see more from the driver seat The auxiliary convex mirrors can be adjusted manually by pressing the mirror 3 40 Outside Towing Mirrors Vehicles with towing mirrors can be adjusted manually for a clear view of the objects behind you On the lower portion of each mirror there is an auxiliary conv
179. e front tire and repeat the procedure in Step 5 Proceed to the passenger side rear tire and repeat the procedure in Step 5 Proceed to the driver side rear tire and repeat the procedure in Step 5 The horn sounds two times to indicate the sensor identification code has been matched to the driver side rear tire and that the TPMS sensor matching process is no longer active The TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE message on the DIC display screen goes off Turn the ignition switch to LOCK OFF Set all four tires to the recommended air pressure level as indicated on the Tire and Loading Information label Put the valve caps back on the valve stems Tire Inspection and Rotation Inspect tires regularly for signs of wear or damage Also inspect the spare tire For more information on tire inspection see When It Is Time for New Tires on page 6 72 Tires should be rotated every 5 000 to 8 000 miles 8 000 to 13 000 km See Scheduled Maintenance on page 7 3 The purpose of a regular tire rotation is to achieve a uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle This will ensure that the vehicle continues to perform most like it did when the tires were new The first rotation is the most important See Scheduled Maintenance on page 7 3 Any time you notice unusual wear rotate the tires as soon as possible and check wheel alignment Also check for damaged tires or wheels See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 6 72 and Wheel Replacement
180. e or ethanol fuel containing up to 85 ethanol E85 See Fuel on page 6 5 In all other engines use only the unleaded gasoline described under Gasoline Octane on page 6 6 Vehicles that have the 4 8L V8 engine VIN Code A the 5 3L V8 engine VIN Code 4 or the 6 0L V8 engine VIN Code G and the N15 flexible fuel option have a yellow fuel cap and can use 85 ethanol fuel E85 See Fuel E85 85 Ethanol on page 6 8 Driving for Better Fuel Economy Driving habits can affect fuel mileage Here are some driving tips to get the best fuel economy possible Avoid fast starts and accelerate smoothly Brake gradually and avoid abrupt stops Avoid idling the engine for long periods of time When road and weather conditions are appropriate use cruise control if equipped Always follow posted speed limits or drive more slowly when conditions require 1 18 Keep vehicle tires properly inflated Combine several trips into a single trip Replace the vehicle s tires with the same TPC Spec number molded into the tire s sidewall near the size Follow recommended scheduled maintenance Roadside Assistance Program U S 1 800 GMC 8782 462 8782 TTY Users 1 888 889 2438 Canada 1 800 268 6800 As the owner of a new GMC you are automatically enrolled in the Roadside Assistance program This program provides technically trained advisors who are available 24 hours a day 365 days a year minor repair information
181. e removed or serviced See Capacities and Specifications on page 6 110 for more information 6 91 Secondary Latch System To release the spare tire from the secondary latch Your vehicle has an underbody mounted tire hoist assembly equipped with a Saco latch system It is AN WARNING designed to stop the spare tire from suddenly falling off the vehicle if the cable holding the spare tire is Someone standing too close during the procedure damaged For the secondary latch to work the tire must could be injured by the jack If the spare tire does be stowed with the valve stem pointing down not slide off the jack completely make sure no See Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools on page 6 94 one is behind you or on either side of you as you for instructions on storing the spare tire correctly pull the jack out from under the spare 1 Check under the vehicle to see if the cable end is Z WARNING visible If the cable is not visible Before beginning this procedure read all the start this procedure at instructions Failure to read and follow the sn Step 6 instructions could damage the hoist assembly and you and others could get hurt Read and follow the instructions listed next 2 Turn the hoist extension counterclockwise until approximately 6 inches 15 cm of cable is exposed 6 92 E QE eran dus BT YT mida eet 3 Attach the jack handle jack handle extension and 4 Place the
182. e to work 10 minutes or until the driver door is opened The power windows will continue to work for up to 10 minutes or until any door is opened Starting the Engine If the vehicle has the DURAMAX Diesel engine see the DURAMAX Diesel manual for more information To place the transmission in the proper gear Move the shift lever to P Park or N Neutral The engine will not start in any other position To restart the engine when the vehicle is already moving use N Neutral only 3 23 Starting Procedure 1 With your foot off the accelerator pedal turn the ignition key to START When the engine starts let go of the key The idle speed will go down as your engine gets warm Do not race the engine immediately after starting it Operate the engine and transmission gently to allow the oil to warm up and lubricate all moving parts The vehicle has a Computer Controlled Cranking System This feature assists in starting the engine and protects components If the ignition key is turned to the START position and then released when the engine begins cranking the engine will continue cranking for a few seconds or until the vehicle starts If the engine does not start and the key is held in START for many seconds cranking will be stopped after 15 seconds to prevent cranking motor damage To prevent gear damage this system also prevents cranking if the engine is already running Engine cranking can be stopped by turning the ignition
183. e vehicle with the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter You will not receive feedback when unlocking the vehicle with the RKE transmitter if the doors are open See Remote Keyless Entry RKE System Operation on page 3 4 for more information Press the customization button until REMOTE DOOR UNLOCK appears on the DIC display Press the set reset button once to access the settings for this feature Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings LIGHTS OFF The exterior lamps will not flash when you press the unlock button on the RKE transmitter LIGHTS ON default The exterior lamps will flash when you press the unlock button on the RKE transmitter 4 55 NO CHANGE No change will be made to this feature The current setting will remain To select a setting press the set reset button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC DELAY DOOR LOCK This feature allows you to select whether or not the locking of the vehicle s doors will be delayed When locking the doors with the power door lock switch and a door is open this feature will delay locking the doors until five seconds after the last door is closed You will hear three chimes to signal that the delayed locking feature is in use The key must be out of the ignition for this feature to work You can temporarily override delayed locking by pressing the power door lock switch twice or the lock button on the RKE transmitter twice Se
184. e will be set to a normal level LOUD The chime volume will be set to a loud level NO CHANGE No change will be made to this feature The current setting will remain There is no default for chime volume The volume will stay at the last known setting To select a setting press the set reset button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC 4 57 FACTORY SETTINGS This feature allows you to set all of the customization features back to their factory default settings Press the customization button until FACTORY SETTINGS appears on the DIC display Press the set reset button once to access the settings for this feature Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings RESTORE ALL default The customization features will be set to their factory default settings DO NOT RESTORE The customization features will not be set to their factory default settings To select a setting press the set reset button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC 4 58 EXIT FEATURE SETTINGS This feature allows you to exit the feature settings menu Press the customization button until FEATURE SETTINGS PRESS TO EXIT appears in the DIC display Press the set reset button once to exit the menu If you do not exit pressing the customization button again will return you to the beginning of the feature settings menu Exiting the Feature Settings Menu The feature settings menu will be
185. e window pull the latch toward you and push down on the latch to lock it Rear Swing Out Windows The vehicle also has rear swing out windows The rear swing out windows work the same way as the side swing out window but the latch is located at the bottom edge of the window Enhanced Technology Glass The vehicle may be equipped with Enhanced Technology Glass ETG ETG is part of the overall occupant protection system on passenger vans ETG may help to keep passengers sitting next to these fixed windows from being ejected through the glass in some but not in all crashes Even with this glass safety belts must still be worn at all times For passenger vans use only ETG glass approved for your vehicle for replacement when damaged The following table shows laminated glass location based on vehicle model and options Vehicle Configuration ETG Locations Eight Seat Sliding door forward Passenger Vans window Sliding door forward alla ee Seat window and rear most 9 side windows Long Wheelbase 3 19 Sun Visors To block out glare swing down the sun visors You can also swing them to the side Visor Vanity Mirror The vehicle may have visor vanity mirrors with or without lamps Lift the mirror cover to turn the lamps on if equipped Theft Deterrent Systems Vehicle theft is big business especially in some cities This vehicle has theft deterrent features however they do not make it impossible to steal
186. ecorded and the way the CD R or CD RW has been handled Handle them carefully Store CD R s or CD RW s in their original cases or other protective cases and away from direct sunlight and dust The CD or DVD player scans the bottom surface of the disc If the surface of a CD is damaged such as cracked broken or scratched the CD does not play properly or not at all Do not touch the bottom side of a CD while handling it this could damage the surface Pick up CDs by grasping the outer edges or the edge of the hole and the outer edge If the surface of a CD is soiled take a soft lint free cloth or dampen a clean soft cloth in a mild neutral detergent solution mixed with water and clean it Make sure the wiping process starts from the center to the edge Care of Your CD and DVD Player Do not add any label to a CD it could get caught in the CD or DVD player If a CD is recorded on a personal computer and a description label is needed try labeling the top of the recorded CD with a marking pen The use of CD lens cleaners for CDs is not advised due to the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD optics with lubricants internal to the CD and DVD player mechanism Notice f a label is added to a CD or more than one CD is inserted into the slot at a time or an attempt is made to play scratched or damaged CDs the CD player could be damaged While using the CD player use only CDs in good condition without any label load one CD
187. ed Operating the vehicle in Tow Haul when lightly loaded or with no trailer at all will not cause damage However there is no benefit to the selection of Tow Haul when the vehicle is unloaded Such a selection when unloaded may result in unpleasant engine and transmission driving characteristics and reduced fuel economy Tow Haul is recommended only when pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load Trailer Brakes A loaded trailer that weighs more than 1 500 Ibs 680 kg needs to have its own brake system that is adequate for the weight of the trailer Be sure to read and follow the instructions for the trailer brakes so they are installed adjusted and maintained properly 5 34 Driving with a Trailer Z WARNING When towing a trailer exhaust gases may collect at the rear of the vehicle and enter if the liftgate trunk hatch or rear most window is open Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide CO which cannot be seen or smelled It can cause unconsciousness and even death To maximize safety when towing a trailer Have the exhaust system inspected for leaks and make necessary repairs before starting a trip Never drive with the liftgate trunk hatch or rear most window open Fully open the air outlets on or under the instrument panel Adjust the Climate Control system to a setting that brings in only outside air and set the fan speed to the highest setting See Climate Control System in the Index For more
188. ed Memory The cruise control set speed memory is erased when the cruise control or the ignition is turned off Exterior Lamps The exterior lamps control is located on the instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel It controls the following systems Headlamps Taillamps Parking Lamps License Plate Lamps Instrument Panel Lights The exterior lamps control has four positions e Off Briefly turn the control to this position to turn the automatic headlamps and daytime running lamps DRL off or back on For vehicles first sold in Canada the off position only works for vehicles that are shifted into the P Park position AUTO Automatic Turns on the headlamps automatically at normal brightness together with the following Parking Lamps nstrument Panel Lights Taillamps License Plate Lamps 30 Parking Lamps Turns on the parking lamps together with the following nstrument Panel Lights Taillamps License Plate Lamps D Headlamps Turns on the headlamps together with the following lamps listed below Parking Lamps Instrument Panel Lights Taillamps License Plate Lamps If the headlamps are turned on while the vehicle is on the headlamps turn off automatically 10 minutes after the ignition is turned off If the headlamps are turned on while the vehicle is off the headlamps will continue to stay on To prevent the battery from being drained turn the con
189. ed from the trailering capacity to stay within GCWR limits The maximum trailer would only be 7 800 Ibs 3 538 kg You may go further and think the tongue weight should be limited to less than 1 000 Ibs 454 kg to avoid exceeding GVWR But the effect on the rear axle must still be considered Because the rear axle now weighs 3 100 Ibs 1 406 kg 900 Ibs 408 kg can be put on the rear axle without exceeding RGAWR The effect of tongue weight is about 1 5 times the actual weight 5 31 Dividing the 900 Ibs 408 kg by 1 5 leaves only 600 Ibs 272 kg of tongue weight that can be handled Since tongue weight is usually at least 10 percent of total loaded trailer weight expect that the largest trailer the vehicle can properly handle is 6 000 Ibs 2 721 kg It is important that the vehicle does not exceed any of its ratings GCWR GVWR RGAWR Maximum Trailer Rating or Tongue Weight The only way to be sure it is not exceeding any of these ratings is to weigh the vehicle and trailer Total Weight on the Vehicle s Tires Be sure the vehicle s tires are inflated to the upper limit for cold tires These numbers can be found on the Certification label at the rear edge of the driver s door or see Loading the Vehicle on page 5 17 Make sure not to go over the GVW limit for the vehicle or the GAWR including the weight of the trailer tongue If using a weight distributing hitch make sure not to go over the rear axle limit before applyin
190. eeeeeeeese 4 29 Tire Pressure 2e cente Re dh a eec 4 30 Tow Haul Mode t tete 4 36 Loading Your Vehicle eessesssss 5 17 Locking Rear Axle ient 5 7 Locks Automatic Door LOCK eseeene 3 10 Automatic Door Unlock eseeeeeesee 3 10 Cargo Door Relocking ssesesessss 3 9 Delayed Locking eese 3 9 DOOR n EU TTE 3 8 Lockout Protection eeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeees 3 12 Locks cont Power Door cccceceeeeeceeeeeeneeeeeneeteateneeaes 3 9 Programmable Automatic Door Locks 3 10 Rear Door Security LOCKS sssssss 3 11 Loss of Control eessessseeem 5 9 Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children 2 42 Maintenance Schedule Maintenance Record esses 7 15 Maintenance Replacement Parts 7 13 Owner Checks and Services 7 9 Recommended Fluids and Lubricants 7 11 Scheduled Maintenance ssss 7 3 Malfunction Indicator Lamp esses 4 31 Manual Seats csssssseee Hee 2 2 Man al WindoWs 5 rris eta etra ck ea verra 3 17 Message DIC Warnings and Messages 4 44 Mirrors Manual Rearview cesse 3 40 Outside Convex Mirror eene 3 41 Outside Heated Mirrors ssss
191. efault The doors will automatically lock when the vehicle is shifted out of P Park AT VEHICLE SPEED The doors will automatically lock when the vehicle speed is above 8 mph 13 km h for three seconds NO CHANGE No change will be made to this feature The current setting will remain To select a setting press the set reset button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC 4 54 AUTO DOOR UNLOCK This feature allows you to select whether or not to turn off the automatic door unlocking feature It also allows you to select which doors and when the doors will automatically unlock See Programmable Automatic Door Locks on page 3 10 for more information Press the customization button until AUTO DOOR UNLOCK appears on the DIC display Press the set reset button once to access the settings for this feature Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings OFF None of the doors will automatically unlock DRIVER AT KEY OUT Only the driver s door will unlock when the key is taken out of the ignition DRIVER IN PARK Only the driver s door will unlock when the vehicle is shifted into P Park ALL AT KEY OUT All of the doors will unlock when the key is taken out of the ignition ALL IN PARK default All of the doors will unlock when the vehicle is shifted into P Park NO CHANGE No change will be made to this feature The current setting will remain To select a setting pre
192. ehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle all occupants fuel and cargo The Certification Tire label also tells you the maximum weights for the front and rear axles called Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR To find out the actual loads on your front and rear axles you need to go to a weigh station and weigh your vehicle Your dealer can help you with this Be sure to spread out your load equally on both sides of the centerline Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle or the GAWR for either the front or rear axle If there is a heavy load it should be spread out ZN WARNING Do not load the vehicle any heavier than the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR or either the maximum front or rear Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR If you do parts on the vehicle can break and it can change the way your vehicle handles These could cause you to lose control and crash Also overloading can shorten the life of the vehicle ZNWARNING Things you put inside your vehicle can strike and injure people in a sudden stop or turn or in a crash Put things in the cargo area of your vehicle Try to spread the weight evenly Never stack heavier things like suitcases inside the vehicle so that some of them are above the tops of the seats Do not leave an unsecured child restraint in your vehicle When you carry something inside the vehicle secure it whenever you can Do not leave a seat folded down u
193. em to a setting that circulates the air inside the vehicle and set the fan speed to the highest setting See Climate Control System in the Index For more information about carbon monoxide see Engine Exhaust on page 3 38 Snow can trap exhaust gases under your vehicle This can cause deadly CO carbon monoxide gas to get inside CO could overcome you and kill you You cannot see it or smell it so you might not know it is in your vehicle Clear away snow from around the base of your vehicle especially any that is blocking the exhaust Run the engine for short periods only as needed to keep warm but be careful To save fuel run the engine for only short periods as needed to warm the vehicle and then shut the engine off and close the window most of the way to save heat Repeat this until help arrives but only when you feel really uncomfortable from the cold Moving about to keep warm also helps If it takes some time for help to arrive now and then when you run the engine push the accelerator pedal slightly so the engine runs faster than the idle speed This keeps the battery charged to restart the vehicle and to signal for help with the headlamps Do this as little as possible to save fuel If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand Mud Ice or Snow Slowly and cautiously spin the wheels to free the vehicle when stuck in sand mud ice or snow See Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out on page 5 16 If the vehicle has a tra
194. en the vehicle is in P Park Press the vehicle information button until PRESS V TO CHANGE COMPASS ZONE displays Find the vehicle s current location and variance zone number on the map Zones 1 through 15 are available Press the set reset button to scroll through and select the appropriate variance zone Press the trip fuel button until the vehicle heading for example N for North is displayed in the DIC If calibration is necessary calibrate the compass See Compass Calibration Procedure following 4 43 Compass Calibration The compass can be manually calibrated Only calibrate the compass in a magnetically clean and safe location such as an open parking lot where driving the vehicle in circles is not a danger It is suggested to calibrate away from tall buildings utility wires manhole covers or other industrial structures if possible If CAL should ever appear in the DIC display the compass should be calibrated If the DIC display does not show a heading for example N for North or the heading does not change after making turns there may be a strong magnetic field interfering with the compass Such interference may be caused by a magnetic CB or cell phone antenna mount a magnetic emergency light magnetic note pad holder or any other magnetic item Turn off the vehicle move the magnetic item then turn on the vehicle and calibrate the compass To
195. en wheel nuts in the proper sequence to torque specifications in Capacities and Specifications on page 6 110 Brake linings should always be replaced as complete axle sets Brake Pedal Travel See your dealer retailer if the brake pedal does not return to normal height or if there is a rapid increase in pedal travel This could be a sign that brake service might be required Brake Adjustment Every brake stop the brakes adjust for wear Replacing Brake System Parts The braking system on a vehicle is complex Its many parts have to be of top quality and work well together if the vehicle is to have really good braking The vehicle was designed and tested with top quality brake parts When parts of the braking system are replaced for example when the brake linings wear down and new ones are installed be sure to get new approved replacement parts If this is not done the brakes might not work properly For example if someone puts in brake linings that are wrong for the vehicle the balance between the front and rear brakes can change for the worse The braking performance expected can change in many other ways if the wrong replacement brake parts are installed 6 39 Battery Vehicle Storage Refer to the replacement number on the original battery label when a new battery is needed See Engine Compartment Overview on page 6 14 for battery AN WARNING location A DANGER Battery posts terminals and related a
196. engine coolant temperature gage on your vehicle s instrument panel See Engine Coolant Temperature Gage on page 4 30 for more information You may decide not to lift the hood when this warning appears but instead get service help right away See Roadside Assistance Program on page 8 6 If you do decide to lift the hood make sure the vehicle is parked on a level surface Then check to see if the engine cooling fans are running If the engine is overheating both fans should be running If they are not do not continue to run the engine and have the vehicle serviced See if the engine cooling fan speed increases when idle speed is doubled by pushing the accelerator pedal down If it does not your vehicle needs service Turn off the engine Notice Engine damage from running the engine without coolant is not covered by the warranty Notice f the engine catches fire because of being driven with no coolant your vehicle can be badly damaged The costly repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty If Steam Is Coming From The Engine Compartment A WARNING Steam from an overheated engine can burn you badly even if you just open the hood Stay away from the engine if you see or hear steam coming from it Just turn it off and get everyone away from the vehicle until it cools down Wait until there is no sign of steam or coolant before you open the hood If you keep driving when your engine is overheated the liquid
197. engine oil and filter Reset oil life system Engine coolant level check Windshield washer fluid level check Tire inflation pressures check Tire wear inspection Rotate tires Fluids visual leak check Engine air cleaner filter inspection vehicles driven in dusty conditions only Brake system inspection Chassis components lubrication Steering and suspension inspection Engine cooling system inspection Windshield wiper blades inspection Body components lubrication Restraint system components check Automatic transmission fluid level check All wheel drive only Transfer case fluid level check Engine air cleaner filter inspection vehicles not driven in dusty conditions Shields inspection Maintenance I Maintenance II Owner Checks and Services Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Control System Check A WARNING Starter Switch Check ZN WARNING When you are doing this inspection the vehicle could move suddenly If the vehicle moves you or others could be injured When you are doing this inspection the vehicle could move suddenly If the vehicle moves you or others could be injured 1 Before starting this check be sure there is enough 1 Before starting this check be sure there is enough room around the vehicle It should be parked on a room around the vehicle level surface 2 Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular 2 Firmly apply the parking brake See Parking Brake brake See Parking
198. ents that are petroleum based or that contain acid or abrasives as they can damage the paint metal or plastic on the vehicle Approved cleaning products can be obtained from your dealer retailer Follow all manufacturers directions regarding correct product usage necessary safety precautions and appropriate disposal of any vehicle care product Rinse the vehicle well before washing and after to remove all cleaning agents completely If they are allowed to dry on the surface they could stain Dry the finish with a soft clean chamois or an all cotton towel to avoid surface scratches and water spotting High pressure car washes may cause water to enter the vehicle Avoid using high pressure washes closer than 12 inches 30 cm to the surface of the vehicle Use of power washers exceeding 1 200 psi 8 274 kPa can result in damage or removal of paint and decals 6 99 Cleaning Exterior Lamps Lenses Use only lukewarm or cold water a soft cloth and a car washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses Follow instructions under Washing Your Vehicle on page 6 99 Finish Care Occasional waxing or mild polishing of the vehicle by hand may be necessary to remove residue from the paint finish Approved cleaning products can be obtained from your dealer retailer If the vehicle has a basecoat clearcoat paint finish the clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored basecoat Always use waxes and polishes that are non abras
199. er A Bulb Socket B License Plate Bulb Assembly C Screws 6 53 Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement Windshield wiper blades should be inspected for wear and cracking See Scheduled Maintenance on page 7 3 for more information on wiper blade inspection Replacement blades come in different types and are removed in different ways To remove the type with a release clip do the following 1 Lift the wiper arm until it locks into a vertical position 2 Press down on the blade assembly pivot locking tab Pull down on the blade assembly to release it from the wiper arm hook 6 54 The insert has two notches at one end that are locked by bottom claws of the blade assembly At the notched end pull the insert from the blade assembly To install the new wiper insert slide the notched end last into the end with two blade claws Then slide the insert all the way through the blade claws at the opposite end Make sure that the notches are locked by the bottom claws Make sure that all other claws are properly locked on both sides of the insert slot Put the blade assembly pivot in the wiper arm hook Pull it up until the pivot locking tab locks in the hook slot Carefully lower the wiper arm and blade assembly into the windshield Tires WARNING Continued Your new vehicle comes with high quality tires made by a leading tire manufacturer If you ever recommended pressure Tire pressure
200. er dispose of oil by putting it in the trash pouring it on the ground into sewers or into streams or bodies of water Recycle it by taking it to a place that collects used oil Engine Air Cleaner Filter If your vehicle has the DURAMAX Diesel engine see the DURAMAX Diesel manual for more information KC D es CC C Ty L Tm S Ee ANA IS The engine air cleaner filter is located near the center of the engine compartment See Engine Compartment Overview on page 6 14 for more information on location When to Inspect the Engine Air Cleaner Filter Inspect the air cleaner filter at the Maintenance II intervals and replace it at the first oil change after each 50 000 mile 80 000 km interval See Scheduled Maintenance on page 7 3 for more information If you are driving in dusty dirty conditions inspect the filter at each engine oil change How to Inspect the Engine Air Cleaner Filter To inspect the air cleaner filter remove the filter from the vehicle and lightly shake the filter to release loose dust and dirt If the filter remains caked with dirt a new filter is required Never use compressed air to clean the filter To inspect or replace the engine air cleaner filter do the following 1 Unhook the retainer clips and remove the cover 2 Lift the filter out of the engine air cleaner filter housing Care should be taken to dislodge as little dirt as possible 3 Clean the engine air cleaner f
201. er in this section f the transmitter is still not working correctly see your dealer retailer or a qualified technician for Service Remote Keyless Entry RKE System Operation The Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter functions work up to 20 m 65 feet away from the vehicle There are other conditions which can affect the performance of the transmitter See Remote Keyless Entry RKE System on page 3 4 a ap Without Remote Start Shown With Similar Lock Press once to lock all doors If enabled through the Driver Information Center DIC the parking lamps flash once to indicate locking has occurred The horn may chirp when gis pressed again within five seconds See DIC Vehicle Customization on page 4 52 for additional information A Unlock Press to unlock the driver door If A is pressed again within five seconds all remaining doors unlock The interior lamps come on and stay on for 20 seconds or until the ignition is turned on If enabled through the DIC the parking lamps flash twice to indicate unlocking has occurred See DIC Vehicle Customization on page 4 52 for additional information f Cargo Door Press to unlock only the cargo doors Q Remote Vehicle Start For vehicles with this feature press and then press and hold Q within five seconds to start the engine from outside the vehicle using the RKE transmitter See Remote Vehicle Start on page 3 6 for additional information
202. ermine the Chassis Lubricant GM Part k da No U S 12377985 in proper viscosity for your vehicle s Chassis Canada 88901242 or lubricant engine see Engine Oil on Lubrication meeting requirements of NLGI 2 Diesel manual page 6 15 Category LB or GC LB 50 50 mixture of clean drinkable n Wheel bearing lubricant meeting water and use only DEX COOL requirements of NLGI 2 Coolant See Engine Coolant on Front Wheel Cate gory GC or GC LB page 6 28 Bearings GM Part No U S 1051344 DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid in Canada 993037 Hydraulic Brake GM Part No U S 12377967 JSS in Canada 89021320 Engine Coolant Usage Fluid Lubricant Usage Fluid Lubricant SAE 75W 90 Synthetic Axle Multi Purpose Lubricant Superlube Front and Lubricant GM Part Hood Hinges GM Part No U S 12346241 in Rear Axle No U S 89021677 Canada 10953474 ii Canada ele G Ur enuvalent Weatherstrip Lubricant GM Part No meeting GM Specification 9986115 U S 3634770 in LE 10953518 Weatherstrip Abi DEXRONS VI Automatic aaa or Dielectric Silicone Grease Transmission Fluid Conditioning GM Part No U S 12345579 in One Piece Canada 992887 Propshaft Slip Spline Lubricant Special Lubricant Synthetic Grease with Teflon Yoke Spline GM Part No U S 12345879 in Weatherstrip Superlube GM Part Two Piece Canada 10953511 or lubricant Squeaks No U S 12371287 Propshaft meeting e of in Canada 10953437
203. ervice might be required To prevent more serious damage to the vehicle Reduce vehicle speed Avoid hard accelerations Avoid steep uphill grades f towing a trailer reduce the amount of cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible If the light continues to flash when it is safe to do so stop the vehicle Find a safe place to park the vehicle Turn the key off wait at least 10 seconds and restart the engine If the light is still flashing follow the previous steps and see your dealer retailer for service as soon as possible Light On Steady An emission control system malfunction has been detected on the vehicle Diagnosis and service might be required An emission system malfunction might be corrected by doing the following Make sure the fuel cap is fully installed See Filling the Tank on page 6 10 The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed A loose or missing fuel cap allows fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere A few driving trips with the cap properly installed should turn the light off e If the vehicle has been driven through a deep puddle of water the vehicle s electrical system might be wet The condition is usually corrected when the electrical system dries out A few driving trips should turn the light off Make sure to fuel the vehicle with quality fuel Poor fuel quality causes the engine not to run as efficiently as designed and can cause
204. es onto the pins inside of the rails Locate the hole in the rail to install the locking pins at the rear of the seat base If the vehicle has floor mats pull the flap that has been cut into the mat Insert the locking pins into the seat base and push the seat to line up the pins with the base On a three passenger seat the pin with the black cap marked R must be installed on the passenger side and the pin with the gray cap marked L on the driver side On a four passenger seat the pins marked R must be installed on the half of the seat on the passenger side The pins marked L must be installed on the half of the seat on the driver side Three Passenger Seat Shown 4 Push the pin s marked R down until they are in the retaining clip Three Passenger Seat Shown Push the pin s marked L down until they are in the retaining clip If the vehicle has a floor mat put the flap back to its original position Repeat this procedure for the other seat base Connect the quick release latch plates for the lap shoulder belts by inserting the latch plates into the buckles attached at the outboard positions of the bench seat Do not twist the belt Check that all locking pins are locked into place before operating the vehicle Safety Belts Safety Belts They Are for Everyone This section of the manual describes how to use safety belts properly It also describes some things
205. ess and hold the StabiliTrak button located on the instrument panel for more than five seconds to turn off StabiliTrak and part of the traction control system The StabiliTrak light comes on the instrument panel cluster when the system is turned off or requires service For more information see StabiliTrak Indicator Light on page 4 29 For your safety the system can only be disabled when the vehicle speed is less than 20 mph 32 km h Three chimes will be heard and the StabiliTrak light comes on To turn on the StabiliTrak system press the StabiliTrak button again StabiliTrak will automatically turn back on when the vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph 32 km h One chime is heard and the StabiliTrak light will turn off When the StabiliTrak system has been turned off system noises may still be heard as a result of the brake traction control coming on It is recommended to leave the system on for normal driving conditions but it may be necessary to turn the system off if the vehicle is stuck in sand mud ice or snow and you want to rock the vehicle to attempt to free it See f Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand Mud Ice or Snow on page 5 16 StabiliTrak System Operation The StabiliTrak system is normally on except when the system is initializing or has been disabled with the StabiliTrak button The StabiliTrak system will automatically activate to assist the driver in maintaining vehicle directional control in
206. ess than 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread 6 60 Cold Tire Pressure The amount of air pressure in a tire measured in pounds per square inch psi or kilopascals kPa before a tire has built up heat from driving See Inflation Tire Pressure on page 6 63 Curb Weight The weight of a motor vehicle with standard and optional equipment including the maximum capacity of fuel oil and coolant but without passengers and cargo DOT Markings A code molded into the sidewall of a tire signifying that the tire is in compliance with the U S Department of Transportation DOT motor vehicle safety standards The DOT code includes the Tire Identification Number TIN an alphanumeric designator which can also identify the tire manufacturer production plant brand and date of production GVWR Gross Vehicle Weight Rating See Loading the Vehicle on page 5 17 GAWR FRT Gross Axle Weight Rating for the front axle See Loading the Vehicle on page 5 17 GAWR RR Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rear axle See Loading the Vehicle on page 5 17 Intended Outboard Sidewall The side of an asymmetrical tire that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle Kilopascal kPa The metric unit for air pressure Light Truck LT Metric Tire A tire used on light duty trucks and some multipurpose passenger vehicles Load Index An assigned number ranging from 1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carrying capacity of a
207. ex mirror that can be adjusted manually to provide an extended field of view The mirrors can be manually folded in or out Outside Power Mirrors Vehicles with outside power mirrors have controls located on the driver side door Ne Select each mirror by turning the knob clockwise for the passenger side mirror or counterclockwise for the driver side mirror The center position is neutral Then adjust the mirror angle by moving the knob in the desired direction The auxiliary convex mirrors can only be adjusted manually Outside Convex Mirror A WARNING A convex mirror can make things like other vehicles look farther away than they really are If you cut too sharply into the right lane you could hit a vehicle on the right Check the inside mirror or glance over your shoulder before changing lanes The passenger side mirror is convex shaped A convex mirror s surface is curved so more can be seen from the driver seat 8 41 Outside Heated Mirrors For vehicles with heated mirrors QW Rear Defogger Press to heat the mirrors An indicator light in the button lights when the outside heated mirrors are activated See Rear Window Defogger under Climate Control System on page 4 15 for more information 3 42 Storage Areas Your vehicle may have a front storage compartment It is located at the center of the instrument panel extension by the floor To open the compartment pull up on the latch T
208. exited when any of the following occurs The vehicle is no longer in ON RUN The trip fuel or vehicle information DIC buttons are pressed The end of the feature settings menu is reached and exited A 40 second time period has elapsed with no selection made Audio System s If the vehicle came without a radio the wiring provisions for a radio and an antenna were installed at the assembly plant so that if you want a radio can be installed at the dealer retailer Determine which radio the vehicle has and read the following pages to become familiar with its features ZN WARNING Taking your eyes off the road for extended periods could cause a crash resulting in injury or death to you or others Do not give extended attention to entertainment tasks while driving This system provides access to many audio and non audio listings To minimize taking your eyes off the road while driving do the following while the vehicle is parked Become familiar with the operation and controls of the audio system Set up the tone speaker adjustments and preset radio stations For more information see Defensive Driving on page 5 2 Notice Contact your dealer retailer before adding any equipment Adding audio or communication equipment could interfere with the operation of the vehicle s engine radio or other systems and could damage them Follow federal rules covering mobile radio and telephone equipment
209. f rail airbag for the driver and right front passenger position the roof rail airbags are in the ceiling above the side window 2 63 Driver Side shown Passenger Side similar If the vehicle has roof rail airbags for the driver right front passenger passengers behind the driver and right front passenger and the third row outboard passengers the roof rail airbags are in the ceiling above the side windows On the driver side of the vehicle there is one single roof rail airbag for either vehicles with a hinged door or a sliding door 2 64 For passenger vans with a sliding door on the passenger side of the vehicle you will have a separate roof rail airbag for the passenger seated directly behind the right front passenger and the third row outboard passenger position A WARNING If something is between an occupant and an airbag the airbag might not inflate properly or it might force the object into that person causing severe injury or even death The path of an inflating airbag must be kept clear Do not put anything between an occupant and an airbag and do not attach or put anything on the steering wheel hub or on or near any other airbag covering Never secure anything to the roof of a vehicle with roof rail airbags by routing a rope or tie down through any door or window opening If you do the path of an inflating roof rail airbag will be blocked When Should an Airbag Inflate Frontal airbags are desig
210. f water or a car vehicle wash lightly apply the brake pedal until the brakes work normally Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces Driving through flowing water could cause your vehicle to be carried away If this happens you and other vehicle occupants could drown Do not ignore police warnings and be very cautious about trying to drive through flowing water Hydroplaning Hydroplaning is dangerous Water can build up under your vehicle s tires so they actually ride on the water This can happen if the road is wet enough and you are going fast enough When your vehicle is hydroplaning it has little or no contact with the road There is no hard and fast rule about hydroplaning The best advice is to slow down when the road is wet Other Rainy Weather Tips Besides slowing down other wet weather driving tips include Allow extra following distance Pass with caution Keep windshield wiping equipment in good shape Keep the windshield washer fluid reservoir filled Have good tires with proper tread depth See Tires on page 6 55 Turn off cruise control Before Leaving on a Long Trip To prepare your vehicle for a long trip consider having it serviced by your dealer retailer before departing Things to check on your own include Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir full Windows clean inside and outside Wiper Blades In good shape Fuel Engine Oil Other Fluids All levels checked La
211. fast as normal idle speed for at least three minutes while you are parked If you still have the warning turn off the engine until it cools down You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service help right away Engine Fan Noise Your vehicle has a clutched engine cooling fan When the clutch is engaged the fan spins faster to provide more air to cool the engine In most everyday driving conditions the fan is spinning slower and the clutch is not fully engaged This improves fuel economy and reduces fan noise Under heavy vehicle loading trailer towing and or high outside temperatures the fan speed increases as the clutch more fully engages so you may hear an increase in fan noise This is normal and should not be mistaken as the transmission slipping or making extra shifts It is merely the cooling System functioning properly The fan will slow down when additional cooling is not required and the clutch partially disengages You may also hear this fan noise when you start the engine It will go away as the fan clutch partially disengages Power Steering Fluid The power steering fluid reservoir is located in the engine compartment on the driver s side of the vehicle See Engine Compartment Overview on page 6 14 for reservoir location Li When to Check Power Steering Fluid It is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluid unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or you hear an unusual nois
212. first key may be faulty See your dealer retailer or a locksmith who can service the PASS Key Ill to have a new key made See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 6 104 It is possible for the PASS Key Ill decoder to learn the transponder value of a new or replacement key Up to 10 keys may be programmed for the vehicle This procedure is for learning additional keys only If all the currently programmed keys are lost or do not operate you must see your dealer retailer or a locksmith who can service PASS Key Ill to have keys made and programmed to the system See your dealer retailer or a locksmith who can service PASS Key Ill to get a new key blank that is cut exactly as the ignition key that operates the system To program the new key 1 Verify the new key has stamped on it 2 Insert the original already programmed key into the ignition lock cylinder and start the engine If the engine will not start see your dealer retailer for service 3 After the engine has started turn the key to LOCK OFF and remove the key 4 Insert the key to be programmed and turn it to ON RUN within 10 seconds of removing the previous key The security message will turn off once the key has been programmed It may not be apparent that the security message went on due to how quickly the key is programmed 5 Repeat Steps 1 through 4 if additional keys are to be programmed If you lose or damage a PASS Key Ill key see your dea
213. fter time The wheel could come off and cause could fall off causing a crash an accident When changing a wheel remove any rust or dirt from places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle In an emergency use a cloth or a paper towel to do this but be sure to use a back on with the scraper or wire brush later if needed to get all the rounded end of the rust or dirt off See Changing a Flat Tire on nuts toward the wheel page 6 80 Tighten each wheel nut by hand until the wheel is held against the hub 9 Put the wheel nuts 8 Remove any rust or dirt from the wheel bolts mounting surfaces and spare wheel 6 89 10 Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handle counterclockwise Lower the jack completely Z WARNING Wheel nuts that are not tight can work loose If all the nuts on a wheel come off the wheel can come off the vehicle causing a crash All wheel nuts must be properly tightened Follow the rules in this section to be sure they are 6 90 A WARNING If wheel studs are damaged they can break If all the studs on a wheel broke the wheel could come off and cause a crash If any stud is damaged because of a loose running wheel it could be that all of the studs are damaged To be sure replace all studs on the wheel If the stud holes in a wheel have become larger the wheel could collapse in operation Replace any wheel if its stud holes have become larger or distorted in any way Inspec
214. g the brakes You can use it for major severe downgrades where the vehicle would otherwise accelerate due to steepness of grade When you shift to 1 First it provides the lowest gear appropriate to current road speed and continues to downshift as the vehicle slows eventually downshifting to 1 First gear The transmission can be held in 1 First gear using Range Select Mode or the shift lever See Range Select Mode later in this section Notice Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle in one place on a hill using only the accelerator pedal may damage the transmission The repair will not be covered by the vehicle warranty If you are stuck do not spin the tires When stopping on a hill use the brakes to hold the vehicle in place Range Selection Mode The vehicle may have a Range Selection Mode The Range Selection Mode helps control the vehicle s transmission and vehicle speed while driving down hill or towing a trailer by letting you select a desired range of gears 3 29 To use this feature do the following 1 Move the shift lever to M Manual Mode 2 Press the plus minus buttons located on the steering column shift lever to select the desired range of gears for current driving conditions When M Manual Mode is selected a number displays in the DIC next to the M indicating the current gear This number is the highest gear that can be used However the vehicle can automatically shift to lower gears as it
215. g the weight distribution spring bars Hitches It is important to have the correct hitch equipment Crosswinds large trucks going by and rough roads are a few reasons why the right hitch is needed 5 32 Weight Distributing Hitches and Weight Carrying Hitches A Body to Ground Distance B Front of Vehicle When using a weight distributing hitch the hitch must be adjusted so the distance A remains the same both before and after coupling the trailer to the tow vehicle If a step bumper hitch will be used the bumper could be damaged in sharp turns Make sure there is ample room when turning to avoid contact between the trailer and the bumper If the loaded trailer being pulled will weigh more than 5 000 Ibs 2 270 kg be sure to use a properly mounted weight distributing hitch and sway control of the proper size This equipment is very important for proper vehicle loading and good handling when driving Always use a sway control if the trailer will weigh more than these limits Ask a hitch dealer about sway controls Will any holes need to be made in the body of the vehicle when a trailer hitch is installed If using the wiring provided with the factory installed trailering package no holes need to be made in the body of the vehicle However if an aftermarket hitch is installed holes may need to be made in the body If holes are made in the body then be sure to seal the holes later when the hitch is removed
216. g while it is scanning the disc in the background When the scan is finished the CD R or CD RW begins playing again 4 75 Once the disc has scanned the player defaults to playing MP3 files in order by artist The current artist playing is shown on the second line of the display between the arrows Once all songs by that artist are played the player moves to the next artist in alphabetical order on the CD R CD RW and begins playing MP3 files by that artist If you want to listen to MP3 files by another artist press the pushbutton located below either arrow button You will go to the next or previous artist in alphabetical order Continue pressing either button until the desired artist is displayed To change from playback by artist to playback by album press the pushbutton located below the Sort By label From the sort screen push one of the buttons below the album button Press the pushbutton below the back label to return to the main music navigator screen Now the album name is displayed on the second line between the arrows and songs from the current album begins to play Once all songs from that album are played the player moves to the next album in alphabetical order on the CD R CD RW and begins playing MP3 files from that album To exit music navigator mode press the pushbutton below the Back label to return to normal MP3 playback BAND Press this button to listen to the radio when a CD is playing The inactive CD remains
217. ge 5 17 Inflation Tire Pressure Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to operate effectively Notice Do not let anyone tell you that under inflation or over inflation is all right It is not If your tires do not have enough air under inflation you can get the following Too much flexing Too much heat Tire overloading Premature or irregular wear Poor handling Reduced fuel economy If your tires have too much air over inflation you can get the following Unusual wear Poor handling Rough ride Needless damage from road hazards A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information label is attached to your vehicle This label shows your vehicle s original equipment tires and the correct inflation pressures for your tires when they are cold The recommended cold tire inflation pressure shown on the label is the minimum amount of air pressure needed to support your vehicle s maximum load carrying capacity For additional information regarding how much weight your vehicle can carry and an example of the Tire and Loading Information label see Loading the Vehicle on page 5 17 How you load your vehicle affects vehicle handling and ride comfort Never load your vehicle with more weight than it was designed to carry When to Check Check your tires once a month or more Do not forget to check the pressure of the spare tire See Spare Tire on page 6 96 for additional information 6 6
218. ge 7 11 Front Axle When to Check and Change Lubricant Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how often to check the lubricant and when to change it See Scheduled Maintenance on page 7 3 How to Check Lubricant To get an accurate reading the vehicle should be on a level surface If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole you may need to add some lubricant When the differential is cold add enough lubricant to raise the level to 3 8 inch 10 mm below the filler plug hole When the differential is at operating temperature warm add enough lubricant to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole What to Use Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of lubricant to use See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 7 11 Noise Control System Tampering with Noise Control System Prohibited The following information relates to compliance with federal noise emission standards for vehicles with a Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR of more than 10 000 Ibs 4 536 kg The Maintenance Schedule provides information on maintaining the noise control system to minimize degradation of the noise emission control system during the life of your vehicle The noise control system warranty is given in your warranty booklet These standards apply only to vehicles sold in the United States Federal law prohibits the following acts or the causing thereof 1 The removal
219. ger Sensing System on page 2 72 This switch should only be turned to the off position if the person in the right front passenger position is a member of a passenger risk group identified by the national government as follows Infant An infant less than 1 year old must ride in the front seat because My vehicle has no rear seat My vehicle has a rear seat too small to accommodate a rear facing infant seat or The infant has a medical condition which according to the infant s physician makes it necessary for the infant to ride in the front seat so that the driver can constantly monitor the child s condition Child age 1 to 12 A child age 1 to 12 must ride in the front seat because My vehicle has no rear seat Although children ages 1 to 12 ride in the rear seat s whenever possible children ages 1 to 12 sometimes must ride in the front because no space is available in the rear seat s of my vehicle or The child has a medical condition which according to the child s physician makes it necessary for the child to ride in the front seat so that the driver can constantly monitor the child s condition 2 69 Medical Condition A passenger has a medical condition which according to his or her physician Causes the passenger airbag to pose a special risk for the passenger and Makes the potential harm from the passenger airbag in a crash greater than the potential harm from turning off the airbag and
220. has this feature it is available only with cruise control The manual fast idle switch is operated using the cruise control buttons located on the left hand side of the steering wheel This system can be used to increase engine idle speed whenever the following conditions are met The park brake is set The brake pedal is not pressed The vehicle must not be moving and the accelerator must not be pressed To control the fast idle To Enable the Fast idle press and release the Cruise Control On Off button and ensure that the LED is lit For the preset Fast Idle press and release the cruise set switch This will set the preset fast idle speed For the variable fast idle press and hold the accelerator at the desired RPM then press and release the cruise control cruise set switch to set the desired idle speed When the fast idle is active the Driver Information Center DIC will display FAST IDLE ON One of the following actions will turn off the fast idle Pressing the brake Selecting the Cancel button Releasing the Parking Brake The transmission shifter is moved out of P Park or N Neutral Selecting the cruise control on off button when it was previously on Engine Coolant Heater If the vehicle has the DURAMAX Diesel engine see the DURAMAX Diesel manual for more information The engine coolant heater can provide easier starting and better fuel economy during engine warm up in cold
221. he system detects a malfunction the low tire warning light flashes for about one minute and then stays on for the remainder of the ignition cycle A DIC warning message is also displayed The low tire warning light and DIC warning message come on at each ignition cycle until the problem is corrected Some of the conditions that can cause the malfunction light and DIC message to come on are One of the road tires has been replaced with the spare tire The spare tire does not have a TPMS sensor The TPMS malfunction light and DIC message should go off once you re install the road tire containing the TPMS sensor The TPMS sensor matching process was started but not completed or not completed successfully after rotating the vehicle s tires The DIC message and TPMS malfunction light should go off once the TPMS sensor matching process is performed successfully See TPMS Sensor Matching Process later in this section One or more TPMS sensors are missing or damaged The DIC message and the TPMS malfunction light should go off when the TPMS sensors are installed and the sensor matching process is performed successfully See your dealer retailer for service Replacement tires or wheels do not match your vehicle s original equipment tires or wheels Tires and wheels other than those recommended for your vehicle could prevent the TPMS from functioning properly See Buying New Tires on page 6 73 Operating electronic devices or be
222. he Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of transmission fluid to use See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 7 11 A WARM Range B HOT Range Using a funnel add fluid down the transmission dipstick tube only after checking the transmission fluid while it is warm or hot A cold check is used only as a reference If the fluid level is low add only enough of the proper fluid to bring the level up to the middle of the WARM A or HOT B range depending on the ambient temperature and prior driving conditions Refer to How 6 26 to Check Automatic Transmission Fluid earlier in this section for instructions on driving to achieve warm or hot transmission fluid It does not take much fluid generally less than 0 5 L one pint Do not overfill Notice Use of the incorrect automatic transmission fluid may damage the vehicle and the damages may not be covered by the vehicle s warranty Always use the automatic transmission fluid listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 7 11 After adding fluid recheck the fluid level as described under How to Check Automatic Transmission Fluid earlier in this section When the correct fluid level is obtained push the dipstick back in all the way then flip the handle down to lock the dipstick in place Cooling System If your vehicle has a diesel engine see Van Models under Cooling System in the DURAMAX Diesel Supplement The Cooling Syste
223. he compartment will open automatically Storage compartments may also be included on the inside of each front door Section 4 Instrument Panel Overview 4 3 Hazard Warning Flashers seesssss 4 3 gem t 4 3 THE T cS 4 3 Turn Signal Multifunction Lever 4 4 Turn and Lane Change Signals 4 4 Headlamp High Low Beam Changer 4 5 FlaslitosPass oos pre bote bre EIRES D 4 5 Windshield Wipers 0eceeeeeeeereeeeeeeeeees 4 5 Windshield Washer ccceeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 6 Cruise Control sessssss 4 6 Exterior lamps oreet e EE ROI PERE 4 9 Headlamps on Reminder sseessss 4 11 Daytime Running Lamps DRL 4 11 Automatic Headlamp System 4 11 Instrument Panel Brightness 4 12 DOME LAMPS entiers tents 4 12 Dome Lamp Override seeeeses 4 13 Entry Exit LAUNO 5 3 ei rettet mtt 4 13 Reading Lamps eee Beis 4 13 Instrument Panel Electric Power Management 4 13 Battery Run Down Protection 4 14 Accessory Power Outlet S sssssse 4 14 Ashtray s and Cigarette Lighter 4 15 Climate Controls ssseeenenee 4 15 Climate Control System
224. he doors amp Press to lock and unlock the doors See Power Door Locks on page 3 9 Windows Manual Windows Operate the manual windows by turning the hand crank on each door to raise or lower the side door windows See Manual Windows on page 3 17 Power Windows If the vehicle has power windows the controls are located on each of the side doors The driver door AUTO also has a control to operate the front passenger window Press or pull up on the switch to lower or raise the window See Power Windows on page 3 17 1 6 Seat Adjustment Manual Seats Lift the bar to unlock the seat Slide the seat to the desired position and release the bar Try to move the seat to be sure the seat is locked in place See Manual Seats on page 2 2 Power Seats Reclining Seatbacks If the vehicle has front power seat s the controls are located at the front center of the seat cushion Adjust the seat by moving the center knob up down right or left Raise and lower the front or rear of the seat cushion by moving the right or left lever up or down See Power Seat on page 2 3 To recline the seatback 1 Lift the recline lever on the inboard side of the seats 2 Move the seatback to the desired position then release the lever to lock the seatback in place 3 Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked See Reclining Seatbacks on page 2
225. he doors are not locked So all passengers should wear safety belts properly and the doors should be locked whenever the vehicle is driven Young children who get into unlocked vehicles may be unable to get out A child can be overcome by extreme heat and can suffer T 1 permanent injuries or even death from heat o open the driver side rear door pull the latch release stroke Always lock the vehicle whenever at the inside edge of the door leaving it To close the rear doors close the driver side rear door Outsiders can easily enter through an unlocked first Then close the passenger side rear door Check door when you slow down or stop your vehicle to make sure both doors are completely closed Locking your doors can help prevent this from happening 3 15 Windows A WARNING Leaving children helpless adults or pets in a vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous They can be overcome by the extreme heat and suffer permanent injuries or even death from heat stroke Never leave a child a helpless adult or a pet alone in a vehicle especially with the windows closed in warm or hot weather 3 16 Manual Windows Operate the manual windows by turning the hand crank on each door to raise or lower the side door windows Power Windows A WARNING Leaving children in a vehicle with the keys is dangerous for many reasons children or others could be badly injured or even killed They could operate the power win
226. he random icon disappears from the display 4 69 To use random on an Uplevel Radio with a Single CD player do the following 1 Press the CD AUX button insert a disc partway into the slot of the CD player A RDM label displays 2 To play the tracks in random order press the pushbutton positioned under the RDM label until Random Current Disc displays Press the pushbutton again to turn off random play To use random on a Radio with a Six Disc CD player do the following 1 Press the CD AUX button press and hold S7 A beep sounds and Load All Discs displays Insert one or more discs partway into the slot of the CD player 2 To play tracks from all CDs loaded in random order press the pushbutton positioned under the RDM label until Randomize All Discs displays Press the same pushbutton again to turn off random play RPT Repeat Base Radio with CD With the repeat setting one track can be repeated To repeat the track you are listening to press and release the RPT button An arrow symbol displays Press RPT again to turn off repeat play 4 70 1 Information Base Radio with CD Press to switch the display between the track number elapsed time of the track and the time When the ignition is off press to display the time BAND Press to listen to the radio when a CD is playing The CD remains inside the radio for future listening CD AUX CD Auxiliary Press to play a CD when listening to the radio The
227. he system on and off Turn to increase or decrease the volume BAND Press to choose between FM and AM 44 Select radio stations K BI Seek or scan stations 1 Press to display additional text information related to the current FM RDS station or MP3 song A choice of additional information such as Channel Song Artist and CAT category can display Continue pressing to highlight the desired label or press the softkey located under any one of the tabs and the information about that tab displays For more information about these and other radio features see Audio System s on page 4 59 Storing a Favorite Station Depending on which radio the vehicle has radio stations are stored as either favorites or presets For vehicles with a FAV button a maximum of 36 stations can be stored as favorites using the six softkeys located below the radio station frequency tabs and by using the radio FAV button Press FAV to go through up to six pages of favorites each having six favorite stations available per page Each page of favorites can contain any combination of AM and FM stations If the radio does not have a FAV button up to 18 stations six FM1 six FM2 and six AM can be programmed on the six numbered buttons See Radio s on page 4 62 1 14 Setting the Clock To set the time and date for the Radio with CD MP3 1 Press and the HR MIN MM DD YYYY hour minute month day and year displays 2 P
228. he vehicle Then slide the door toward the rear of the vehicle To open the front portion of a 60 40 door from the outside pull out on the handle and open the door To close the sliding side door from the inside grasp the handle and slide the door toward the front of the vehicle Make sure the door is completely closed before driving away 3 13 To open the front portion of a 60 40 door from the inside pull the handle toward you and push the door open To open the rear portion of a 60 40 door from the outside pull the handle on the side of the rear door and pull the door toward you To close the 60 40 side doors close the rear door first Then close the front door Check to make sure that both doors are completely closed The front side swing out door has a check strap assembly in the door frame to keep the door from opening beyond 90 degrees To open the door beyond 90 degrees close the door partially pull the check strap toward you and then open the door When the door is closed the check strap will automatically re engage Rear Doors To open the rear doors from the outside pull the handle toward you to open the passenger side rear door first Z WARNING Unlocked doors can be dangerous Passengers especially children can easily open the doors and fall out of a moving vehicle When a door is locked the handle will not open it The chance of being thrown out of the vehicle in a crash is increased if t
229. he vehicle only use it for changing a flat tire If a tire goes flat the next part shows how to use the jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely 6 79 Changing a Flat Tire If a tire goes flat avoid further tire and wheel damage by driving slowly to a level place Turn on the hazard warning flashers See Hazard Warning Flashers on page 4 3 ZN WARNING Changing a tire can be dangerous The vehicle can slip off the jack and roll over or fall on you or other people You and they could be badly injured or even killed Find a level place to change your tire To help prevent the vehicle from moving 1 Set the parking brake firmly 2 Put the shift lever in P Park WARNING Continued 6 80 WARNING Continued 3 Turn off the engine and do not restart while the vehicle is raised 4 Do not allow passengers to remain in the vehicle To be even more certain the vehicle will not move you should put blocks at the front and rear of the tire farthest away from the one being changed That would be the tire on the other side at the opposite end of the vehicle When the vehicle has a flat tire B use the following example as a guide to assist you in the placement of wheel blocks A A Wheel Block B Flat Tire The following information explains how to use the jack and change a tire Removing the Spare Tire and Tools If you have a cargo van or a passenger van the equipment you wil
230. heck engine light comes on and stays on while the engine is running this indicates that there is an OBD II problem and service is required 4 31 Malfunctions often are indicated by the system before any problem is apparent Being aware of the light can prevent more serious damage to the vehicle This system assists the service technician in correctly diagnosing any malfunction Notice f the vehicle is continually driven with this light on after a while the emission controls might not work as well the vehicle s fuel economy might not be as good and the engine might not run as smoothly This could lead to costly repairs that might not be covered by the vehicle warranty Notice Modifications made to the engine transmission exhaust intake or fuel system of the vehicle or the replacement of the original tires with other than those of the same Tire Performance Criteria TPC can affect the vehicle s emission controls and can cause this light to come on Modifications to these systems could lead to costly repairs not covered by the vehicle warranty This could also result in a failure to pass a required Emission Inspection Maintenance test See Accessories and Modifications on page 6 3 4 32 This light comes on during a malfunction in one of two ways Light Flashing A misfire condition has been detected A misfire increases vehicle emissions and could damage the emission control system on the vehicle Diagnosis and s
231. here is something that could result in property or vehicle damage This would not be covered by the vehicle s warranty A circle with a slash through it is a safety symbol which means Do Not Do not do this or Do not let this happen Vehicle Symbols The vehicle has components and labels that use symbols instead of text Symbols are shown along with the text describing the operation or information relating to a specific component control message gage or indicator CI This symbol is shown when you need to see your owner manual for additional instructions or information This symbol is shown when you need to see a service manual for additional instructions or information Vehicle Symbol Chart Here are some additional symbols that may be found on the vehicle and what they mean For more information on the symbol refer to the index Airbag Readiness Light N X Air Conditioning Antilock Brake System ABS t Audio Steering Wheel Controls or OnStar Brake System Warning Light E Charging System amp Cruise Control Y Oil Pressure Engine Coolant Temperature Power XX Exterior Lamps Q Remote Vehicle Start 0 Fog Lamps A Safety Belt Reminders p Fuel Gage 9 Tire Pressure Monitor I Fuses E Tow Haul Mode SB Headlamp High Low Beam Changer Traction Control LATCH System Child Restraints Windshield Washer Fluid C Malfunction Indicator L
232. hicle For vehicles first sold in Canada substitute the name General Motors of Canada Limited for GMC wherever it appears in this manual If the vehicle has the DURAMAX Diesel engine refer to the DURAMAX Diesel supplement for additional and specific information on this engine Keep this manual in the vehicle for quick reference Litho in U S A Part No 25830407 A First Printing Canadian Owners Propri taires Canadiens A French language copy of this manual can be obtained from your dealer retailer or from On peut obtenir un exemplaire de ce guide en frangais aupr s du concessionnaire ou l adresse suivante Helm Incorporated P O Box 07130 Detroit MI 48207 1 800 551 4123 Num ro de poste 6438 de langue fran aise www helminc com Index To quickly locate information about the vehicle use the index in the back of the manual It is an alphabetical list of what is in the manual and the page number where it can be found 92009 General Motors Corporation All Rights Reserved Safety Warnings and Symbols Warning Messages found on vehicle labels and in this manual describe hazards and what to do to avoid or reduce them Danger indicates a hazard with a high level of risk which will result in serious injury or death Warning or Caution indicates a hazard that could result in injury or death ZN WARNING These mean there is something that could hurt you or other people Notice This means t
233. hicle can carry This weight is called the vehicle capacity weight and includes the weight of all occupants cargo and all nonfactory installed options Two labels on your vehicle show how much weight it was designed to carry the Tire and Loading Information label and the Certification Tire label ZN WARNING Do not load the vehicle any heavier than the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR or either the maximum front or rear Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR If you do parts on the vehicle can break and it can change the way your vehicle handles These could cause you to lose control and crash Also overloading can shorten the life of the vehicle Tire and Loading Information Label M SE ON REAR The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed uak kg or v Ibs SEE OWNER S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x Label Example A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information label is attached to the center pillar B pillar With the driver door open you will find the label attached below the door lock post striker The tire and loading information label shows the number of occupant seating positions A and the maximum vehicle capacity weight B in kilograms and pounds 5 17 The Tire and Loading Information label also shows the size of the original equipment tires C and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures D For more informat
234. histicated computers that record information about the vehicle s performance and how it is driven For example your vehicle uses computer modules to monitor and control engine and transmission performance to monitor the conditions for airbag deployment and deploy airbags ina crash and if so equipped to provide antilock braking to help the driver control the vehicle These modules may store data to help your dealer retailer technician service your vehicle Some modules may also store data about how you operate the vehicle such as rate of fuel consumption or average speed These modules may also retain the owner s personal preferences such as radio pre sets seat positions and temperature settings Event Data Recorders This vehicle has an Event Data Recorder EDR The main purpose of an EDR is to record in certain crash or near crash like situations such as an airbag deployment or hitting a road obstacle data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle s systems performed The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time typically 30 seconds or less The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as How various systems in your vehicle were operating Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled fastened How far if at all the driver was pressing the accelerator and or brake pedal How fast the vehicle was traveling
235. icient protection against freezing of the washer system Also water does not clean as well as washer fluid Fill the washer fluid tank only three quarters full when it is very cold This allows for fluid expansion if freezing occurs which could damage the tank if it is completely full Adding Washer Fluid Open the cap with the washer symbol on it Add washer fluid until the tank is full See Engine Do not use engine coolant antifreeze in your Compartment Overview on windshield washer It can damage the vehicle s page 6 14 for reservoir windshield washer system and paint location 6 36 Brakes Brake Fluid The brake master cylinder reservoir is filled with DOT 3 brake fluid See Engine Compartment Overview on page 6 14 for the location of the reservoir DOT 3 Qi There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in the reservoir might go down The brake fluid level goes down because of normal brake lining wear When new linings are installed the fluid level goes back up Afluid leak in the brake hydraulic system can also cause a low fluid level Have the brake hydraulic System fixed since a leak means that sooner or later the brakes will not work well Do not top off the brake fluid Adding fluid does not correct a leak If fluid is added when the linings are worn there will be too much fluid when new brake linings are installed Add or remove brake fluid as necessary only when work i
236. id level check See Windshield Washer Fluid on page 6 36 Once a Month Tire inflation check See nflation Tire Pressure on page 6 63 Tire wear inspection See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 6 69 Once a Year Starter switch check See Owner Checks and Services on page 7 9 Parking brake and automatic transmission P Park mechanism check See Owner Checks and Services on page 7 9 Automatic transmission shiftlock control system check See Owner Checks and Services on page 7 9 Ignition transmission lock check See Owner Checks and Services on page 7 9 Engine cooling system and pressure cap pressure check Radiator and air conditioning condenser outside cleaning See Cooling System on page 6 26 Exhaust system and nearby heat shields inspection for loose or damaged components Throttle system inspection for interference binding or for damaged or missing parts Replace parts as needed Replace any components that have high effort or excessive wear Do not lubricate accelerator or cruise control cables First Engine Oil Change After Every 40 000 km 25 000 Miles Fuel system inspection for damage or leaks First Engine Oil Change After Every 80 000 km 50 000 Miles Engine air cleaner filter replacement See Engine Air Cleaner Filter on page 6 19 Automatic transmission fluid change severe service for vehicles mainly driven in heavy city traffic in hot weather in hilly or mountainous te
237. ide Assistance program at any time without notification GMC and General Motors of Canada Limited reserve the right to limit services or payment to an owner or driver if they decide the claims are made too often or the same type of claim is made many times Services Provided Emergency Fuel Delivery Delivery of enough fuel for the vehicle to get to the nearest service station Lock Out Service Service is provided to unlock the vehicle if you are locked out A remote unlock may be available if you have OnStar For security reasons the driver must present identification before this service is given Emergency Tow From a Public Road or Highway Tow to the nearest GMC dealer for warranty service or if the vehicle was in a crash and cannot be driven Assistance is also given when the vehicle is stuck in the sand mud or snow Flat Tire Change Service is provided to change a flat tire with the spare tire The spare tire if equipped must be in good condition and properly inflated Itis the owner s responsibility for the repair or replacement of the tire if it is not covered by the warranty Battery Jump Start Service is provided to jump start a dead battery Trip Routing Service Detailed maps of North America are provided when requested either with the most direct route or the most scenic route Additional travel information is also available Allow three weeks for delivery Trip Interruption Benefits and Assis
238. ied place the shift lever in P Park 3 With foot on the brake pedal move the shift lever through each gear range pausing for about three seconds in each range When M is reached move the selector from M1 through M3 Then position the shift lever in P Park 4 Let the engine run at idle for two minutes or more Then without shutting Off the engine The transmission dipstick is located near the center of the engine compartment and will be labeled with the graphic shown See Engine Compartment Overview on page 6 14 for more information on location 1 Flip the handle up and then pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel 2 Push it back in all the way wait three seconds and then pull it back out again A COLD Range B WARM Range C HOT Range Check both sides of the dipstick and read the lower level The fluid level must be in the COLD A range for a cold check transmission temperature 27 C to 32 C 80 F to 90 F between the COLD A and HOT C range for a WARM B check 50 C to 60 C 122 F to 140 F or in the HOT C cross hatched range for a hot check 71 C to 93 C 160 F to 200 F Be sure to keep the dipstick pointed down to get an accurate reading If the fluid level is in the acceptable range push the dipstick back in all the way then flip the handle down to lock the dipstick in place 6 25 How to Add Automatic Transmission Fluid Refer to t
239. igh altitude on steep uphill grades consider the following Engine coolant will boil at a lower temperature than at normal altitudes If the engine is turned off immediately after towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades the vehicle may show signs similar to engine overheating To avoid this let the engine run while parked preferably on level ground with the automatic transmission in P Park for a few minutes before turning the engine off If the overheat warning comes on see Engine Overheating on page 6 33 5 36 Parking on Hills Z WARNING Parking the vehicle on a hill with the trailer attached can be dangerous If something goes wrong the rig could start to move People can be injured and both the vehicle and the trailer can be damaged When possible always park the rig on a flat surface If parking the rig on a hill 1 Press the brake pedal but do not shift the transmission into P Park yet Turn the wheels into the curb if facing downhill or into traffic if facing uphill 2 Have someone place chocks under the trailer wheels 3 When the wheel chocks are in place release the brake pedal until the chocks absorb the load 4 Reapply the brake pedal Then apply the parking brake and shift into P Park 5 Release the brake pedal Leaving After Parking on a Hill 1 Apply and hold the brake pedal while you start the engine shift into a gear and release the parking brake 2 Let u
240. ild is in it 2 39 Securing the Child Within the Child Restraint Z WARNING A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crash if the child is not properly secured in the child restraint Secure the child properly following the instructions that came with that child restraint 2 40 Where to Put the Restraint According to accident statistics children and infants are safer when properly restrained in a child restraint system or infant restraint system secured in a rear seating position We recommend that children and child restraints be secured in a rear seat including an infant or a child riding in a rear facing child restraint a child riding in a forward facing child seat an older child riding in a booster seat and children who are large enough using safety belts If a child restraint is secured in the right front passenger seat there may be a switch on the instrument panel to manually turn off the right front passenger airbag See Airbag Off Switch on page 2 69 and Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position With Passenger Sensing System on page 2 52 or Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position With Airbag On Off Switch on page 2 56 for more information including important safety information A label on the sun visor says Never put a rear facing child seat in the front This is because the risk to the rear facing child is so great if the airbag deploys
241. ilter housing 4 Inspect or replace the engine air cleaner filter Make sure that the filter fits properly into the housing 6 20 5 Reinstall the cover and fasten the retaining clips Z WARNING Operating the engine with the air cleaner filter off can cause you or others to be burned The air cleaner not only cleans the air it helps to stop flames if the engine backfires If it is not there and the engine backfires you could be burned Do not drive with it off and be careful working on the engine with the air cleaner filter off Notice f the air cleaner filter is off a backfire can cause a damaging engine fire And dirt can easily get into the engine which will damage it Always have the air cleaner filter in place when you are driving Automatic Transmission Fluid 4 Speed Transmission If your vehicle has the DURAMAX Diesel engine see the DURAMAX Diesel manual for more information When to Check and Change Automatic Transmission Fluid A good time to check your automatic transmission fluid level is when the engine oil is changed Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed in Scheduled Maintenance on page 7 3 and be sure to use the transmission fluid listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 7 11 How to Check Automatic Transmission Fluid Because this operation can be a little difficult you may choose to have this done at the dealer retailer service department If you do it
242. ime the system senses that a person of adult size is sitting properly in the right front passenger seat When the passenger sensing system has allowed the airbag to be enabled the on indicator will light and stay lit to remind you that the airbag is active For some children including those in child restraints and for very small adults the passenger sensing system may or may not turn off the right front passenger frontal airbag depending upon the person s seating posture and body build Everyone in your vehicle who has outgrown child restraints should wear a safety belt properly whether or not there is an airbag for that person 2 74 A WARNING If the airbag readiness light in the instrument panel cluster ever comes on and stays on it means that something may be wrong with the airbag system If this ever happens have the vehicle serviced promptly because an adult size person sitting in the right front passenger s seat may not have the protection of the airbag s See Airbag Readiness Light on page 4 23 for more on this including important safety information If the On Indicator is Lit for a Child Restraint If a child restraint has been installed and the on indicator is lit il 2 3 Turn the vehicle off Remove the child restraint from the vehicle Remove any additional items from the seat such as blankets cushions seat covers seat heaters or seat massagers Reinstall the child restraint foll
243. in P Park Prevent movement of the shift lever out of P Park unless the ignition is in ON RUN and the regular brake pedal is applied The shift lock control system is always functional except in the case of a dead battery or low voltage less than 9 V battery If the vehicle has an uncharged battery or a battery with low voltage try charging or jump starting the battery See Jump Starting on page 6 41 for more information To shift out of P Park use the following 1 Apply the brake pedal 2 Move the shift lever to the desired position If you still are unable to shift out of P Park 1 Ease the pressure on the shift lever 2 While holding down the brake pedal push the shift lever all the way into P Park 3 Move the shift lever to the desired position If you are still having a problem shifting then have the vehicle serviced 3 37 Parking Over Things That Burn A WARNING Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust parts under the vehicle and ignite Do not park over papers leaves dry grass or other things that can burn Engine Exhaust ZN WARNING Engine exhaust contains Carbon Monoxide CO which cannot be seen or smelled Exposure to CO can cause unconsciousness and even death WARNING Continued 3 38 WARNING Continued Exhaust may enter the vehicle if The vehicle idles in areas with poor ventilation parking garages tunnels deep snow that may block underbo
244. in the wrong buckle A WARNING You can be seriously injured if your belt is buckled in the wrong place like this In a crash the belt would go up over your abdomen The belt forces would be there not on the pelvic bones This could cause serious internal injuries Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you Q What is wrong with this The belt is over an armrest 2 20 A WARNING You can be seriously injured if your belt goes over an armrest like this The belt would be much too high In a crash you can slide under the belt The belt force would then be applied on the abdomen not on the pelvic bones and that could cause serious or fatal injuries Be sure the belt goes under the armrests Q What is wrong with this A WARNING You can be seriously injured if you wear the shoulder belt under your arm In a crash your body would move too far forward which would increase the chance of head and neck injury Also the belt would apply too much force to the ribs which are not as strong as shoulder bones You could also severely injure internal organs like your liver or spleen The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest A The shoulder belt is worn under the arm It should be worn over the shoulder at all times 2 21 Q What is wrong with this A WARNING You can be seriousl
245. information about carbon monoxide see Engine Exhaust on page 3 38 Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience Get to know the rig before setting out for the open road Get acquainted with the feel of handling and braking with the added weight of the trailer And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are driving is now longer and not as responsive as the vehicle is by itself Before starting check all trailer hitch parts and attachments safety chains electrical connectors lamps tires and mirror adjustments If the trailer has electric brakes start the vehicle and trailer moving and then apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure the brakes are working This checks the electrical connection at the same time During the trip check occasionally to be sure that the load is secure and that the lamps and any trailer brakes are still working Following Distance Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as you would when driving the vehicle without a trailer This can help to avoid situations that require heavy braking and sudden turns Passing More passing distance is needed when towing a trailer Because the rig is longer it is necessary to go much farther beyond the passed vehicle before returning to the lane Backing Up Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand Then to move the trailer to the left move that hand to the left To move the trailer to the right move you
246. ing Lamps 7 Turn the bulb socket clockwise to reinstall it in the lamp assembly To replace the front turn signal sidemarker and or parking lamp bulb s Center High Mounted Stoplamp CHMSL The Center High Mounted Stoplamp CHMSL is located above the rear doors at the center of the vehicle To replace a bulb 1 Use a small tool to unlatch the outboard clip on the lamp 2 Pull the lamp forward to completely unlatch the clip Move the lamp to the outboard side to loosen the tabs 3 Remove the lamp from the grille Squeeze the tab on the side of the bulb socket while turning it counterclockwise Remove the bulb socket from the back of the lamp assembly 1 Remove the two screws from the CHMSL assembly 2 Remove the CHMSL assembly 3 Turn the bulb counterclockwise one quarter turn to remove it from the socket 6 51 4 Turn the bulb clockwise one quarter turn to install it in the socket 5 Reinstall the CHMSL assembly and two screws Do not block or damage the CHMSL when items are loaded on the roof of the vehicle Taillamps To replace one of these bulbs 1 Remove the two inboard nuts from the inside of the taillamp assembly 2 Pull the taillamp assembly straight back to clear the studs 3 Slide the taillamp assembly slightly upward to release
247. ing near facilities using radio wave frequencies similar to the TPMS could cause the TPMS sensors to malfunction If the TPMS is not functioning it cannot detect or signal a low tire condition See your dealer retailer for service if the TPMS malfunction light and DIC message comes on and stays on 6 67 TPMS Sensor Matching Process Each TPMS sensor has a unique identification code Any time you rotate your vehicle s tires or replace one or more of the TPMS sensors the identification codes will need to be matched to the new tire wheel position The sensors are matched to the tire wheel positions in the following order driver side front tire passenger side front tire passenger side rear tire and driver side rear tire using a TPMS diagnostic tool See your dealer retailer for service The TPMS sensors can also be matched to each tire wheel position by increasing or decreasing the tire s air pressure If increasing the tire s air pressure do not exceed the maximum inflation pressure indicated on the tire s sidewall To decrease air pressure out of a tire you can use the pointed end of the valve cap a pencil style air pressure gage or a key You have two minutes to match the first tire wheel position and five minutes overall to match all four tire wheel positions If it takes longer than two minutes to match the first tire and wheel or more than five minutes to match all four tire and wheel positions the mat
248. ing on hilly winding roads when towing a trailer so there is less shifting between gears and when going down a steep hill You should use 3 Third or a lower gear as needed when towing a trailer to minimize heat build up and extend the life of the transmission 2 Second This position reduces vehicle speed even more than 3 Third without using the brakes You can use 2 Second on hills It can help control vehicle speed as you go down steep mountain roads but then you would also want to use the brakes off and on You may use this feature for reducing torque to the rear wheels when you are trying to start the vehicle from a stop on slippery road surfaces 1 First This position reduces vehicle speed even more than 2 Second without using the brakes You can use it on very steep hills or in deep snow or mud If the shift lever is put in 1 First while the vehicle is moving forward the transmission will not shift into first gear until the vehicle is going slowly enough Notice Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle in one place on a hill using only the accelerator pedal may damage the transmission The repair will not be covered by the vehicle warranty If you are stuck do not spin the tires When stopping on a hill use the brakes to hold the vehicle in place Tow Haul Mode Vehicles with an automatic transmission have a tow haul mode The tow haul mode adjusts the transmission shift pattern to reduce shift cycli
249. inish Damage cere Re eret times 6 102 Fixed Mast Antenna eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 4 78 Flashers Hazard Warning eceeeeeeeeeee ees 4 3 Fl sh to Ras S eec eoe peret eder ernst 4 5 ELI UD rm 6 79 Flat Tire Changing eee 6 80 Flat Tire Storing sees 6 94 Fluid Automatic Transmission 6 20 6 23 Power Steering sssessnee 6 35 Windshield Washer sseeeees 6 36 Ern AXIE e Es 6 46 gi M M 6 5 Poenus X EE 6 7 California Fuel caccia een 6 7 E85 8596 Ethanol 2 ree een 6 8 Filling a Portable Fuel Container 6 12 Filling the Tank eet e 6 10 Fuels in Foreign Countries ssss 6 9 CL C 4 36 Gasoline Octane eene 6 6 Gasoline Specifications esses 6 6 Fuel Economy Driving for Better ttt ttr Geeks 1 18 Fuses Engine Compartment Fuse Block 6 106 Floor Console Fuse Block 6 104 Fuses and Circuit Breakers 6 104 Windshield Wiper eee 6 104 G Gages Engine Coolant Temperature 4 30 Aj m 4 36 Oil Pr ss re nei erst Lin x eee 4 34 Speedometer sssesseeseseeeen 4 22 Trip Odometer cei rine rtm ht tenentem 4 22 Voltmeter Gage seeem 4 27 Gasoline ocn qe
250. inside the radio for future listening 4 76 CD AUX CD Auxiliary Press this button to play a CD when listening to the radio The CD icon and a message showing disc and or track number displays when a CD is in the player Press this button again and the system automatically searches for an auxiliary input device such as a portable audio player If a portable audio player is not connected No Input Device Found displays Theft Deterrent Feature Non RDS Radios THEFTLOCK is designed to discourage theft of your vehicle s radio The feature works automatically by learning a portion of the Vehicle Identification Number VIN If the radio is moved to a different vehicle it does not operate and LOC displays With THEFTLOCK activated the radio does not operate if stolen RDS Radios THEFTLOCK is designed to discourage theft of your vehicle s radio The feature works automatically by learning a portion of the Vehicle Identification Number VIN If the radio is moved to a different vehicle it does not operate and LOCKED displays When the radio and vehicle are turned off the blinking red light indicates that THEFTLOCK is armed With THEFTLOCK activated the radio does not operate if stolen Audio Steering Wheel Controls Vehicles with audio steering wheel controls could differ depending on your vehicle s options Some audio controls can be adjusted at the steering wheel They include the following
251. instructions 2 Drive the rear wheels onto the dolly 3 Firmly set the parking brake See Parking Brake on page 3 35 for more information 4 Put the transmission in P Park 5 Secure the vehicle to the dolly following the manufacturer s instructions 6 Use an adequate clamping device designed for towing to ensure that the front wheels are locked into the straight position 7 Turn the ignition to LOCK OFF If the tow vehicle will not be started or driven for six weeks or more remove the battery cable from the negative terminal post of the battery to prevent the battery from draining while towing The vehicle was not designed to be towed with two wheels on the ground To properly tow these vehicles they should be placed on a platform trailer with all four wheels off the ground Notice Towing an all wheel drive vehicle with all four wheels on the ground or even with only two of its wheels on the ground will damage drivetrain components Do not tow an all wheel drive vehicle with any of its wheels on the ground 5 25 Towing a Trailer If the vehicle has a diesel engine see the DURAMAX Diesel manual for more information Z WARNING The driver can lose control when pulling a trailer if the correct equipment is not used or the vehicle is not driven properly For example if the trailer is too heavy the brakes may not work well or even at all The driver and passengers could be serious
252. int designed to improve the fit of the vehicle s safety belt system A booster seat can also help a child to see out the window 2 38 Securing an Add On Child Restraint in the Vehicle Z WARNING A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crash if the child restraint is not properly secured in the vehicle Secure the child restraint properly in the vehicle using the vehicle s safety belt or LATCH system following the instructions that came with that child restraint and the instructions in this manual To help reduce the chance of injury the child restraint must be secured in the vehicle Child restraint systems must be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap shoulder belt or by the LATCH system See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children LATCH on page 2 42 for more information A child can be endangered in a crash if the child restraint is not properly secured in the vehicle When securing an add on child restraint refer to the instructions that come with the restraint which may be on the restraint itself or in a booklet or both and to this manual The child restraint instructions are important so if they are not available obtain a replacement copy from the manufacturer Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people in the vehicle Be sure to properly secure any child restraint in the vehicle even when no ch
253. io on 2 Press BAND to select FM1 FM2 or AM 3 Tune in the desired station 4 Press and hold one of the six numbered pushbuttons for three seconds until a beep sounds When that pushbutton is pressed and released the station that was set returns 5 Repeat the Steps 2 through 4 for each pushbutton Storing a Radio Station as a Favorite Drivers are encouraged to set up their radio station favorites while the vehicle is parked Tune to favorite stations using the presets favorites button and steering wheel controls if the vehicle has this feature See Defensive Driving on page 5 2 FAV Favorites If the vehicle has a FAV button a maximum of 36 stations can be programmed as favorites using the six pushbuttons positioned below the radio station frequency labels and by using the radio favorites page button FAV button Press the FAV button to go through up to six pages of favorites each having six favorite stations available per page Each page of favorites can contain any combination of AM and FM stations The balance fade and tone settings that were previously adjusted are stored with the favorite stations To store a station as a favorite 1 Tune to the desired radio station 2 Press the FAV button to display the page where the station is to be stored 3 Press and hold one of the six pushbuttons until a beep sounds When that pushbutton is pressed and released the station that was set returns 4 Repea
254. ion If they do you could get a shock The vehicles could be damaged too Before you connect the cables here are some basic things you should know Positive will go to positive or to a remote positive terminal if the vehicle has one Negative will go to a heavy unpainted metal engine part or to a remote negative terminal if the vehicle has one Do not connect positive to negative or you will get a short that would damage the battery and maybe other parts too And do not connect the negative cable to the negative terminal on the dead battery because this can cause sparks Connect the red positive cable to the positive terminal of the dead battery Use a remote positive terminal if the vehicle has one Do not let the other end touch metal Connect it to the positive terminal of the good battery Use a remote positive terminal if the vehicle has one 6 43 8 Now connect the black negative cable to the negative terminal of the good battery Use a remote negative terminal if the vehicle has one Do not let the other end touch anything until the next step The other end of the negative cable does not go to the dead battery It goes to a heavy unpainted metal engine part or to a remote negative terminal on the vehicle with the dead battery 9 Connect the other end of the negative cable to the negative terminal locati
255. ion on tires and inflation see Tires on page 6 55 and Inflation Tire Pressure on page 6 63 There is also important loading information on the vehicle Certification Tire label It tells you the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR and the Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR for the front and rear axle See Certification Tire Label later in this section Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit 1 Locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs on your vehicle s placard 2 Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle 3 Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX Ibs 4 The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity For example if the XXX amount equals 1400 Ibs and there will be five 150 Ib passengers in your vehicle the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 Ibs 1400 750 5 x 150 650 Ibs Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer the load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle See Towing
256. irbag system an airbag Driver Information Center DIC message can also come on See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 4 44 for more information 4 24 Airbag Off Light When the right front passenger airbag is manually turned off using the airbag on off switch on the instrument panel if equipped the indicator light OFF or the off symbol will come on and stay on as a reminder that the airbag has been turned off This light will go off when the airbag has been turned on See Airbag Off Switch on page 2 69 for more information including important safety information United States Canada A WARNING If the right front passenger s airbag is turned off for a person who is not in a risk group identified by the national government that person will not have the extra protection of an airbag In a crash the airbag will not be able to inflate and help protect the person sitting there Do not turn off the passenger s airbag unless the person sitting there is in a risk group identified by the national government See Airbag Off Switch on page 2 69 for more on this including important safety information A WARNING If the airbag readiness light ever comes on and stays on it means that something may be wrong with the airbag system For example the right front passenger airbag could inflate even though the airbag on off switch is turned off To help avoid injury to yourself or others have the vehicle serviced right
257. ire Pressure on page 6 63 for more information TRACTION CONTROL OFF If your vehicle has StabiliTrak this message displays when the Traction Control System TCS is turned off Adjust your driving accordingly See StabiliTrak System on page 5 5 for more information 4 51 TRANSMISSION HOT IDLE ENGINE Notice f you drive your vehicle while the transmission fluid is overheating and the transmission temperature warning is displayed on the instrument panel cluster and or DIC you can damage the transmission This could lead to costly repairs that would not be covered by your warranty Do not drive your vehicle with overheated transmission fluid or while the transmission temperature warning is displayed This message displays along with a chime if the transmission fluid in the vehicle gets hot Driving with the transmission fluid temperature high can cause damage to the vehicle Stop the vehicle and let it idle to allow the transmission to cool This message clears and the chime stops when the fluid temperature reaches a safe level TURN SIGNAL ON This message displays and a chime sounds if a turn signal is left on for 1 2 km 3 4 of a mile Move the turn signal multifunction lever to the off position 4 52 WAIT TO START This message displays briefly when the theft deterrent system has initially found incorrect conditions within the vehicle and is making a double check If your vehicle does not start soon after try to
258. isputes involving factory related vehicle service claims The program provides for the review of the facts involved by an impartial third party arbiter and may include an informal hearing before the arbiter The program is designed so that the entire dispute settlement process from the time you file your complaint to the final decision should be completed in approximately 70 days We believe our impartial program offers advantages over courts in most jurisdictions because it is informal quick and free of charge For further information concerning eligibility in the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan CAMVAP call toll free 1 800 207 0685 or call the General Motors Customer Communication Centre 1 800 263 3777 English 1 800 263 7854 French or write to Mediation Arbitration Program c o Customer Communication Centre General Motors of Canada Limited Mail Code CA1 163 005 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa Ontario L1H 8P7 Telephone 1 800 955 5100 Your inquiry should be accompanied by the Vehicle Identification Number VIN Online Owner Center Online Owner Center U S www gmownercenter com gmc Information and services customized for your specific vehicle all in one convenient place Digital owner manual warranty information and more Online service and maintenance records Find GMC dealers for service nationwide Exclusive privileges and offers Recall notices for your specific vehicle
259. it snugly below the hips just touching the top of the thighs This applies belt force to the child s pelvic bones in a crash It should never be worn over the abdomen which could cause severe or even fatal internal injuries in a crash Also see Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides under Lap Shoulder Belt on page 2 24 According to accident statistics children and infants are safer when properly restrained in a child restraint system or infant restraint system secured in a rear seating position In a crash children who are not buckled up can strike other people who are buckled up or can be thrown out of the vehicle Older children need to use safety belts properly A WARNING Never do this Never allow two children to wear the same safety belt The safety belt can not properly spread the impact forces In a crash the two children can be crushed together and seriously injured A safety belt must be used by only one person at a time 2 31 A WARNING Never do this Never allow a child to wear the safety belt with the shoulder belt behind their back A child can be seriously injured by not wearing the lap shoulder belt properly In a crash the child would not be restrained by the shoulder belt The child could move too far forward increasing the chance of head and neck injury The child might also slide under the lap belt The belt force would then be applied right on the abdomen That could cause serious or fa
260. ith another Age physical condition alertness coordination and eyesight all play a part So do alcohol drugs and frustration But even in three fourths of a second a vehicle moving at 100 km h 60 mph travels 20 m 66 feet That could be a lot of distance in an emergency so keeping enough space between the vehicle and others is important And of course actual stopping distances vary greatly with the surface of the road whether it is pavement or gravel the condition of the road whether it is wet dry or icy tire tread the condition of the brakes the weight of the vehicle and the amount of brake force applied Avoid needless heavy braking Some people drive in spurts heavy acceleration followed by heavy braking rather than keeping pace with traffic This is a mistake The brakes might not have time to cool between hard stops The brakes will wear out much faster with a lot of heavy braking Keeping pace with the traffic and allowing realistic following distances eliminates a lot of unnecessary braking That means better braking and longer brake life If the engine ever stops while the vehicle is being driven brake normally but do not pump the brakes If the brakes are pumped the pedal could get harder to push down If the engine stops there will still be some power brake assist but it will be used when the brake is applied Once the power assist is used up it can take longer to stop and the brake pedal wil
261. ithin an MP3 file Sound is heard at a reduced volume Release this button to resume playing the file The elapsed time of the file displays PP FWD Fast Forward Press and hold this button to advance playback quickly within an MP3 file Sound is heard at a reduced volume Release this button to resume playing the file The elapsed time of the file displays RDM Random With the random setting MP3 files on the CD R or CD RW can be listened to in random rather than sequential order on one CD R CD RW or all discs in a six disc CD player To use random do one of the following 1 To play MP3 files from the CD R or CD RW you are listening to in random order press the pushbutton positioned under the RDM label until Random Current Disc displays Press the same pushbutton again to turn off random play 2 To play songs from all CDs loaded in a six disc CD player in random order press the pushbutton positioned under the RDM label until Randomize All Discs displays Press the same pushbutton again to turn off random play Music Navigator Use the music navigator feature to play MP3 files on the CD R or CD RW in order by artist or album Press the pushbutton located below the music navigator label The player scans the disc to sort the files by artist and album ID3 tag information It could take several minutes to scan the disc depending on the number of MP3 files recorded to the CD R or CD RW The radio can begin playin
262. ition Front Position Rear Position Rear Alternative Position Diesel Vehicles 4 Position the jack under the vehicle as shown The front position jacking point is on the frame The rear position jacking point is on the rear axle If the exhaust system interferes in the jack location in the rear axle such as in Diesel vehicles place the jack A on the rear axle between the axle housing and the shock absorber bracket in order to avoid any interference with the exhaust pipe B 6 87 6 Remove all the wheel nuts A WARNING Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is dangerous If the vehicle slips off the jack you could be badly injured or killed Never get under a vehicle when it is supported only by a jack ZN WARNING Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly 7 Take flat tire off of the mounting surface positioned can damage the vehicle and even make the vehicle fall To help avoid personal injury and vehicle damage be sure to fit the jack lift head into the proper location before raising the vehicle 5 Raise the vehicle by turning the wheel wrench clockwise Raise the vehicle far enough off the ground so there is enough room for the spare tire to fit 6 88 A WARNING A WARNING Rust or dirt on a wheel or on the parts to which it Never use oil or grease on bolts or nuts because is fastened can make wheel nuts become loose the nuts might come loose The vehicle s wheel a
263. ive harm Engine exhaust many parts and systems many fluids and some component wear by products contain and or emit these chemicals California Perchlorate Materials Requirements Certain types of automotive applications such as airbag initiators seat belt pretensioners and lithium batteries contained in remote keyless transmitters may contain perchlorate materials Special handling may be necessary For additional information see www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate Doing Your Own Service Work A WARNING You can be injured and the vehicle could be damaged if you try to do service work on a vehicle without knowing enough about it Be sure you have sufficient knowledge experience the proper replacement parts and tools before attempting any vehicle maintenance task Be sure to use the proper nuts bolts and other fasteners English and metric fasteners can be easily confused If the wrong fasteners are used parts can later break or fall off You could be hurt If doing some of your own service work use the proper service manual It tells you much more about how to service the vehicle than this manual can To order the proper service manual see Service Publications Ordering Information on page 8 15 This vehicle has an airbag system Before attempting to do your own service work see Servicing Your Airbag Equipped Vehicle on page 2 77 Keep a record with all parts receipts and list the mileage and
264. ive and made for a basecoat clearcoat paint finish Notice Machine compounding or aggressive polishing on a basecoat clearcoat paint finish may damage it Use only non abrasive waxes and polishes that are made for a basecoat clearcoat paint finish on the vehicle 6 100 Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other salts ice melting agents road oil and tar tree sap bird droppings chemicals from industrial chimneys etc can damage the vehicle s finish if they remain on painted surfaces Wash the vehicle as soon as possible If necessary use non abrasive cleaners that are marked safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging weather and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a period of years To help keep the paint finish looking new keep the vehicle garaged or covered whenever possible Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts Bright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to keep their luster Washing with water is all that is usually needed However chrome polish may be used on chrome or stainless steel trim if necessary Use special care with aluminum trim To avoid damaging protective trim never use auto or chrome polish steam or caustic soap to clean aluminum A coating of wax rubbed to high polish is recommended for all bright metal parts Windshield and Wiper Blades Clean the outside of the windshield with glass cleaner Clean the rub
265. jack under the vehicle ahead of the rear wheel wrench to the jack bumper Position the center lift point of the jack under the center of the spare tire and turn the handle clockwise to raise the jack until it lifts the secondary latch spring 5 Keep raising the jack until the spare tire stops moving upward and is held firmly in place This lets you know that the secondary latch has released The spare tire is now balancing on the jack 6 93 6 Lower the jack by turning the wheel wrench counterclockwise Keep lowering the jack until the spare tire slides off the jack or is hanging by the cable 7 Disconnect the jack handle from the jack and carefully remove the jack Use one hand to push against the spare while firmly pulling the jack out from under the spare tire with the other hand If the spare tire is hanging from the cable assembly the wheel wrench onto the hoist extension and insert the chisel end of the hoist extension into the hoist shaft hole above the bumper Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to lower the spare the rest of the way 8 Tilt the retainer at the end of the cable and pull it through the wheel opening Pull the tire out from under the vehicle Notice f you drive away before the spare tire or secondary latch system cable has been reinstalled you could damage your vehicle Always reinstall this cable before driving your vehicle 9 If the cable is hanging under the vehicle turn the wheel wrench
266. k display stops flashing to set the currently displayed time otherwise the flashing stops after five seconds and the current time displayed is automatically set 4 60 MP3 Radio with a Single CD Player If your vehicle has a radio with a single CD MP3 player the radio has a button for setting the time and date To set the time and date follow the instructions 1 Press the button and the HR MIN MM DD YYYY hour minute month day and year displays 2 Press the pushbutton located under any one of the labels that you want to change Every time the pushbutton is pressed again the time or the date if selected increases by one Another way to increase the time or date is to press the right Dl SEEK arrow or the PP FWD forward button 3 To decrease press the left Ki SEEK arrow or the lt REV button You can also turn the J knob located on the upper right side of the radio to adjust the selected setting Changing the Time and Date Default Settings You can change the time default setting from 12 hours to 24 hours or change the date default setting from month day year to day month year To change the time or date default settings follow these instructions 1 Press and then the pushbutton located under the forward arrow that is currently displayed on the radio screen until the time 12H hour and 24H hour and the date MM DD month and day and DD MM day and month are displayed 2 Pres
267. ke any messages that appear on the display seriously and remember that clearing the messages will only make the messages disappear not correct the problem The following are the possible messages that can be displayed and some information about them If your vehicle has the DURAMAX Diesel engine see the DURAMAX Diesel manual for more information AUTOMATIC LIGHT CONTROL OFF This message displays when the automatic headlamps are turned off See Exterior Lamps on page 4 9 for more information AUTOMATIC LIGHT CONTROL ON This message displays when the automatic headlamps are turned on See Exterior Lamps on page 4 9 for more information CALIBRATING DRIVE IN CIRCLES This message displays when calibrating the compass Drive the vehicle in circles at less than 8 km h 5 mph to complete the calibration See DIC Compass on page 4 43 for more information CALIBRATION COMPLETE This message displays when the compass calibration is complete See DIC Compass on page 4 43 for more information CARGO DOOR OPEN This message displays and a chime sounds if the cargo door is open while the ignition is in ON RUN Turn off the vehicle and check the cargo door Restart the vehicle and check for the message on the DIC display CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON This message displays when the engine oil needs to be changed When you change the engine oil be sure to reset the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message See Engine Oil Life System on pag
268. l be harder to push Adding non dealer non retailer accessories can affect vehicle performance See Accessories and Modifications on page 6 3 Antilock Brake System ABS This vehicle has the Antilock Brake System ABS an advanced electronic braking system that helps prevent a braking skid When the engine is started and the vehicle begins to drive away ABS checks itself A momentary motor or clicking noise might be heard while this test is going on This is normal If there is a problem with the ABS this warning light stays on See Antilock Brake System ABS Warning Light on page 4 29 Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely Suddenly an animal jumps out in front of you You slam on the brakes and continue braking Here is what happens with ABS A computer senses that the wheels are slowing down If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling the computer will separately work the brakes at each front wheel and at both rear wheels ABS can change the brake pressure to each wheel as required faster than any driver could This can help the driver steer around the obstacle while braking hard As the brakes are applied the computer keeps receiving updates on wheel speed and controls braking pressure accordingly Remember ABS does not change the time needed to get a foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease stopping distance If you get too close to the vehicle in front of you there will not
269. l free number for assistance However if a customer wishes to write or e mail GMC the letter should be addressed to United States GMC Customer Assistance Center P O Box 33172 Detroit MI 48232 5172 www GMC com 1 800 GMC 8782 462 8782 1 800 GMC 8583 462 8583 For Text Telephone devices TTYs Roadside Assistance 1 800 GMC 8782 462 8782 From Puerto Rico 1 800 496 9992 English 1 800 496 9993 Spanish U S Virgin Islands 1 800 496 9994 Canada General Motors of Canada Limited Customer Communication Centre CA1 163 005 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa Ontario L1H 8P7 www gmcanada com 1 800 263 3777 English 1 800 263 7854 French 1 800 263 3830 For Text Telephone devices TTYs Roadside Assistance 1 800 268 6800 All Overseas Locations Please contact the local General Motors Business Unit Mexico Central America and Caribbean Islands Countries Except Puerto Rico and U S Virgin Islands General Motors de Mexico S de R L de C V Customer Assistance Center Paseo de la Reforma 2740 Col Lomas de Bezares C P 11910 Mexico D F 01 800 508 0000 Long Distance 011 52 53 29 0 800 GM Mobility Reimbursement Program EJMOBILITY This program available to qualified applicants can reimburse you up to 1 000 of the cost of eligible aftermarket adaptive equipment required for your vehicle such as hand controls or a wheelchair Scooter lift 8 6 The offer is available for a ver
270. l need is located in the passenger side rear corner of the vehicle Remove the retaining wing bolt and lift it off of the mounting bracket If you have a van with the 15 passenger seating arrangement the equipment you will need is secured on the rear floor of the passenger side of the vehicle 6 81 To access the equipment remove the retaining wing bolt and lift it out of the mounting bracket 6 82 The tools you will be using include the jack A jack handle B hoist extension C jack handle extension D and the wheel wrench E The spare tire is mounted in the rear underbody of the vehicle You will use the hoist extension the jack handle extensions and the wheel wrench to remove the underbody mounted spare tire To lower the spare tire from the vehicle A Spare Tire B Tire Wheel Retainer C Hoist Cable D Hoist Assembly E Hoist Shaft F Jack Handle and Hoist Extensions G Wheel Wrench Assemble the wheel wrench G to one or two of the jack handle extensions and the hoist extension Insert the hoist extension end through the hole in the rear bumper Be sure the hoist extension end connects to the hoist shaft E The chiseled end of the extension is used to lower the spare tire 6 83 3 Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to lower the spare tire to the ground Continue to turn the wheel wrench until the spare tire can be p
271. l the required trailering equipment The weight of additional optional equipment passengers and cargo in the tow vehicle must be subtracted from the maximum trailer weight 5 27 Use the following chart to determine how much the vehicle can weigh based upon the vehicle model and options Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR G1500 Cargo Van 2WD 4 3L V6 4 400 lbs 1 996 kg 9 500 Ibs 4 309 kg 5 3L V8 25 6 700 Ibs 3 039 kg 12 000 Ibs 5 443 kg H1500 Cargo Van AWD 5 3L V8 3 42 6 500 Ibs 2 948 kg 12 000 Ibs 5 443 kg G1500 Passenger Van 2WD 5 3L V8 3 73 6 200 Ibs 2 812 kg 12 000 Ibs 5 443 kg H1500 Passenger Van AWD 5 3L V8 6 000 Ibs 2 722 kg 12 000 Ibs 5 443 kg G2500 Cargo Van 2WD Short Wheelbase 4 8L V8 3 73 6 400 Ibs 2 903 kg 12 000 Ibs 5 443 kg 4 10 7 400 Ibs 3 357 kg 13 000 Ibs 5 897 kg 6 0L V8 3 73 8 400 Ibs 3 810 kg 14 000 Ibs 6 350 kg 4 10 10 000 Ibs 4 536 kg 16 000 Ibs 7 257 kg G2500 Cargo Van 2WD Long Wheelbase 4 8L V8 3 73 6 200 Ibs 2 812 kg 12 000 Ibs 5 443 kg 4 10 7 200 Ibs 3 266 kg 13 000 Ibs 5 897 kg 6 0L V8 3 73 8 200 Ibs 3 719 kg 14 000 Ibs 6 350 kg i 4 10 10 000 Ibs 4 536 kg 16 000 Ibs 7 257 kg G2500 Passenger Van 2WD Short Wheelbase 6 0L V8 7 600 Ibs 3 447 kg 14 000 Ibs 6 350 kg 6 0L V8 9 600 Ibs 4 355 kg 16 000 Ibs 7 257 kg 5 28 Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR G3500 Cargo Van 2WD Short Wheelbase 4 8L V8 3 73 6 400 Ibs 2 903
272. le fuel container while it is in the vehicle Static electricity discharge from the container can ignite the fuel vapor You can be badly burned and the vehicle damaged if this occurs To help avoid injury to you and others Dispense fuel only into approved containers These include liquids like fuel oil coolant brake fluid windshield washer and other fluids and plastic or rubber You or others could be burned Be careful not to drop or spill things that will burn onto a hot engine or fuel operated heater FOH Do not fill a container while it is inside a vehicle in a vehicle s trunk pickup bed or on any surface other than the ground Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the inside of the fill opening before operating the nozzle Contact should be maintained until the filling is complete Do not smoke while pumping fuel Do not use a cellular phone while pumping fuel Hood Release To open the hood 1 Pull the handle with this symbol on it It is located in front of the driver s side door frame near the floor 2 Then go to the front of the vehicle and lift up the secondary hood release which is located underneath the middle of the hood 3 Lift the hood release the hood prop from its retainer and put the hood prop into the slot in the hood If your vehicle has an underhood lamp it will automatically come on and stay on until the hood is closed Before closing the hood be sure all of
273. ler retailer or a locksmith who can service PASS Key Ill to have a new key made Do not leave the key or device that disarms or deactivates the theft deterrent system in the vehicle 3 21 Starting and Operating Your Vehicle New Vehicle Break In Notice The vehicle does not need an elaborate break in But it will perform better in the long run if you follow these guidelines Keep your speed at 55 mph 88 km h or less for the first 500 miles 805 km Do not drive at any one constant speed fast or Slow for the first 500 miles 805 km Do not make full throttle starts Avoid downshifting to brake or slow the vehicle Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles 322 km or so During this time the new brake linings are not yet broken in Hard stops with new linings can mean premature wear and earlier replacement Follow this breaking in guideline every time you get new brake linings Do not tow a trailer during break in See Towing a Trailer on page 5 26 for the trailer towing capabilities of the vehicle and more information Following break in engine speed and load can be gradually increased 3 22 Ignition Positions The ignition switch has four different positions To shift out of P Park the ignition must be in ON RUN and the regular brake pedal applied A LOCK OFF This position locks the ignition and transmission You will only be able to remove the key when the ignition is turned to L
274. lines might be available in your area We recommend that you use these gasolines if they comply with the specifications described earlier However E85 85 ethanol and other fuels containing more than 10 ethanol must not be used in vehicles that were not designed for those fuels Notice This vehicle was not designed for fuel that contains methanol Do not use fuel containing methanol It can corrode metal parts in the fuel system and also damage plastic and rubber parts That damage would not be covered under the vehicle warranty Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low emissions can contain an octane enhancing additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl MMT ask the attendant where you buy gasoline whether the fuel contains MMT We recommend against the use of such gasolines Fuels containing MMT can reduce the life of spark plugs and the performance of the emission control system could be affected The malfunction indicator lamp might turn on If this occurs return to your dealer retailer for service Fuel E85 85 Ethanol The 8th digit of the Vehicle Identification Number VIN shows the code letter or number that identifies the vehicle s engine The VIN is at the top left of the instrument panel See Vehicle Identification Number VIN on page 6 103 If the vehicle has the 4 8L V8 engine VIN Code A the 5 3L V8 VIN Code 4 or the 6 0L V8 engine VIN Code G and the N15 flexible fuel option y
275. llowing Turn and Lane Change Signals 2D D Headlamp High Low Beam Changer S2 Windshield Wipers SP Windshield Washer Flash to Pass Feature Information for these features is on the pages following Turn and Lane Change Signals An arrow on the instrument panel cluster flashes in the direction of the turn or lane change To signal a turn move the lever all the way up or down To signal a lane change raise or lower the lever until the arrow starts to flash The turn signal automatically flashes three times and if the tow haul mode is active it flashes six times Holding the turn signal lever for more than one second causes the turn signals to flash continually until the lever is released The lever returns to its starting position when released If after signaling a turn or lane change the arrow flashes rapidly or does not come on a signal bulb may be burned out Have the bulbs replaced If the bulb is not burned out check the fuse See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 6 104 Turn Signal On Chime If the turn signal is left on for more than1 2 km 3 4 mi a chime sounds at each flash of the turn signal and the message TURN SIGNAL ON also appears in the Driver Information Center DIC See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 4 44 To turn off the chime and message move the turn signal lever to the off position Headlamp High Low Beam Changer 20 D Headlamp High Low Beam Changer Pull the t
276. lock feedback can be personalized Press 2 and release to locate the vehicle Press 2 and hold for more than two seconds to sound the panic alarm Press again to turn off the alarm See Keys on page 3 3 and Remote Keyless Entry RKE System Operation on page 3 4 Remote Vehicle Start With this feature the engine can be started from outside of the vehicle Starting the Vehicle 1 Aim the RKE transmitter at the vehicle 2 Press o 3 Immediately after completing Step 2 press and hold Q until the turn signal lamps flash When the vehicle starts the parking lamps will turn on and remain on as long as the engine is running The doors will be locked and the climate control system may come on The engine will continue to run for 10 minutes Repeat the steps for a 10 minute time extension Remote start can be extended only once Canceling a Remote Start To cancel a remote start Aim the RKE transmitter at the vehicle and press and hold O until the parking lamps turn off Turn on the hazard warning flashers Turn the ignition switch to ON RUN and then back to LOCK OFF See Hemote Vehicle Start on page 3 6 Door Locks Manual Door Locks Lock and unlock the door from the outside using the key or the RKE transmitter if available From the inside slide the manual lever on the door up or down See Door Locks on page 3 8 Power Door Locks On vehicles with power door locks the switches are located on t
277. ly injured The vehicle may also be damaged the resulting repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty Pull a trailer only if all the steps in this section have been followed Ask your dealer retailer for advice and information about towing a trailer with the vehicle 5 26 Notice Pulling a trailer improperly can damage the vehicle and result in costly repairs not covered by the vehicle warranty To pull a trailer correctly follow the advice in this section and see your dealer retailer for important information about towing a trailer with the vehicle To identify the trailering capacity of the vehicle read the information in Weight of the Trailer that appears later in this section Trailering is different than just driving the vehicle by itself Trailering means changes in handling acceleration braking durability and fuel economy Successful safe trailering takes correct equipment and it has to be used properly The following information has many time tested important trailering tips and safety rules Many of these are important for your safety and that of your passengers So please read this section carefully before pulling a trailer Pulling A Trailer Here are some important points There are many different laws including speed limit restrictions having to do with trailering Make sure the rig will be legal not only where you live but also where you will be driving A good source for this informati
278. m monitoring the oil life additional maintenance is recommended in the Maintenance Schedule in this manual See Scheduled Maintenance on page 7 3 for more information Remember you must reset the OIL LIFE yourself after each oil change It will not reset itself Also be careful not to reset the OIL LIFE accidentally at any time other than when the oil has just been changed It cannot be reset accurately until the next oil change To reset the engine oil life system see Engine Oil Life System on page 6 18 Units Press the vehicle information button until UNITS displays This display allows you to select between English or Metric units of measurement Once in this display press the set reset button to select between ENGLISH or METRIC units Tire Pressure If your vehicle has the Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS the pressure for each tire can be viewed in the DIC The tire pressure will be shown in either kilopascals kPa or pounds per square inch psi Press the vehicle information button until the DIC displays FRONT TIRES PSI kPa LEFT RIGHT Press the vehicle information button again until the DIC displays REAR TIRES PSI kPa LEFT RIGHT If a low tire pressure condition is detected by the system while driving a message advising you to check the pressure in a specific tire will appear in the display See Inflation Tire Pressure on page 6 63 and DIC Warnings and Messages on page 4 44 for more information
279. m allows the engine to maintain the correct working temperature A WARNING Heater fuel operated heater FOH radiator hoses and other engine parts can be very hot Do not touch them If you do you can be burned Do not run the engine if there is a leak If you run the engine it could lose all coolant That could cause an engine fire and you could be burned Get any leak fixed before you drive the vehicle A SS Jam iy p JI le Notice Using coolant other than DEX COOL may cause premature engine heater core radiator and fuel operated heater FOH corrosion In B Coolant Recovery Tank addition the engine coolant may require changing C Engine Cooling Fan s sooner at 30 000 miles 50 000 km or 24 months whichever occurs first Any repairs would not be covered by your warranty Always use DEX COOL AN WARNING silicate free coolant in your vehicle An electric engine cooling fan under the hood can A Radiator Pressure Cap start up even when the engine is not running and can cause injury Keep hands clothing and tools away from any underhood electric fan 6 27 Engine Coolant The cooling system in the vehicle is filled with DEX COOL engine coolant This coolant is designed to remain in the vehicle for five years or 150 000 miles 240 000 km whichever occurs first The following explains the cooling system and how t
280. m is designed to evaluate critical emission control systems during normal driving This can take several days of routine driving If this has been done and the vehicle still does not pass the inspection for lack of OBD II system readiness your dealer retailer can prepare the vehicle for inspection 4 33 Oil Pressure Gage Canada United States The oil pressure gage shows the engine oil pressure in psi pounds per square inch when the engine is running Canadian vehicles indicate pressure in kPa kilopascals Oil pressure may vary with engine speed outside temperature and oil viscosity but readings above the low pressure zone indicate the normal operating range 4 34 A reading in the low pressure zone may be caused by a dangerously low oil level or other problem causing low oil pressure Check your oil as soon as possible A WARNING Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low The engine can become so hot that it catches fire Someone could be burned Check the oil as soon as possible and have the vehicle serviced Notice Lack of proper engine oil maintenance can damage the engine The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty Always follow the maintenance schedule in this manual for changing engine oil Oil Pressure Light This light comes on briefly while starting the engine If it does not have the vehicle serviced by your dealer retailer If the system is working normally the indicator
281. m warning light is not on the vehicle still has brakes but not antilock brakes If the regular brake system warning light is also on the vehicle does not have antilock brakes and there is a problem with the regular brakes See Brake System Warning Light on page 4 28 For vehicles with a Driver Information Center DIC see DIC Warnings and Messages on page 4 44 for all brake related DIC messages StabiliTrak Indicator Light For vehicles with the StabiliTrak system this light comes on or flashes according to the description table for the StabiliTrak system ee For more information see StabiliTrak System on page 5 5 Three chimes sound if the light turns on and one chime if the light turns off If this light remains on steady the vehicle needs to be taken in for service 4 29 Engine Coolant Temperature Gage Canada United States This gage shows the engine coolant temperature It also provides an indicator of how hard the vehicle is working During a majority of the operation the gage will read 100 C 210 F or less If the vehicle is pulling a load or going up hills it is normal for the temperature to fluctuate and approach the 122 C 250 F mark If the gage reaches the 125 C 260 F mark it indicates that the cooling system is working beyond its capacity See Engine Overheating on page 6 33 4 30 Tire Pressure Light For vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring system
282. malfunction indicator lamp could turn on and the vehicle might fail a smog check test See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 4 31 If this occurs return to your authorized dealer retailer for diagnosis If it is determined that the condition is caused by the type of fuel used repairs might not be covered by the vehicle warranty Additives To provide cleaner air all gasolines in the United States are now required to contain additives that help prevent engine and fuel system deposits from forming allowing the emission control system to work properly In most cases nothing should have to be added to the fuel However some gasolines contain only the minimum amount of additive required to meet U S Environmental Protection Agency regulations To help keep fuel injectors and intake valves clean or if the vehicle experiences problems due to dirty injectors or valves look for gasoline that is advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline For customers who do not use TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline regularly one bottle of GM Fuel System Treatment PLUS added to the fuel tank at every engine oil change can help clean deposits from fuel injectors and intake valves GM Fuel System Treatment PLUS is the only gasoline additive recommended by General Motors Also your dealer retailer has additives that will help correct and prevent most deposit related problems Gasolines containing oxygenates such as ethers and ethanol and reformulated gaso
283. mixture of the engine coolant listed in this manual for the cooling system See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 7 11 for more information Checking Coolant The vehicle must be on a level surface when checking the coolant level Check to see if coolant is visible in the coolant recovery tank If the coolant inside the coolant recovery tank is boiling do not do anything else until it cools down If coolant is visible but the coolant level is not at or above the COLD FILL mark add a 50 50 mixture of clean drinkable water and DEX COOL coolant at the coolant recovery tank but be sure the cooling system is cool before this is done When the engine is cold the coolant level should be at or above the COLD FILL mark If it is not there could be a leak in the cooling system If the coolant is low add the coolant or take the vehicle to a dealer retailer for service How to Add Coolant to the Recovery Tank for Gasoline Engines If your vehicle has a diesel engine see How to Add Coolant to the Coolant Recovery Tank under Van Models in the Cooling System section of the DURAMAX Diesel Supplement for the proper coolant fill procedure A WARNING You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts Coolant contains ethylene glycol and it will burn if the engine parts are hot enough Do not spill coolant on a hot engine Notice This vehicle has a specific coolant fill procedure Failure to f
284. mmended Do not use silicone or wax based products or those containing organic Solvents to clean the vehicle s interior because they can alter the appearance by increasing the gloss in a non uniform manner Some commercial products may increase gloss on the instrument panel The increase in gloss may cause annoying reflections in the windshield and even make it difficult to see through the windshield under certain conditions Care of Safety Belts Keep belts clean and dry A WARNING Do not bleach or dye safety belts It may severely weaken them In a crash they might not be able to provide adequate protection Clean safety belts only with mild soap and lukewarm water Weatherstrips Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last longer seal better and not stick or squeak Apply silicone grease with a clean cloth During very cold damp weather frequent application may be required See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 7 11 Washing Your Vehicle The best way to preserve the vehicle s finish is to keep it clean by washing it often Notice Certain cleaners contain chemicals that can damage the emblems or nameplates on the vehicle Check the cleaning product label If it states that it should not be used on plastic parts do not use it on the vehicle or damage may occur and it would not be covered by the warranty Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight Use a car washing soap Do not use cleaning ag
285. most driving conditions When activated the StabiliTrak system may reduce engine power to the wheels and apply braking to individual wheels as necessary to assist the driver with vehicle directional control If cruise control is being 5 6 used when StabiliTrak activates the cruise control automatically disengages The cruise control can be re engaged when road conditions allow See Cruise Control on page 4 6 The StabiliTrak system may also turn off automatically if it determines that a problem exists with the system If the problem does not clear itself after restarting the vehicle see your dealer retailer for service Traction Control Operation The traction control system is part of the StabiliTrak system Traction control limits wheel spin by reducing engine power to the wheels and by applying brakes to each individual wheel as necessary If the brake traction control system activates constantly or if the brakes have heated up due to high speed braking the brake traction control will be automatically disabled The system will come back on after the brakes have cooled This can take up to two minutes or longer depending on brake usage The traction control system may activate on dry or rough roads or under conditions such as heavy acceleration while turning or abrupt upshifts downshifts of the transmission When this a reduction in acceleration may be noticed or a noise or vibration may be heard This is normal Adding non
286. mps Do they all work and are lenses clean Tires Are treads good Are tires inflated to recommended pressure Weather and Maps Safe to travel Have up to date maps Highway Hypnosis Always be alert and pay attention to your surroundings while driving If you become tired or sleepy find a safe place to park your vehicle and rest Other driving tips include Keep the vehicle well ventilated Keep interior temperature cool Keep your eyes moving scan the road ahead and to the sides Check the rearview mirror and vehicle instruments often Hill and Mountain Roads Driving on steep hills or through mountains is different A WARNING than driving on flat or rolling terrain Tips for driving in these conditions include Coasting downhill in N Neutral or with the ignition e Keep the vehicle serviced and in good shape off is dangerous The brakes will have to do all the work of slowing down and they could get so hot that they would not work well You would then have poor braking or even none going down a hill Going down steep or long hills shift to a You could crash Always have the engine running lower gear and the vehicle in gear when going downhill Check all fluid levels and brakes tires cooling System and transmission AN WARNING Stay in your own lane Do not swing wide or cut across the center of the road Drive at speeds hat i If you do not shift down the brakes could get so dapi
287. n Airbag Inflate on page 2 66 See your dealer retailer for service 2 79 Replacing Restraint System Parts After a Crash Z WARNING A crash can damage the restraint systems in your vehicle A damaged restraint system may not properly protect the person using it resulting in serious injury or even death in a crash To help make sure your restraint systems are working properly after a crash have them inspected and any necessary replacements made as soon as possible 2 80 If the vehicle has been in a crash do you need new safety belts or LATCH system if equipped parts After a very minor crash nothing may be necessary But the safety belt assemblies that were used during any crash may have been stressed or damaged See your dealer retailer to have the safety belt assemblies inspected or replaced If the vehicle has the LATCH system and it was being used during a crash you may need new LATCH system parts New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the safety belt or LATCH system if equipped was not being used at the time of the crash If an airbag inflates you will need to replace airbag system parts See the part on the airbag system earlier in this section Have the safety belt pretensioners checked if the vehicle has been in a crash if the airbag readiness light stays on after the vehicle is started or while you are driving See Airbag Readiness Light on page 4 23 Section 3 Features and Cont
288. n and the vehicle was moving Once the vehicle begins moving the trip odometer will accumulate mileage For example if the vehicle was driven 8 km 5 miles before it is started again and then the retro active reset feature is activated the display will show 8 km 5 miles As the vehicle begins moving the display will then increase to 8 1 km 5 1 miles 8 2 km 5 2 miles etc If the retro active reset feature is activated after the vehicle is started but before it begins moving the display will show the number of kilometers km or miles mi that were driven during the last ignition cycle Fuel Range Press the trip fuel button until FUEL RANGE displays This display shows the approximate number of remaining kilometers km or miles mi the vehicle can be driven without refueling The display will show LOW if the fuel level is low The fuel range estimate is based on an average of the vehicle s fuel economy over recent driving history and the amount of fuel remaining in the fuel tank This estimate will change if driving conditions change For example if driving in traffic and making frequent stops this display may read one number but if the vehicle is driven on a freeway the number may change even though the same amount of fuel is in the fuel tank This is because different driving conditions produce different fuel economies Generally freeway driving produces better fuel economy than city driving If your vehicle i
289. n as the conditions that caused the message to be displayed are no longer present STARTING DISABLED SERVICE THROTTLE This message displays if the starting of the engine is disabled due to the electronic throttle control system Have your vehicle serviced by your dealer retailer immediately This message only appears while the ignition is in ON RUN and will not disappear until the problem is resolved This message cannot be acknowledged TIGHTEN GAS CAP This message may display and a chime may be heard along with the check engine light on the instrument panel cluster if the vehicle s fuel cap is not tightened properly See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 4 31 Reinstall the fuel cap fully See Filling the Tank on page 6 10 The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed A loose or missing fuel cap allows fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere A few driving trips with the cap properly installed should turn this light and message off TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE If your vehicle has the Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS this message displays when the system is re learning the tire positions on your vehicle See DIC Operation and Displays on page 4 38 for more information The tire positions must be re learned after rotating the tires or after replacing a tire or sensor See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 6 69 Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 6 65 and Inflation T
290. n the inner and outer wheels on each If your vehicle has a Tire Pressure Monitor side are lined up System TPMS reset the TPMS sensors after rotating the tires See Tire Pressure Monitor Also see Dual Tire Operation on page 6 64 for Operation on page 6 66 additional information ap Make sure the spare tire is stored securely Push After the tires have been rotated adjust the front pull and then try to rotate or turn the tire If it and rear inflation pressures as shown on the Tire moves tighten the cable See Storing a Flat or and Loading Information label See nflation Tire Spare Tire and Tools on page 6 94 6 71 When It Is Time for New Tires Various factors such as maintenance temperatures driving speeds vehicle loading and road conditions influence when you need new tires One way to tell when it is time for new tires is to check the treadwear indicators which appear when your tires have only 1 16 inch 1 6 mm or less of tread remaining Some commercial truck tires including Goodyear LT225 75R16 G949 RSA and Goodyear LT225 75R16 G933 RSD may not have treadwear indicators If the tires do not have treadwear indicators replace the tires when the tread depth is down to 1 8 inch 3 2 mm for the front tires or 1 16 inch 1 6 mm for the rear tires 6 72 You need new tires if any of the following statements are true You can see the indicators at three or more places around the tire Yo
291. ndicates the side of the vehicle the fuel door is on The gage first indicates empty before the vehicle is out of fuel and the fuel tank should be refueled soon Listed are four situations customers might experience with the fuel gage None of these indicate a problem with the fuel gage e At the gas station the fuel pump shuts off before the gage reads full It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the fuel gage indicated For example the gage may have indicated the tank was half full but it actually took a little more or less than half the tank s capacity to fill the tank The gage moves a little while turning a corner or speeding up The gage does not go back to empty when the ignition is turned off If the vehicle has the DURAMAX Diesel engine see the DURAMAX Diesel manual for more information Driver Information Center DIC Your vehicle has a Driver Information Center DIC All messages will appear in the DIC display located at the bottom of the instrument panel cluster The DIC buttons are located on the instrument panel next to the instrument panel cluster The DIC comes on when the ignition is on After a short delay the DIC will display the information that was last displayed before the engine was turned off The DIC displays trip fuel and vehicle system information and warning messages if a system problem is detected If your vehicle has these features the DIC also displays the
292. ned to inflate in moderate to severe frontal or near frontal crashes to help reduce the potential for severe injuries mainly to the driver s or right front passenger s head and chest However they are only designed to inflate if the impact exceeds a predetermined deployment threshold Deployment thresholds are used to predict how severe a crash is likely to be in time for the airbags to inflate and help restrain the occupants Whether the frontal airbags will or should deploy is not based on how fast the vehicle is traveling It depends largely on what you hit the direction of the impact and how quickly the vehicle slows down Frontal airbags may inflate at different crash speeds For example e f the vehicle hits a stationary object the airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than if the vehicle hits a moving object e f the vehicle hits an object that deforms the airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than if the vehicle hits an object that does not deform e f the vehicle hits a narrow object like a pole the airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than if the vehicle hits a wide object like a wall e f the vehicle goes into an object at an angle the airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than if the vehicle goes straight into the object Thresholds can also vary with specific vehicle design Frontal airbags are not intended to inflate during vehicle rollovers rear impacts o
293. negative ground both vehicles can be damaged Only use vehicles with 12 volt systems with negative grounds to jump start your vehicle 2 Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables can reach but be sure the vehicles are not touching each other If they are it could cause a ground connection you do not want You would not be able to start your vehicle and the bad grounding could damage the electrical systems To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling set the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved in the jump start procedure Put an automatic transmission in P Park or a manual transmission in N Neutral before setting the parking brake Notice f you leave the radio or other accessories on during the jump starting procedure they could be damaged The repairs would not be covered by the warranty Always turn off the radio and other accessories when jump starting the vehicle 3 Turn off the ignition on both vehicles Unplug unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette lighter or the accessory power outlet Turn off the radio and all lamps that are not needed This will avoid sparks and help save both batteries And it could save the radio 6 41 4 Open the hoods and locate the positive and negative terminal locations of the other vehicle Your vehicle has a remote positive jump starting terminal and a remote negative jump starting terminal You should always use these remote
294. nfant will suddenly become a 110 kg 240 Ib force ona person s arms An infant should be secured in an appropriate restraint 2 34 ZN WARNING Never do this Children who are up against or very close to any airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured or killed Never put a rear facing child restraint in the right front seat Secure a rear facing child restraint in a rear seat It is also better to secure a forward facing child restraint in a rear seat If you must secure a forward facing child restraint in the right front seat always move the front passenger seat as far back as it will go Q A 2 36 What are the different types of add on child restraints Add on child restraints which are purchased by the vehicle s owner are available in four basic types Selection of a particular restraint should take into consideration not only the child s weight height and age but also whether or not the restraint will be compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will be used For most basic types of child restraints there are many different models available When purchasing a child restraint be sure it is designed to be used in a motor vehicle If it is the restraint will have a label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle safety standards The restraint manufacturer s instructions that come with the restraint state the weight and height limitations for a particular child restraint In addition
295. ng providing increased performance vehicle control and transmission cooling when towing or hauling heavy loads TOW HAUL Turn the tow haul mode on and off by pressing the button located to the right of the steering wheel on the instrument panel When tow haul is on a light on the instrument panel cluster will come on 3 33 See Tow Haul Mode Light on page 4 36 for more information Also see Tow Haul Mode under Towing a Trailer on page 5 26 for more information Grade Braking Six Speed Automatic Transmission The Grade Braking shift modes can be activated by pressing the tow haul button on the dash While in Range Selection Mode Grade Braking is deactivated allowing the driver to select a desired range of gears Grade Braking is only active while the Tow Haul Mode is selected and you are not in the Range Selection Mode See Tow Haul Mode listed previously and Automatic Transmission Operation Six Speed Automatic Transmission on page 3 26 or Automatic Transmission Operation Four Speed Automatic Transmission on page 3 31 for more information on the Range Selection Mode Grade Braking assists in maintaining desired vehicle speeds when driving on downhill grades by automatically shifting to lower gears when the driver desires to slow the vehicle by applying the brake This reduces wear on the braking system and increases control of the vehicle Also see Towing a Trailer on page 5 26 for more information 3 34
296. ngly LEFT REAR DOOR OPEN On some vehicles this message displays and a chime sounds if the driver side rear door is not fully closed and the vehicle is in a drive gear Stop and turn off the vehicle check the door for obstructions and close the door again Check to see if the message still appears on the DIC 4 47 OIL PRESSURE LOW STOP ENGINE Notice f you drive your vehicle while the engine oil pressure is low severe engine damage may occur If a low oil pressure warning appears on the Driver Information Center DIC stop the vehicle as soon as possible Do not drive the vehicle until the cause of the low oil pressure is corrected See Engine Oil on page 6 15 for more information This message displays if low oil pressure levels occur Stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible and do not operate it until the cause of the low oil pressure has been corrected Check the oil as soon as possible and have your vehicle serviced by your dealer retailer See Engine Oil on page 6 15 PASSENGER DOOR OPEN This message displays and a chime sounds if the passenger door is not fully closed and the vehicle is ina drive gear Stop and turn off the vehicle check the door for obstructions and close the door again Check to see if the message still appears on the DIC REMOTE KEY LEARNING ACTIVE This message displays while you are matching a Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter to your vehicle See Matching Transmitter s to Y
297. nless you need to Add On Equipment When you carry removable items you may need to put a limit on how many people you carry inside your vehicle Be sure to weigh your vehicle before you buy and install the new equipment Towing Towing Your Vehicle To avoid damage the disabled vehicle should be towed with all four wheels off the ground Consult your dealer retailer or a professional towing service if the disabled vehicle must be towed See Roadside Assistance Program on page 8 6 To tow the vehicle behind another vehicle for recreational purposes such as behind a motorhome see Recreational Vehicle Towing following Recreational Vehicle Towing Recreational vehicle towing means towing the vehicle behind another vehicle such as behind a motorhome The two most common types of recreational vehicle towing are known as dinghy towing and dolly towing Dinghy towing is towing the vehicle with all four wheels on the ground Dolly towing is towing the vehicle with two wheels on the ground and two wheels up on a device known as a dolly 5 22 Here are some important things to consider before recreational vehicle towing What is the towing capacity of the towing vehicle Be sure to read the tow vehicle manufacturer s recommendations What is the distance that will be travelled Some vehicles have restrictions on how far and how long they can tow Is the proper towing equipment going to be used See your deale
298. not removed corrosion and rust can develop on the underbody parts such as fuel lines frame floor pan and exhaust system even though they have corrosion protection At least every spring flush these materials from the underbody with plain water Clean any areas where mud and debris can collect Dirt packed in close areas of the frame should be loosened before being flushed Your dealer retailer or an underbody car washing system can do this Chemical Paint Spotting Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a chemical fallout Airborne pollutants can fall upon and attack painted surfaces on the vehicle This damage can take two forms blotchy ring shaped discolorations and small irregular dark spots etched into the paint surface Although no defect in the paint job causes this we will repair at no charge to the owner the surfaces of new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within 12 months or 12 000 miles 20 000 km of purchase whichever occurs first Vehicle Identification Vehicle Identification Number VIN SAMPLE4UX1M07267 a This legal identifier is in the front corner of the instrument panel on the driver side It can be seen through the windshield from outside The VIN also appears on the Certification Tire and Service Parts labels and certificates of title and registration Engine Identification The eighth character in the VIN is the engine code This code identifies the vehicl
299. nt panel To use the accessory power outlet lift the cover The spring cap cover closes by itself when the outlet is empty Certain power accessory plugs may not be compatible to the accessory power outlet and could result in blown vehicle or adapter fuses If you experience a problem see your dealer retailer for additional information on the accessory power plugs Notice Adding any electrical equipment to the vehicle can damage it or keep other components from working as they should The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty Do not use equipment exceeding maximum amperage rating of 20 amperes Check with your dealer retailer before adding electrical equipment When adding electrical equipment be sure to follow the proper installation instructions included with the equipment Notice Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage not covered by the vehicle warranty Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the plug because the power outlets are designed for accessory power plugs only Ashtray s and Cigarette Lighter For vehicles with an ashtray it is located in the center console or on the instrument panel Pull up on the ashtray door to open it if it is in the console or pull the door open it if it is on the instrument panel Notice f papers pins or other flammable items are put in the ashtray hot cigarettes or other smoking materials could ignite them and possibly damage the vehicle
300. nto the straightaway Steering in Emergencies There are times when steering can be more effective than braking For example you come over a hill and find a truck stopped in your lane or a car suddenly pulls out from nowhere or a child darts out from between parked cars and stops right in front of you These problems can be avoided by braking if you can stop in time But sometimes you cannot stop in time because there is no room That is the time for evasive action steering around the problem The vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like these First apply the brakes See Braking on page 5 3 It is better to remove as much speed as possible from a collision Then steer around the problem to the left or right depending on the space available An emergency like this requires close attention and a quick decision If holding the steering wheel at the recommended 9 and 3 o clock positions it can be turned a full 180 degrees very quickly without removing either hand But you have to act fast steer quickly and just as quickly straighten the wheel once you have avoided the object The fact that such emergency situations are always possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving at all times and wear safety belts properly 5 8 Off Road Recovery The vehicle s right wheels can drop off the edge of a road onto the shoulder while driving If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the
301. o check and add coolant when it is low If there is a problem with engine overheating see Engine Overheating on page 6 33 What to Use Z WARNING Adding only plain water to the cooling system can be dangerous Plain water or some other liquid such as alcohol can boil before the proper coolant mixture will The vehicle s coolant warning system is set for the proper coolant mixture With plain water or the wrong mixture the engine could get too hot but you would not get the overheat warning The engine could catch fire and you or others could be burned Use a 50 50 mixture of clean drinkable water and DEX COOL coolant 6 28 Use a 50 50 mixture of clean drinkable water and DEX COOL coolant If using this mixture nothing else needs to be added This mixture e Gives freezing protection down to 34 F 37 C outside temperature Gives boiling protection up to 265 F 129 C engine temperature Protects against rust and corrosion Will not damage aluminum parts Helps keep the proper engine temperature Notice f an improper coolant mixture is used the engine could overheat and be badly damaged The repair cost would not be covered by the vehicle warranty Too much water in the mixture can freeze and crack the engine radiator heater core and other parts Notice f extra inhibitors and or additives are used in the vehicle s cooling system the vehicle could be damaged Use only the proper
302. o reduce the trailer weight the vehicle can tow If towing a trailer the tongue load must be added to the GVW because the vehicle will be carrying that weight too See Loading the Vehicle on page 5 17 for more information about the vehicle s maximum load capacity 5 30 The trailer tongue weight A should be 10 percent to 15 percent of the total loaded trailer weight B up to a maximum of 400 Ibs 181 kg with a weight carrying hitch The trailer tongue weight A should be 10 percent to 15 percent of the total loaded trailer weight B up to a maximum of 1 000 Ibs 454 kg with a weight distributing hitch Do not exceed the maximum allowable tongue weight for the vehicle Choose the shortest hitch extension that will position the hitch ball closest to the vehicle This will help reduce the effect of trailer tongue weight on the rear axle After loading the trailer weigh the trailer and then the tongue separately to see if the weights are proper If they are not adjustments might be made by moving some items around in the trailer Trailering may be limited by the vehicle s ability to carry tongue weight Tongue weight cannot cause the vehicle to exceed the GVWR Gross Vehicle Weight Rating or the RGAWR Rear Gross Axle Weight Rating The effect of additional weight may reduce the trailering capacity more than the total of the additional weight Consider the following example A vehicle model base weight is 5 500 I
303. oduction aeterna aaa 7 2 JUMP Starting seseris uaa Rune 6 41 Keyless Entry Remote RKE System seseseeess 3 4 Keyless Entry System ssseeseeseses 3 4 Cy cm 3 3 Labeling Tire Sidewall ssssssssse 6 56 Lamps Daytime Running DRL ssesseseese 4 11 DuC 4 12 Dome Lamp Override c eeeeeeeeeeeeeeee ees 4 13 License PIAS Leere netten oie 6 53 Malfunction Indicator esee 4 31 Reading ro EE 4 13 RELIER 6 52 Lap Shoulder Belt ssesess 2 24 LATCH System for Child Restraints 2 42 Lighting Entry E XI ticaicicntancnttameterastastbeannemncthestaeasd 4 13 Lights Airbag o MT E 4 24 Airbag Readiness eee 4 23 Antilock Brake System ABS Warning 4 29 Brake System Warning sessssssse 4 28 Charging System sssseeeeesese 4 27 Cruise CONTON Siers 4 36 Exterior Lamps eere 4 9 Flasheto Pass 3i RR eese 4 5 Highbeam On ssssses eee eeneenes 4 36 High Low Beam Changer ssessssse 4 5 Oil Ptessute sirenes nenna naa m teasab dacs 4 35 On Reminder 2 recreate rette Dn genes 4 11 Passenger Airbag Status Indicator 4 26 Safety Belt Reminders sesesessss 4 23 sr 4 35 StabiliTrak Indicator
304. oft bristles Products that remove odors from the vehicle s upholstery and clean the vehicle s glass can be obtained from your dealer retailer Do not clean the vehicle using A knife or any other sharp object to remove a soil from any interior surface e A stiff brush It can cause damage to the vehicle s interior surfaces Heavy pressure or aggressive rubbing with a cleaning cloth Use of heavy pressure can damage the interior and does not improve the effectiveness of soil removal Laundry detergents or dishwashing soaps with degreasers can leave residue that streaks and attracts dirt For liquid cleaners about 20 drops per gallon 3 78 L of water is a good guide Use only mild neutral pH soaps Too much cleaner that saturates the upholstery Organic solvents such as naptha alcohol etc that can damage the vehicle s interior Fabric Carpet Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft brush attachment frequently to remove dust and loose dirt A canister vacuum with a beater bar in the nozzle may only be used on floor carpet and carpeted floor mats For any soil always try to remove it first with plain water or club soda Before cleaning gently remove as much of the soil as possible using one of the following techniques For liquids gently blot the remaining soil with a paper towel Allow the soil to absorb into the paper towel until no more can be removed For solid dry soils remove as much as possible an
305. olant Temperature Gage on page 4 30 To avoid added strain on a hot engine the air conditioning compressor automatically turns off When the coolant temperature returns to normal the air conditioning compressor turns back on You can continue to drive your vehicle 4 46 If this message continues to appear have the system repaired by your dealer retailer as soon as possible to avoid damage to the engine ENGINE OIL LOW ADD OIL If your vehicle has an oil level sensor this message displays if the oil level in the vehicle is low Check the oil level and correct it as necessary You may need to let the vehicle cool or warm up and cycle the ignition to be sure this message clears See Engine Oil on page 6 15 for additional information ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE Notice f you drive your vehicle while the engine is overheating severe engine damage may occur If an overheat warning appears on the instrument panel cluster and or DIC stop the vehicle as soon as possible See Engine Overheating on page 6 33 for more information This message displays when the engine coolant temperature is too hot Stop and allow the vehicle to idle until it cools down See Engine Coolant Temperature Gage on page 4 30 ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE Notice f you drive your vehicle while the engine is overheating severe engine damage may occur If an overheat warning appears on the instrument panel cluster and or DIC stop the vehicle as s
306. ollow this procedure could cause the engine to overheat and be severely damaged If coolant is needed add the proper DEX COOL coolant mixture at the coolant recovery tank 6 29 How to Add Coolant to the Radiator Z WARNING Add Coolant to the Radiator under Van Models in the If your vehicle has a diesel engine see How to Cooling System section of the DURAMAX Diesel S NER f f team and scalding liquids from a hot cooling Supplement for the proper radiator fill procedure system can blow out and burn you badly They are under pressure and if you turn the surge tank AN WARNING An electric engine cooling fan under the hood can pressure cap even a little they can come out at high speed Never turn the cap when the cooling system including the surge tank pressure cap is hot Wait for the cooling system and surge tank pressure cap to cool if you ever have to turn the pressure cap start up even when the engine is not running and can cause injury Keep hands clothing and tools away from any underhood electric fan If coolant is needed add the proper mixture directly to the radiator but be sure the cooling system is cool before this is done 6 30 1 You can remove the radiator pressure cap when the cooling system including the radiator pressure cap and upper radiator hose is no longer hot Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise until it first stops Do not press down while t
307. on can be state or provincial police Consider using a sway control See Hitches later in this section Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles 800 km the new vehicle is driven The engine axle or other parts could be damaged Then during the first 500 miles 800 km that a trailer is towed do not drive over 50 mph 80 km h and do not make starts at full throttle This helps the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at the heavier loads Vehicles with an automatic transmissions can tow in D Drive Shift the transmission to a lower gear if the transmission shifts too often under heavy loads and or hilly conditions Three important considerations have to do with weight The weight of the trailer The weight of the trailer tongue The weight on the vehicle s tires Also see Tow Haul later in this section for information about the Tow Haul button and the Tow Haul indicator light Weight of the Trailer How heavy can a trailer safely be It depends on how the rig is used For example speed altitude road grades outside temperature and how much the vehicle is used to pull a trailer are all important It can depend on any special equipment on the vehicle and the amount of tongue weight the vehicle can carry See Weight of the Trailer Tongue later in this section for more information Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming only the driver is in the tow vehicle and it has al
308. on on the vehicle with the dead battery Your vehicle has a remote negative terminal for this purpose It is marked GND 10 Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run Jumper Cable Removal the engine for a while 11 Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery If As aay Jnpalnted Metal Engine Part or Remote it will not start after a few tries it probably needs Negative Terminal LL service B Good Battery or Remote Positive and Remote Negative Terminals C Dead Battery or Remote Positive Terminal Notice f the jumper cables are connected or removed in the wrong order electrical shorting may occur and damage the vehicle The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty Always connect and remove the jumper cables in the correct order making sure that the cables do not touch each other or other metal 6 44 To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles do the following 1 Disconnect the black negative cable from the vehicle that had the dead battery 2 Disconnect the black negative cable from the vehicle with the good battery 3 Disconnect the red positive cable from the vehicle with the good battery 4 Disconnect the red positive cable from the other vehicle 5 Return the remote positive terminal cover to its original position All Wheel Drive Lubricant checks in this section also apply to these vehicles However there are two a
309. on page 6 76 6 69 Single Rear Wheels Dual Rear Wheels If your vehicle has single rear wheels always use If the vehicle has dual rear wheels and the tread the correct rotation pattern shown here when design for the front tires is the same as the rotating the vehicle s tires Do not include rear tires always use one of the correct rotation the spare tire in the tire rotation patterns shown here when rotating the tires 6 70 Pressure on page 6 63 and Loading the Vehicle on page 5 17 Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly tightened See Wheel Nut Torque under Capacities and Specifications on page 6 110 Z WARNING Rust or dirt on a wheel or on the parts to which it is fastened can make wheel nuts become loose after time The wheel could come off and cause an accident When you change a wheel remove any rust or dirt from places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle In an emergency you can use a cloth or a paper towel to do this but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush later if needed to get all the rust or dirt off See Changing a Flat Tire on page 6 80 If the vehicle has dual rear wheels and the tread design for the front tires is different from the dual rear tires always use the correct rotation pattern shown here when rotating the tires The dual tires are rotated as a pair and the inside rear tires become the outside rear tires When you install dual wheels be sure that vent holes i
310. onds both status indicator lights remain on or if there are no lights at all there may be a problem with the lights or the passenger sensing system See your dealer retailer for service A WARNING If the airbag readiness light ever comes on and stays on it means that something may be wrong with the airbag system To help avoid injury to yourself or others have the vehicle serviced right away See Airbag Readiness Light on page 4 23 for more information including important safety information Charging System Light This light comes on briefly when the ignition key is turned to START but the engine is not running as a check to show it is working If it does not have the vehicle serviced by your dealer retailer The light should go out once the engine starts If it stays on or comes on while driving there could be a problem with the charging system A charging system message in the Driver Information Center DIC can also appear See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 4 44 for more information This light could indicate that there are problems with a generator drive belt or that there is an electrical problem Have it checked right away If the vehicle must be driven a short distance with the light on turn off accessories such as the radio and air conditioner Voltmeter Gage When the engine is not running but the ignition is on this gage shows the battery s state of charge in DC volts When the
311. one 2 10 Use During Pregnancy seeeeeese 2 29 Safety Defects Reporting Canadian Government sese 8 14 General Motors ccecceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeees 8 14 U S Government ssssessessesesse 8 14 Safety Warnings and Symbols iv Scheduled Maintenance suse 7 3 Scheduling Appointments sessesssss 8 9 Seats Head Restraints cccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 2 Power Seat eseese tiiti ne niei eaa 2 3 Rear Seat Operation ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 6 Reclining Seatbacks cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee tenes 2 4 Secondary Latch System cceeeeeeeeeenee tenes 6 92 11 Securing a Child Restraint Rear Seat Position cceceeeeeeeeeeeneeeeen teers 2 49 Right Front Seat Position 2 52 2 56 Security Ee a crees tent utetur taN scan sqaeeanemescanssect 4 35 SGIVICO iulidesitles car pas e ene d EY ERREUR EXPE DAgS 6 3 Accessories and Modifications 6 3 Adding Equipment to the Outside of the Mose ME 6 5 Doing Your Own Work eeeeeeeesse 6 4 Engine Soon Lamp coe 4 31 Parts Identification Label 6 103 Publications Ordering Information 8 15 Scheduling Appointments essssss 8 9 Servicing Your Airbag Equip
312. onger range can cause station frequencies to interfere with each other For better radio reception most AM radio stations boost the power levels during the day and then reduce these levels during the night Static can also occur when things like storms and power lines interfere with radio reception When this happens try reducing the treble on your radio FM Stereo FM stereo gives the best sound but FM signals reach only about 10 to 40 miles 16 to 65 km Tall buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals causing the sound to fade in and out 4 78 Cellular Phone Usage Cellular phone usage may cause interference with the vehicle s radio This interference may occur when making or receiving phone calls charging the phone s battery or simply having the phone on This interference causes an increased level of static while listening to the radio If static is received while listening to the radio unplug the cellular phone and turn it off Fixed Mast Antenna The fixed mast antenna can withstand most car washes without being damaged as long as it is securely attached to the base If the mast becomes slightly bent straighten it out by hand If the mast is badly bent replace it Occasionally check to make sure the antenna is tightened to its base If tightening is required tighten by hand Section 5 Your Driving the Road and the Vehicle 5 2 Defensive Driving cesses 5 2 Drunk
313. oon as possible See Engine Overheating on page 6 33 for more information This message displays and a chime sounds if the engine cooling system reaches unsafe temperatures for operation Stop and turn off the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so to avoid severe damage This message clears when the engine has cooled to a safe operating temperature ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED This message displays and a chime sounds when the cooling system temperature gets too hot and the engine further enters the engine coolant protection mode See Engine Overheating on page 6 33 for further information This message also displays when the vehicle s engine power is reduced Reduced engine power can affect the vehicle s ability to accelerate If this message is on but there is no reduction in performance proceed to your destination The performance may be reduced the next time the vehicle is driven The vehicle may be driven at a reduced speed while this message is on but acceleration and speed may be reduced Anytime this message stays on the vehicle should be taken to your dealer retailer for service as soon as possible FUEL LEVEL LOW This message displays if the fuel level is low Refuel as soon as possible See Fuel Gage on page 4 36 and Fuel on page 6 5 for more information ICE POSSIBLE DRIVE WITH CARE This message displays when the outside air temperature is cold enough to create icy road conditions Adjust your driving accordi
314. or the instrument panel In moderate to severe side collisions even belted occupants can contact the inside of the vehicle Airbags supplement the protection provided by safety belts Frontal airbags distribute the force of the impact more evenly over the occupant s upper body stopping the occupant more gradually Roof rail airbags distribute the force of the impact more evenly over the occupant s upper body Rollover capable roof rail airbags are designed to help contain the head and chest of occupants in the outboard seating positions in the first second and third rows if equipped The rollover capable roof rail airbags are designed to help reduce the risk of full or partial ejection in rollover events although no system can prevent all such ejections But airbags would not help in many types of collisions primarily because the occupant s motion is not toward those airbags See When Should an Airbag Inflate on page 2 65 for more information Airbags should never be regarded as anything more than a supplement to safety belts What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates After the frontal airbags inflate they quickly deflate so quickly that some people may not even realize an airbag inflated Roof rail airbags may still be at least partially inflated for some time after they deploy Some components of the airbag module may be hot for several minutes For location of the airbag modules see What Makes an Airbag Inflat
315. or local law requires that the top tether be anchored or if the instructions that come with the child restraint say that the top strap must be anchored In Canada the law requires that forward facing child restraints have a top tether and that the tether be attached If the child restraint does not have the LATCH system you will be using the safety belt to secure the child restraint in this position Be sure to follow the instructions that came with the child restraint Secure the child in the child restraint when and as the instructions say If more than one child restraint needs to be installed in the rear seat be sure to read Where to Put the Restraint on page 2 40 1 Put the child restraint on the seat 2 Pick up the latch plate and run the lap and shoulder portions of the vehicle s safety belt through or around the restraint The child restraint instructions will show you how 2 49 3 Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks 4 Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of Position the release button on the buckle so that the retractor to set the lock the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if necessary 2 50 6 If the child restraint has a top tether follow the child restraint manufacturer s instructions regarding the use of the top tether See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children LATCH on page 2 42 for more information 7 Push and pull the child restraint in different direc
316. or rendering inoperative by any person other than for purposes of maintenance repair or replacement of any device or element of design incorporated into any new vehicle for the purpose of noise control prior to its sale or delivery to the ultimate purchaser or while it is in use or 6 47 2 The use of the vehicle after such device or element of design has been removed or rendered inoperative by any person Among those acts presumed to constitute tampering are the acts listed below Insulation Removal of the noise shields or any underhood insulation Engine Removal or rendering engine speed governor if the vehicle has one inoperative so as to allow engine speed to exceed manufacturer specifications Fan and Drive Removal of fan clutch if the vehicle has one or rendering clutch inoperative Removal of the fan shroud if the vehicle has one 6 48 Air Intake Removal of the air cleaner silencer Modification of the air cleaner Exhaust Removal of the muffler and or resonator Removal of the exhaust pipes and exhaust pipe clamps Fuel Operated Heater FOH Diesel Engine Removal of the muffler Bulb Replacement For the proper type of replacement bulbs see Replacement Bulbs on page 6 53 For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this section contact your dealer retailer Halogen Bulbs ZN WARNING Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and can burst if you
317. ou can use either unleaded gasoline or ethanol fuel containing up to 85 ethanol E85 See Fuel on page 6 5 For all other gasoline engines use only the unleaded gasoline described under Gasoline Octane on page 6 6 Only vehicles that have the 4 8L V8 engine VIN Code A the 5 3L V8 VIN Code 4 or the 6 0L V8 engine VIN Code G and the N15 flexible fuel option can use 85 ethanol fuel E85 We encourage the use of E85 in vehicles that are designed to use it The ethanol in E85 is a renewable fuel meaning it is made from renewable Sources such as corn and other crops Many service stations will not have an 85 ethanol fuel E85 pump available The U S Department of Energy has an alternative fuels website www eere energy gov afdc infrastructure locator html that can help you find E85 fuel Those stations that do have E85 should have a label indicating ethanol content Do not use the fuel if the ethanol content is greater than 85 At a minimum E85 should meet ASTM Specification D 5798 By definition this means that fuel labeled E85 will have an ethanol content between 70 and 85 Filling the fuel tank with fuel mixtures that do not meet ASTM specifications can affect driveability and could cause the malfunction indicator lamp to come on To ensure quick starts in the wintertime the E85 fuel must be formulated properly for your climate according to ASTM specification D 5798 If you have trouble starting on E85 it could b
318. our Vehicle under 4 48 Remote Keyless Entry RKE System Operation on page 3 4 and DIC Operation and Displays on page 4 38 for more information REPLACE BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY This message displays if a Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter battery is low The battery needs to be replaced in the transmitter See Battery Replacement under Remote Keyless Entry RKE System Operation on page 3 4 RIGHT REAR DOOR OPEN On some vehicles this message displays and a chime sounds if the passenger side rear door is not fully closed and the vehicle is in a drive gear Stop and turn off the vehicle check the door for obstructions and close the door again Check to see if the message still appears on the DIC SERVICE A C SYSTEM This message displays when the electronic sensors that control the air conditioning and heating systems are no longer working Have the climate control system serviced by your dealer retailer if you notice a drop in heating and air conditioning efficiency SERVICE AIR BAG This message displays if there is a problem with the airbag system Have your dealer retailer inspect the system for problems See Airbag Readiness Light on page 4 23 and Airbag System on page 2 60 for more information SERVICE BATTERY CHARGING SYSTEM On some vehicles this message displays if there is a problem with the battery charging system Under certain conditions the charging system light may also turn on in the inst
319. owing the directions provided by the child restraint manufacturer and refer to Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position With Passenger Sensing System in the Index If after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting the vehicle the on indicator is still lit turn the vehicle off Then slightly recline the vehicle seatback and adjust the seat cushion if adjustable to make sure that the vehicle seatback is not pushing the child restraint into the seat cushion Restart the vehicle If the on indicator is still lit secure the child in the child restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle and check with your dealer retailer If no rear seat is available do not install a child restraint in this vehicle 2 75 If the Off Indicator is Lit for an If this happens use the following steps to allow the Adult Size Occupant system to detect that person and enable the right front passenger frontal airbag 1 Turn the vehicle off 2 Remove any additional material from the seat such as blankets cushions seat covers seat heaters or seat massagers 3 Place the seatback in the fully upright position 4 Have the person sit upright in the seat centered on the seat cushion with legs comfortably extended 5 Restart the vehicle and have the person remain in this position for two to three minutes after the on indicator is lit This allows the system to detect that person and then enable
320. p tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the top tether be anchored or if the instructions that come with the child restraint say that the top strap must be anchored In Canada the law requires that forward facing child restraints have a top tether and that the tether be attached You will be using the lap shoulder belt to secure the child restraint in this position Follow the instructions that came with the child restraint 1 Move the seat as far back as it will go before securing the forward facing child restraint When the passenger sensing system has turned off the right front passenger frontal airbag the off indicator on the passenger airbag status indicator should light and stay lit when the vehicle is started See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 4 26 2 Put the child restraint on the seat 3 Pick up the latch plate and run the lap and shoulder portions of the vehicle s safety belt through or around the restraint The child restraint instructions will show you how 2 53 4 Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks 5 Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of Position the release button on the buckle so that the retractor to set the lock the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if necessary 2 54 6 To tighten the belt push down on the child restraint pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulde
321. p on the brake pedal 3 Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks 4 Stop and have someone pick up and store the chocks Maintenance When Trailer Towing The vehicle needs service more often when pulling a trailer See this manual s Maintenance Schedule or Index for more information Things that are especially important in trailer operation are automatic transmission fluid engine oil axle lubricant belts cooling system and brake system It is a good idea to inspect these before and during the trip Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts are tight Trailer Wiring Harness The optional heavy duty trailer wiring package includes a wiring harness with a seven pin connector at the rear of the vehicle and a four wire harness assembly under the driver side of the instrument panel The four wire harness assembly comes without a connector If the vehicle does not have a trailer hitch the seven wire harness assembly with connector is taped together and located in a frame pocket at the driver side rear left corner of the frame If the vehicle has a trailer hitch the seven wire harness assembly with connector is attached to a bracket on the hitch platform In both cases the seven wire harness has a connector and includes a 30 amp feed wire 5 37 The seven wire harness connector contains the following trailer circuits Light Green Back up Lamps 10A fuse White Ground Dark Blue Trailer Brake
322. p tether anchors and attachments Lower Anchors Top Tether Anchor Lower anchors A are metal bars built into the vehicle A top tether A C anchors the top of the child restraint There are two lower anchors for each LATCH seating to the vehicle A top tether anchor is built into the position that will accommodate a child restraint with vehicle The top tether attachment B on the child lower attachments B restraint connects to the top tether anchor in the vehicle in order to reduce the forward movement and rotation of the child restraint during driving or in a crash Your child restraint may have a single tether A or a dual tether C Either will have a single attachment B to secure the top tether to the anchor 2 43 Some child restraints that have a top tether are designed for use with or without the top tether being attached Others require the top tether always to be attached In Canada the law requires that forward facing child restraints have a top tether and that the tether be attached Be sure to read and follow the instructions for your child restraint Lower Anchor and Top Tether Anchor Locations dli Top Tether Anchor Seating positions with top tether anchors Lower Anchor Seating positions with two lower anchors Second Third and Fourth Row with Three Passenger Seat See the information following for installing a child restraint with a top tether in the second third and fourth row
323. page 6 110 The outer tire on a dual wheel setup generally wears faster than the inner tire Your tires will wear more evenly and last longer if you rotate the tires periodically See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 6 69 Also see Scheduled Maintenance on page 7 3 A WARNING If you operate your vehicle with a tire that is badly underinflated the tire can overheat An overheated tire can lose air suddenly or catch fire You or others could be injured Be sure all tires including the spare are properly inflated See Tires on page 6 55 and Inflation Tire Pressure on page 6 63 for more information on proper tire inflation Tire Pressure Monitor System The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS uses radio and sensor technology to check tire pressure levels The TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure in your vehicle s tires and transmit tire pressure readings to a receiver located in the vehicle Each tire including the spare if provided should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system TPMS that ill
324. pavement recovery should be fairly easy Ease off the accelerator and then if there is nothing in the way steer so that the vehicle straddles the edge of the pavement Turn the steering wheel 8 to 13 cm 3 to 5 inches about one eighth turn until the right front tire contacts the pavement edge Then turn the steering wheel to go straight down the roadway Passing Passing another vehicle on a two lane road can be dangerous To reduce the risk of danger while passing Look down the road to the sides and to crossroads for situations that might affect a successful pass If in doubt wait Watch for traffic signs pavement markings and lines that could indicate a turn or an intersection Never cross a solid or double solid line on your side of the lane Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to pass Doing so can reduce your visibility Wait your turn to pass a slow vehicle When you are being passed ease to the right Loss of Control Let us review what driving experts say about what happens when the three control systems brakes steering and acceleration do not have enough friction where the tires meet the road to do what the driver has asked In any emergency do not give up Keep trying to steer and constantly seek an escape route or area of less danger Skidding In a skid a driver can lose control of the vehicle Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable care suited to exi
325. ped Vehicle 2 77 Setting the Clock esseeeeeeeeeeeeeee 4 60 Sheet Metal Damage ssseeeeses 6 102 Shifting UE OR Tate soreer tetas tetas A EE 3 37 Shifting Into Park oorsien aiarra iinnat 3 36 Signals Turn and Lane Change 4 4 Sliding Side DOOI se eet etre ie rios umen usns 3 12 Spare MMC RTT 6 96 Installing secs cseea sche a N Maes 6 85 REMOVING Pee 6 81 iios ec 6 94 Specifications and Capacities 6 110 Speedometer sss 4 22 StabiliTrak Indicator Light 4 29 StabiliTrak System ccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 5 Start Vehicle Remote cccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeaees 3 6 Starting the Engine isisisi asee en 3 23 Siegen EE 5 7 Steering Wheel Controls Audio 4 77 Steering Wheel Tilt Wheel sssusssss 4 3 Storage Areas cassas recoin segane 3 42 Stuck in Sand Mud Ice or Snow 5 16 SUM SOTS e ce cT 3 20 Swing Out Side Door 60 40 ssss 3 13 Swing Out Windows em 3 18 Talllamips isian a eee RU D dao PNE TEE 6 52 Tampering with Noise Control System ProNibitegi D a ia 6 47 Text Telephone TTY Users ssseeeesse 8 5 Theft Deterrent Feature a nns 4 76 Theft Deterrent Systems essessesss 3 20 PASS Key Ill Electronic Immobilizer
326. quipment parts either new Genuine GM parts or recycled original GM parts Remember recycled parts will not be covered by your GM vehicle warranty Insurance pays the bill for the repair but you must live with the repair Depending on your policy limits your insurance company may initially value the repair using aftermarket parts Discuss this with your repair professional and insist on Genuine GM parts Remember if your vehicle is leased you may be obligated to have the vehicle repaired with Genuine GM parts even if your insurance coverage does not pay the full cost If another party s insurance company is paying for the repairs you are not obligated to accept a repair valuation based on that insurance company s collision policy repair limits as you have no contractual limits with that company In such cases you can have control of the repair and parts choices as long as cost stays within reasonable limits Reporting Safety Defects Reporting Safety Defects to the United States Government If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addition to notifying General Motors If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become in
327. r belt back into the retractor When installing a forward facing child restraint it may be helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt 7 If the vehicle does not have a rear seat and the child restraint has a top tether follow the child restraint manufacturer s instructions regarding the use of the top tether See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children LATCH on page 2 42 for more information 8 Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure If the airbag is off the off indicator in the passenger airbag status indicator will come on and stay on when the vehicle is started If the child restraint has been installed and the on indicator is lit see If the On Indicator is Lit for a Child Restraint under Passenger Sensing System on page 2 72 for more information To remove the child restraint unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and let it return to the stowed position If the top tether is attached to a top tether anchor disconnect it 2 55 Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position With Airbag On Off Switch The vehicle has airbags A rear seat is a safer place to secure a forward facing child restraint See Where to Put the Restraint on page 2 40 There is a switch on the instrument panel that you can use to turn off the right front passenger s frontal airbag See Airbag Off Switch on page 2 69 for more information inclu
328. r hand to the right Always back up slowly and if possible have someone guide you Making Turns Notice Making very sharp turns while trailering could cause the trailer to come in contact with the vehicle The vehicle could be damaged Avoid making very sharp turns while trailering When turning with a trailer make wider turns than normal Do this so the trailer will not strike soft shoulders curbs road signs trees or other objects Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers Signal well in advance Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer The arrows on the instrument panel flash whenever signaling a turn or lane change Properly hooked up the trailer lamps also flash telling other drivers the vehicle is turning changing lanes or stopping When towing a trailer the arrows on the instrument panel flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer are burned out For this reason you may think other drivers are seeing the signal when they are not It is important to check occasionally to be sure the trailer bulbs are still working 5 35 Driving On Grades Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before starting down a long or steep downgrade If the transmission is not shifted down the brakes might have to be used so much that they would get hot and no longer work well The vehicle can tow in D Drive Shift the transmission to a lower gear if the transmission shifts too often under heavy loads and or hilly conditions When towing at h
329. r Unlock J Case Fuse Usage ra femmy SS Fos UpitterAuxiiary 2 Reading Lamps Fm Rear Blower 6 106 Relays Usage High Current Mini Rear Defogger High Current Micro Retained Accessory Power RAP High Current Micro Circuit Breaker Usage Engine Compartment Fuse Block The fuse block is located in the engine compartment on the driver side of the vehicle Notice Spilling liquid on any electrical components on the vehicle may damage it Always keep the covers on any electrical component Mini Fuse Use 6 Fuel System Control Module Ignition 8 Body Control Modaue7 9 BodyConroModue4 6 107 Mini Fuse Use SS Engine Control Module Ignition Glow Plug Module Transmission Control Module Ignition Transmission Control Module Battery 27 O 28 O 2 33 Spare Cd 34 Spare Cd 35 Fuel Operated Heater Module 36 Spare Cd 51 Left high Beam Headlamp 52 Right High Beam Headlamp 58 Lit Low Beam Headlamp 54 Right Low Beam Headlamp ros 56 Canister Vent Solenoid 58 BodyControModue2 55 Body Cont Module 1 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 51 52 53 54 55 56 58 59 6 108 mini Fuse Usage et 62 Lex 1 64 65 ition Inj Fete LOLVL V22 BEEN ud LOLVL V22 68 A
330. r a rollover event Pretensioners work only once If the pretensioners activate in a crash they will need to be replaced and probably other new parts for the vehicle s safety belt system See Heplacing Restraint System Parts After a Crash on page 2 80 Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides This vehicle may have rear shoulder belt comfort guides If not they are available through your dealer retailer The guides may provide added safety belt comfort for older children who have outgrown booster seats and for some adults When installed and properly adjusted the comfort guide positions the shoulder belt away from the neck and head Here is how to install a comfort guide to the safety belt 2 Place the guide over the belt and insert the two edges of the belt into the slots of the guide 1 Locate the guide in a pocket on the side of the seatback 2 27 WARNING Continued The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces 3 Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat The elastic cord must be under the belt and the guide on top ZN WARNING A safety belt that is not properly worn may not provide the protection needed in a crash The sure that the shoulder belt crosses the shoulder person wearing the belt could be seriously injured To remove and store the comfort guide squeeze the i belt edges together so that
331. r in many side impacts Single Stage vs Dual Stage Airbags Depending on the weight of the vehicle you will have either Single Stage Airbags or Dual Stage Airbags Vehicles that have a passenger sensing system also have dual stage airbags See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 4 26 or Passenger Sensing System on page 2 72 If the GVWR Gross Vehicle Weight Rating of the vehicle is 8 500 Ib 3 855 kg or above the vehicle may have single stage airbags If the GVWR is below 8 500 Ib 3 855 kg then the vehicle may have dual stage airbags You can find the GVWR on the certification label on the rear edge of the driver door See Loading the Vehicle on page 5 17 for more information 2 65 In addition the vehicle may have dual stage frontal airbags Dual stage airbags adjust the restraint according to crash severity The vehicle has electronic frontal sensors which help the sensing system distinguish between a moderate frontal impact and a more severe frontal impact For moderate frontal impacts dual stage airbags inflate at a level less than full deployment For more severe frontal impacts full deployment occurs The vehicle may or may not have roof rail airbags See Airbag System on page 2 60 Roof rail airbags are intended to inflate in moderate to severe side crashes In addition these roof rail airbags are intended to inflate during a rollover Roof rail airbags will inflate if the crash severity is above the sy
332. r retailer or trailering professional for additional advice and equipment recommendations Is the vehicle ready to be towed Just as preparing the vehicle for a long trip make sure the vehicle is prepared to be towed See Before Leaving on a Long Trip on page 5 12 Dinghy Towing Two Wheel Drive Vehicles Notice f the vehicle is towed with all four wheels on the ground the drivetrain components could be damaged The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty Do not tow the vehicle with all four wheels on the ground Two wheel drive vehicles should not be towed with all four wheels on the ground Two wheel drive transmissions have no provisions for internal lubrication while being towed 5 23 All Wheel Drive Vehicles The vehicle was not designed to be towed with all four wheels on the ground To properly tow these vehicles they should be placed on a platform trailer with all four wheels off the ground Notice Towing an all wheel drive vehicle with all four wheels on the ground or even with only two of its wheels on the ground will damage drivetrain components Do not tow an all wheel drive vehicle with any of its wheels on the ground 5 24 Dolly Towing Rear Towing Rear Wheels Off the Ground Two Wheel Drive Vehicles Use the following procedure to tow the vehicle from All Wheel Drive Vehicles the rear 1 Attach the dolly to the tow vehicle following the dolly manufacturer s
333. reimbursement of fuel or other transportation costs Courtesy Rental Vehicle Your dealer may arrange to provide you with a courtesy rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehicle that you obtain if your vehicle is kept for an overnight warranty repair Rental reimbursement will be limited and must be supported by original receipts This requires that you sign and complete a rental agreement and meet state provincial local and rental vehicle provider requirements Requirements vary and may include minimum age requirements insurance coverage credit card etc You are responsible for fuel usage charges and may also be responsible for taxes levies usage fees excessive mileage or rental usage beyond the completion of the repair It may not be possible to provide a like vehicle as a courtesy rental Additional Program Information All program options such as shuttle service may not be available at every dealer Please contact your dealer for specific information about availability All Courtesy Transportation arrangements will be administered by appropriate dealer personnel General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at any time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility pursuant to the terms and conditions described herein at its sole discretion Collision Damage Repair If your vehicle is involved in a collision and it is damaged have the damage
334. ress the pushbutton located below any one of the tabs that you want to change 3 Increase or decrease the time or date depending on the radio by pressing NX SEEK PI arrows lt lt PP REV FWD buttons or by turning 44 clockwise or counterclockwise For detailed instructions on setting the clock for your specific audio system see Setting the Clock on page 4 60 Portable Audio Devices This vehicle may have an auxiliary input jack located on the audio faceplate External devices such as iPod MP3 players etc can be connected to the auxiliary input jack using a 3 5 mm 1 8 in input jack cable See Using the Auxiliary Input Jack under Radio s on page 4 62 Steering Wheel Controls If equipped these controls are located on the right side of the steering wheel A Press to seek radio stations or select tracks on a CD Press and hold to scan radio stations Press to mute the audio system Press again to cancel mute lt c1 Increases or decreases volume SRCE Press to choose between the radio CD and auxiliary input jack Dl Press to seek the next radio station or the next track or chapter while sourced to the CD Cruise Control B The cruise control buttons are located on the left side of the steering wheel On Off RES Press to resume or accelerate speed SET Press to set or decrease speed amp Press to cancel cruise control without erasing the set speed from
335. rols KEYS 3 3 Remote Keyless Entry RKE System 3 4 Remote Keyless Entry RKE System i9 scu MORE ret Ei Dedede 3 4 Remote Vehicle Start cceeeeeeeneeeeeneeeeenes 3 6 Doors and LOCKS cece cence eee aia 3 8 Door LOCKS e eei LR Lester denedE d 3 8 Power Door Locks sssssssssssss 3 9 Cargo Door Relocking sese 3 9 Delayed Locking iiiter rrt 3 9 Programmable Automatic Door Locks 3 10 Automatic Door Lock sssssessssse 3 10 Automatic Door Unlock seeseeeeeee 3 10 Rear Door Security Locks susssss 3 11 Lockout Protection i i erts 3 12 Sliding Side Door eeeese 3 12 60 40 Swing Out Side Door sssss 3 13 Hear DOTS c iddcisocisceceus soar ere eee ok te iut be nain 3 15 WINGOWS olere et esent be eem E cedat 3 16 Manual WIndOWS i retorno ter de Dacia nettes 3 17 Power Windows seeesss 3 17 Swing Out Windows sene 3 18 Enhanced Technology Glass ssss 3 19 SUM VISOIS nete otio rosso E EAE 3 20 Theft Deterrent Systems sssssuesss 3 20 PASS Key Ill Electronic Immobilizer 3 20 PASS Key Ill Electronic Immobilizer Serre 3 20 Starting and Operating Your Vehicle 3 22 New Vehicle Break In
336. rrain when frequently towing a trailer or used for taxi police or delivery service See Automatic Transmission Fluid 4 Speed Transmission on page 6 20 or Automatic Transmission Fluid 6 Speed Transmission on page 6 23 All wheel drive only Transfer case fluid change severe service for vehicles mainly driven when frequently towing a trailer or used for taxi police or delivery service Check vent hose at transfer case for kinks and proper installation Check to be sure vent hose is unobstructed clear and free of debris During any maintenance if a power washer is used to clean mud and dirt from the underbody care should be taken to not directly spray the transfer case output seals High pressure water can overcome the seals and contaminate the transfer case fluid Contaminated fluid will decrease the life of the transfer case and should be replaced Evaporative control system inspection Check all fuel and vapor lines and hoses for proper hook up routing and condition Check that the purge valve if the vehicle has one works properly Replace as needed An Emission Control Service The U S Environmental Protection Agency or the California Air Resources Board has determined that the failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to the completion of the vehicle s useful life We however urge that all recommended maintenance services be performed at
337. rument panel cluster See Charging System Light on page 4 27 Driving with this problem could drain the battery Turn off all unnecessary accessories Have the electrical system checked as soon as possible See your dealer retailer SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM This message displays along with the brake system warning light if there is a problem with the brake system See Brake System Warning Light on page 4 28 If this message appears stop as soon as possible and turn off the vehicle Restart the vehicle and check for the message on the DIC display If the message is still displayed or appears again when you begin driving the brake system needs service as soon as possible See your dealer retailer SERVICE STABILITRAK If your vehicle has StabiliTrak and this message displays it means there may be a problem with the StabiliTrak system If you see this message try to reset the system Stop turn off the engine for at least 15 seconds then start the engine again If this message still comes on it means there is a problem You should see your dealer retailer for service The vehicle is safe to drive however you do not have the benefit of StabiliTrak so reduce your speed and drive accordingly SERVICE THEFT DETERRENT SYSTEM This message displays when there is a problem with the theft deterrent system The vehicle may or may not restart so you may want to take the vehicle to your dealer retailer before turning off the engine See
338. s see Engine Oil in the DURAMAX Diesel manual Checking Engine Oil It is a good idea to check the engine oil level at each fuel fill In order to get an accurate reading the oil must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop See Engine Compartment Overview on page 6 14 for the location of the engine oil dipstick 1 Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes to drain back into the oil pan If this is not done the oil dipstick might not show the actual level 2 Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel or cloth then push it back in all the way Remove it again keeping the tip down and check the level When to Add Engine Oil COS If the oil is below the cross hatched area at the tip of the dipstick add at least one quart liter of the recommended oil This section explains what kind of oil to use For engine oil crankcase capacity see Capacities and Specifications on page 6 110 Notice Do not add too much oil If the engine has so much oil that the oil level gets above the cross hatched area that shows the proper operating range the engine could be damaged See Engine Compartment Overview on page 6 14 for the location of the engine oil fill cap 324 AAAA SAE 5W 30 AR Add enough oil to put the level somewhere in the proper operating range Push the dipstick all the way back in when through What Kind of Engine Oil to U
339. s are seated Sidewall The portion of a tire between the tread and the bead Speed Rating An alphanumeric code assigned to a tire indicating the maximum speed at which a tire can operate Traction The friction between the tire and the road surface The amount of grip provided Tread The portion of a tire that comes into contact with the road Treadwear Indicators Narrow bands sometimes called wear bars that show across the tread of a tire when only 1 16 inch 1 6 mm of tread remains See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 6 72 UTQGS Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards A tire information system that provides consumers with ratings for a tire s traction temperature and treadwear Ratings are determined by tire manufacturers using 6 62 government testing procedures The ratings are molded into the sidewall of the tire See Uniform Tire Quality Grading on page 6 75 Vehicle Capacity Weight The number of designated seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs 68 kg plus the rated cargo load See Loading the Vehicle on page 5 17 Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire Load on an individual tire due to curb weight accessory weight occupant weight and cargo weight Vehicle Placard A label permanently attached to a vehicle showing the vehicle s capacity weight and the original equipment tire size and recommended inflation pressure See Tire and Loading Information Label under Loading the Vehicle on pa
340. s done on the brake hydraulic system ZNWARNING If too much brake fluid is added it can spill on the engine and or fuel operated heater parts if equipped If the vehicle has a diesel engine and a fuel operated heater see Fuel Operated Heater FOH in the diesel engine supplement The fluid will burn if the engine is hot enough You or others could be burned and the vehicle could be damaged Add brake fluid only when work is done on the brake hydraulic system See Checking Brake Fluid in this section Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when to check the brake fluid See Scheduled Maintenance on page 7 3 6 37 Checking Brake Fluid Check brake fluid by looking at the brake fluid reservoir See Engine Compartment Overview on page 6 14 The fluid level should be above MIN If it is not have the brake hydraulic system checked to see if there is a leak After work is done on the brake hydraulic system make sure the level is above the MIN but not over the MAX mark What to Add Use only new DOT 3 brake fluid from a sealed container See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 7 11 Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area around the cap before removing it This helps keep dirt from entering the reservoir 6 38 A WARNING With the wrong kind of fluid in the brake hydraulic system the brakes might not work well This could cause a crash Always use the proper brake fl
341. s in it can catch fire You or others could be badly burned Stop your engine if it overheats and get out of the vehicle until the engine is cool 6 33 If No Steam Is Coming From The Engine Compartment If an engine overheat warning is displayed but no steam can be seen or heard the problem may not be too serious Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot when the vehicle Climbs a long hill on a hot day Stops after high speed driving ldles for long periods in traffic Tows a trailer See Driving on Grades under Towing a Trailer on page 5 26 If the overheat warning is displayed with no sign of steam 1 Turn the air off 2 Turn the heater on to the highest temperature and to the highest fan speed Open the windows as necessary 3 In heavy traffic let the engine idle in N Neutral while stopped If it is safe to do so pull off the road shift to P Park or N Neutral and let the engine idle If the temperature overheat gage is no longer in the overheat zone or an overheat warning no longer displays the vehicle can be driven Continue to drive the vehicle slow for about 10 minutes Keep a safe 6 34 vehicle distance from the car in front of you If the warning does not come back on continue to drive normally If the warning continues pull over stop and park the vehicle right away If there is still no sign of steam push down the accelerator until the engine speed is about twice as
342. s low on fuel the FUEL LEVEL LOW message will be displayed See FUEL LEVEL LOW under DIC Warnings and Messages on page 4 44 for more information 4 39 Average Economy Press the trip fuel button until AVG ECONOMY displays This display shows the approximate average liters per 100 kilometers L 100 km or miles per gallon mpg This number is calculated based on the number of L 100 km mpg recorded since the last time this menu item was reset To reset AVG ECONOMY press and hold the set reset button The display will return to zero Fuel Used Press the trip fuel button until FUEL USED displays This display shows the number of liters L or gallons gal of fuel used since the last reset of this menu item To reset the fuel used information press and hold the set reset button while FUEL USED is displayed Timer Press the trip fuel button until TIMER displays This display can be used as a timer To start the timer press the set reset button while TIMER is displayed The display will show the amount of time that has passed since the timer was last reset not including time the ignition is off Time will continue to be counted as long as the ignition is on even if another display is being shown on the DIC 4 40 The timer will record up to 99 hours 59 minutes and 59 seconds 99 59 59 after which the display will return to zero To stop the timer press the set reset button briefly while TIMER is displaye
343. s the pushbutton located under the desired option 3 Press the button again to apply the selected default or let the screen time out MP3 Radio with a Six Disc CD Player If your vehicle has a radio with a six disc CD player the radio has a MENU button instead of the button to set the time and date To set the time and date follow these instructions 1 Press the MENU button Once the option displays press the pushbutton located under that label The HR MIN MM DD YYYY hour minute month day and year displays 2 Press the pushbutton located under any one of the labels to change Every time the pushbutton is pressed again the time or the date if selected increases by one Another way to increase the time or date is to press the right gt I SEEK arrow or the PP FWD forward button 3 To decrease press the left ki SEEK arrow or the lt lt REV button or turn the 44 knob located on the upper right side of the radio to adjust the selected setting 4 61 Changing the Time and Date Default Settings To change the time default setting from 12 hours to 24 hours or change the date default setting from month day year to day month year To change the time or date default settings follow these instructions 1 Press the MENU button Once the option displays press the pushbutton located under the forward arrow that is currently displayed on the radio screen until the 12H hour and 24H hour
344. s you to change the language in which the DIC messages appear to English Press the customization button until the PRESS TO DISPLAY IN ENGLISH screen appears on the DIC display Press the set reset button once to display all DIC messages in English LANGUAGE This feature allows you to select the language in which the DIC messages will appear Press the customization button until the LANGUAGE screen appears on the DIC display Press the set reset button once to access the settings for this feature Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings ENGLISH default All messages will appear in English FRANCAIS All messages will appear in French ESPANOL All messages will appear in Spanish ARABIC All messages will appear in Arabic NO CHANGE No change will be made to this feature The current setting will remain To select a setting press the set reset button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC A beep will sound once a language has been selected 4 53 AUTO DOOR LOCK This feature allows you to select when the vehicle s doors will automatically lock See Programmable Automatic Door Locks on page 3 10 for more information Press the customization button until AUTO DOOR LOCK appears on the DIC display Press the set reset button once to access the settings for this feature Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings SHIFT OUT OF PARK d
345. safety belt See Safety Belts They Are for Everyone on page 2 10 A WARNING Assume that other road users pedestrians bicyclists and other drivers are going to be careless and make mistakes Anticipate what they might do and be ready In addition Allow enough following distance between you and the driver in front of you Focus on the task of driving Driver distraction can cause collisions resulting in injury or possible death These simple defensive driving techniques could save your life Drunk Driving A WARNING Drinking and then driving is very dangerous Your reflexes perceptions attentiveness and judgment can be affected by even a small amount of alcohol You can have a serious or even fatal collision if you drive after drinking Do not drink and drive or ride with a driver who has been drinking Ride home in a cab or if you are with a group designate a driver who will not drink Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is a global tragedy Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive a vehicle judgment muscular coordination vision and attentiveness Police records show that almost 40 percent of all motor vehicle related deaths involve alcohol In most cases these deaths are the result of someone who was drinking and driving In recent years more than 17 000 annual motor vehicle related deaths have been associated with the use of alcohol with about 250 00
346. schedule is for vehicles that carry passengers and cargo within recommended limits on the Tire and Loading Information label See Loading the Vehicle on page 5 17 are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal driving limits use the recommended fuel See Gasoline Octane on page 6 6 A WARNING Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can be dangerous In trying to do some jobs you can be seriously injured Do your own maintenance work only if you have the required know how and the proper tools and equipment for the job If you have any doubt see your dealer retailer to have a qualified technician do the work See Doing Your Own Service Work on page 6 4 At your General Motors dealer retailer you can be certain that you will receive the highest level of service available Your dealer retailer has specially trained service technicians uses genuine GM replacement parts as well as up to date tools and equipment to ensure fast and accurate diagnostics The proper replacement parts fluids and lubricants to use are listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 7 11 and Maintenance Replacement Parts on page 7 13 We recommend the use of genuine parts from your dealer retailer Rotation of New Tires To maintain ride handling and performance of the vehicle it is important that the first rotation service for new tires be performed when they have 8 000 to 13 000 km 5 000 to 8 000 miles See Tire In
347. se Look for three things RECOMMENDED SAE VISCOSITY GRADE ENGINE OILS HOT WEATHER FIT C LOOK FOR THIS SYMBOL AND GM STANDARD GM6094M DO NOT USE SAE 10W 40 SAE 20W 50 OR ANY OTHER VISCOSITY GRADE OIL NOT RECOMMENDED COLD WEATHER GM6094M Use only an oil that meets GM Standard GM6094M SAE 5W 30 SAE 5W 30 is best for the vehicle These numbers on an oil container show its viscosity or thickness Do not use other viscosity oils such as SAE 20W 50 American Petroleum Institute API starburst symbol Oils meeting these requirements should have the starburst symbol on the container This symbol indicates that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute API Notice Use only engine oil identified as meeting GM Standard GM6094M and showing the American Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines starburst symbol Failure to use the recommended oil can result in engine damage not covered by the vehicle warranty Cold Temperature Operation If in an area of extreme cold where the temperature falls below 20 F 29 C use either an SAE 5W 30 synthetic oil or an SAE OW 30 engine oil Both provide easier cold starting for the engine at extremely low temperatures Always use an oil that meets the required specification GM6094M See What Kind of Engine Oil to Use for more information Engine Oil Additives Engine Oil Flushes Do not add anything to the oil The recommended
348. se leaded gasoline or any other fuel not recommended in the previous text on fuel Costly repairs caused by use of improper fuel would not be covered by the vehicle warranty To check the fuel availability ask an auto club or contact a major oil company that does business in the country where you will be driving Filling the Tank A WARNING Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can cause bad injuries To help avoid injuries to you and others read and follow all the instructions on the fuel pump island Turn off the engine when refueling Do not smoke near fuel or when The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hinged fuel door on the driver side of the vehicle refueling the vehicle Do not use cellular phones Keep sparks flames and smoking materials away from fuel Do not leave the fuel pump unattended If the vehicle has E85 fuel capability the fuel cap will be when refueling the vehicle This is against the law yellow and state that E85 or gasoline can be used in some places Do not re enter the vehicle while See Fuel E85 85 Ethanol on page 6 8 pumping fuel Keep children away from the fuel To remove the fuel cap turn it slowly counterclockwise pump never let children pump fuel While refueling hang the tethered fuel cap from the hook on the fuel door Z WARNING Fuel can spray out on you if you open the fuel cap too quickly If you spill fuel and then something ignites it you could be badly b
349. se or counterclockwise to adjust the highlighted setting You can also adjust the highlighted setting by pressing either SEEK arrow Pb FWD or lt lt REV button until the desired levels are obtained If a station s frequency is weak or if there is static decrease the treble To quickly adjust bass midrange or treble to the middle position press the pushbutton positioned under the BASS MID or TREB label for more than two seconds and the level adjusts to the middle position To quickly adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle position press the 44 knob for more than two seconds until a beep sounds EQ Equalization Press this button to choose bass and treble equalization settings designed for different types of music The choices are pop rock country talk jazz and classical Selecting MANUAL or changing bass or treble returns the EQ to the manual bass and treble settings Unique EQ settings can be saved for each source Adjusting the Speakers Balance Fade AM FM Radio and Radio with CD Base C Balance Fade To adjust the balance or fade press the 1 button or the Jd knob until the desired speaker control label displays Turn the 4d knob clockwise or counterclockwise to adjust the setting Adjusting the Speakers Balance Fade BAL FADE Balance Fade To adjust balance or fade press the 44 knob until the speaker control labels display Continue pressing to highlight the desired label or press
350. seat is locked in place Power Seat If the vehicle has front power seat s the controls are located at the front center of the seat cushion To raise or lower the seat move the center knob up or down To move the seat forward or rearward move the center knob toward the right or left To raise or lower the front of the seat cushion move the right lever up or down To raise or lower the rear of the seat cushion move the left lever up or down Reclining Seatbacks A WARNING You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to adjust a manual driver s seat while the vehicle is moving The sudden movement could startle and confuse you or make you push a pedal when you do not want to Adjust the driver s seat only when the vehicle is not moving To recline the seatback Z WARNING i 1 Lift the recline lever 2 Move the seatback to the desired position then Ir enner Seabee IS Mor loprEd i gouie mave release the lever to lock the seatback in place forward in a sudden stop or crash That could cause injury to the person sitting there Always 3 Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is push and pull on the seatbacks to be sure they locked are locked To return the seatback to an upright position 1 Lift the lever fully without applying pressure to the seatback and the seatback will return to the upright The seats have manual reclining seatbacks The lever used to operate them is located on the inbo
351. spection and Rotation on page 6 69 Scheduled Maintenance When the Change Engine Oil Soon Message Displays Change engine oil and filter See Engine Oil on page 6 15 An Emission Control Service When the Change Engine Oil Soon message displays service is required for the vehicle as soon as possible within the next 1 000 km 600 miles If driving under the best conditions the engine oil life system might not indicate the need for vehicle service for more than a year The engine oil and filter must be changed at least once a year and the oil life system must be reset Your dealer retailer has trained service technicians who will perform this work and reset the system If the engine oil life system is reset accidentally service the vehicle within 5 000 km 3 000 miles since the last service Reset the oil life system whenever the oil is changed See Engine Oil Life System on page 6 18 When the Change Engine Oil Soon message displays certain services checks and inspections are required The services described for Maintenance I should be performed at every engine oil change The services described for Maintenance II should be performed when Maintenance I was performed the last time the engine oil was changed thas been 10 months or more since the Change Engine Oil Soon message has displayed or since the last service Maintenance I Change engine oil and filter See Engine Oil on page 6 15 An Emission Control Service
352. ss the set reset button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC REMOTE DOOR LOCK This feature allows you to select the type of feedback you will receive when locking the vehicle with the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter You will not receive feedback when locking the vehicle with the RKE transmitter if the doors are open See Remote Keyless Entry RKE System Operation on page 3 4 for more information Press the customization button until REMOTE DOOR LOCK appears on the DIC display Press the set reset button once to access the settings for this feature Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings OFF There will be no feedback when you press the lock button on the RKE transmitter LIGHTS ONLY The exterior lamps will flash when you press the lock button on the RKE transmitter HORN ONLY The horn will sound on the second press of the lock button on the RKE transmitter HORN amp LIGHTS default The exterior lamps will flash when you press the lock button on the RKE transmitter and the horn will sound when the lock button is pressed again within five seconds of the previous command NO CHANGE No change will be made to this feature The current setting will remain To select a setting press the set reset button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC REMOTE DOOR UNLOCK This feature allows you to select the type of feedback you will receive when unlocking th
353. stalling after start up stalling when the vehicle is changed into gear misfiring hesitation on acceleration or stumbling on acceleration These conditions might go away once the engine is warmed up If one or more of these conditions occurs change the fuel brand used It will require at least one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off See Gasoline Octane on page 6 6 If none of the above have made the light turn off your dealer retailer can check the vehicle The dealer retailer has the proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electrical problems that might have developed Emissions Inspection and Maintenance Programs Some state provincial and local governments have or might begin programs to inspect the emission control equipment on the vehicle Failure to pass this inspection could prevent getting a vehicle registration Here are some things to know to help the vehicle pass an inspection The vehicle will not pass this inspection if the check engine light is on with the engine running or if the key is in ON RUN and the light is not on The vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD II on board diagnostic system determines that critical emission control systems have not been completely diagnosed by the system The vehicle would be considered not ready for inspection This can happen if the battery has recently been replaced or if the battery has run down The diagnostic syste
354. stem s designed threshold level The threshold level can vary with specific vehicle design Roof rail airbags are not intended to inflate in frontal impacts near frontal impacts or rear impacts All roof rail airbags will deploy when either side of the vehicle is struck In any particular crash no one can say whether an airbag should have inflated simply because of the damage to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs were For frontal airbags inflation is determined by what the vehicle hits the angle of the impact and how quickly the vehicle slows down For roof rail airbags deployment is determined by the location and severity of the side impact 2 66 What Makes an Airbag Inflate In a deployment event the sensing system sends an electrical signal triggering a release of gas from the inflator Gas from the inflator fills the airbag causing the bag to break out of the cover and deploy The inflator the airbag and related hardware are all part of the airbag module Frontal airbag modules are located inside the steering wheel and instrument panel For vehicles with roof rail airbags there are airbag modules in the ceiling of the vehicle near the side windows for the first second and third rows if equipped See Where Are the Airbags on page 2 62 for more information How Does an Airbag Restrain In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel
355. stem ABS helps avoid only the braking skid Driving at Night Night driving is more dangerous than day driving because some drivers are likely to be impaired by alcohol or drugs with night vision problems or by fatigue Night driving tips include Drive defensively Do not drink and drive Reduce headlamp glare by adjusting the inside rearview mirror Slow down and keep more space between you and other vehicles because headlamps can only light up so much road ahead Watch for animals When tired pull off the road Do not wear sunglasses Avoid staring directly into approaching headlamps Keep the windshield and all glass on your vehicle clean inside and out Keep your eyes moving especially during turns or curves No one can see as well at night as in the daytime But as we get older these differences increase A 50 year old driver might need at least twice as much light to see the same thing at night as a 20 year old Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads Rain and wet roads can reduce vehicle traction and affect your ability to stop and accelerate Always drive slower in these types of driving conditions and avoid driving through large puddles and deep standing or flowing water A WARNING Wet brakes can cause crashes They might not work as well in a quick stop and could cause pulling to one side You could lose control of the vehicle After driving through a large puddle o
356. sting conditions and by not overdriving those conditions But skids are always possible The three types of skids correspond to the vehicle s three control systems In the braking skid the wheels are not rolling In the steering or cornering skid too much speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and lose cornering force And in the acceleration skid too much throttle causes the driving wheels to spin If the vehicle starts to slide ease your foot off the accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want the vehicle to go If you start steering quickly enough the vehicle could straighten out Always be ready for a second skid if it occurs Of course traction is reduced when water snow ice gravel or other material is on the road For safety slow down and adjust your driving to these conditions It is important to slow down on slippery surfaces because stopping distance is longer and vehicle control more limited While driving on a surface with reduced traction try your best to avoid sudden steering acceleration or braking including reducing vehicle speed by shifting to a lower gear Any sudden changes could cause the tires to slide You might not realize the surface is 5 9 slippery until the vehicle is skidding Learn to recognize warning clues such as enough water ice or packed snow on the road to make a mirrored surface and slow down when you have any doubt Remember Any Antilock Brake Sy
357. subfolders deep however keep the total number of folders to a minimum in order to reduce the complexity and confusion in trying to locate a particular folder during playback Make sure playlists have a mp3 or wpl extension other file extensions might not work Minimize the length of the file folder or playlist names Long file folder or playlist names or a combination of a large number of files and folders or playlists could cause the player to be unable to play up to the maximum number of files folders playlists or sessions If you wish to play a large number of files folders playlists or sessions minimize the length of the file folder or playlist name Long names also take up more space on the display potentially getting cut off Finalize the audio disc before you burn it Trying to add music to an existing disc could cause the disc not to function in the player Playlists can be changed by using the lt previous and gt next folder buttons the 7 knob or the K SEEK arrows You can also play an MP3 CD R or CD RW that was recorded using no file folders If a CD R or CD RW contains more than the maximum of 50 folders 15 playlists and 512 folders and files the player lets you access and navigate up to the maximum but all items over the maximum are not accessible Root Directory The root directory of the CD R or CD RW is treated as a folder If the root directory has compressed a
358. surroundings To turn off the DRL turn the exterior lamp control to the off position and then release it For vehicles first sold in Canada the transmission must be in the P Park position before the DRL can be turned off Automatic Headlamp System When it is dark enough outside and the headlamp switch is in AUTO the automatic headlamp system turns on the headlamps along with the taillamps sidemarker parking lamps roof marker lamps and the instrument panel lights The radio lights will also be dim To turn off the automatic headlamp system turn the exterior lamps switch to the off position and then release For vehicles first sold in Canada the transmission must be in the P Park position before the automatic headlamp system can be turned off The vehicle has a light sensor located on the top of the instrument panel Do not cover the sensor or the system will come on whenever the ignition is on The system may also turn on the headlamps when driving through a parking garage or tunnel There is a delay in the transition between the daytime and nighttime operation of the Daytime Running Lamps DRL and the automatic headlamp systems so that driving under bridges or bright overhead street lights does not affect the system The DRL and automatic headlamp system is only affected when the light sensor sees a change in lighting lasting longer than the delay If the vehicle is started in a dark garage the automatic headlamp
359. t check the fluid hot before adding fluid Checking the fluid hot will give you a more accurate reading of the fluid level 6 21 Checking the Fluid Level Prepare your vehicle as follows 1 2 4 Park your vehicle on a level place Keep the engine running With the parking brake applied place the shift lever in P Park With your foot on the brake pedal move the shift lever through each gear range pausing for about three seconds in each range Then position the shift lever in P Park Let the engine run at idle for three minutes or more Then without shutting off the engine follow these steps The transmission dipstick is located near the center of the engine compartment and will be labeled with the graphic shown 6 22 gt coup See Engine Compartment Overview on page 6 14 for more information on location 1 Flip the handle up and then pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel 2 Push it back in all the way wait three seconds and then pull it back out again SHOTS Check both sides of the dipstick and read the lower level The fluid level must be in the COLD area for a cold check or in the HOT or cross hatched area for a hot check Be sure to keep the dipstick pointed down to get an accurate reading If the fluid level is in the acceptable range push the dipstick back in all the way then flip the handle down to lock the dipstick in pla
360. t hubs and hub piloted wheels for damage Because of loose running wheels piloting pad damage may occur and require replacement of the entire hub for proper centering of the wheels When replacing studs hubs wheel nuts or wheels be sure to use GM original equipment parts A WARNING Wheel nuts that are improperly or incorrectly tightened can cause the wheels to become loose or come off The wheel nuts should be tightened with a torque wrench to the proper torque specification after replacing Follow the torque specification supplied by the aftermarket manufacturer when using accessory locking wheel nuts See Capacities and Specifications on 11 page 6 110 for original equipment wheel nut Turn the wheel wrench clockwise and in a torque specifications crisscross sequence as shown Use the wheel wrench to tighten the nuts firmly 12 Put the wheel cover or the center cap and plastic Notice Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead wheel nut caps back on Remove any wheel to brake pulsation and rotor damage To avoid blocks expensive brake repairs evenly tighten the wheel Have a technician check the wheel nut tightness of nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper all wheels with a torque wrench after the first torque specification See Capacities and 100 miles 160 km and then 1 000 miles 1600 km Specifications on page 6 110 for the wheel nut after that Repeat this service whenever you have torque specification a tir
361. t the steps for each pushbutton radio station you want stored as a favorite 4 65 The number of favorites pages can be setup using the MENU button To setup the number of favorites pages 1 Press the MENU button to display the radio setup menu 2 Press the pushbutton located below the FAV 1 6 label 3 Select the desired number of favorites pages by pressing the pushbutton located below the displayed page numbers 4 Press the FAV button or let the menu time out to return to the original main radio screen showing the radio station frequency labels and to begin the process of programming your favorites for the chosen amount of numbered pages Setting the Tone Bass Treble AM FM Radio and Radio with CD Base BASS TREB Bass Treble To adjust the bass or treble press the 44 knob or the EQ button until the desired tone control label displays Turn the 44 knob clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the setting The display shows the current bass or treble level If a station s frequency is weak or if there is static decrease the treble Unique BASS TREB settings can be saved for each source 4 66 Setting the Tone Bass Midrange Treble BASS MID TREB Bass Midrange or Treble To adjust bass midrange or treble press the 44 knob until the tone control labels display Continue pressing to highlight the desired label or press the pushbutton positioned under the desired label Turn the Jd knob clockwi
362. t the vehicle s safety belts This may damage the top tether be attached attach and tighten the these parts If necessary move buckled safety top tether to the top tether anchor if equipped belts to avoid rubbing the LATCH attachments Refer to the child restraint instructions and Do not fold the empty rear seat with a safety belt the following steps buckled This could damage the safety belt or 2 1 Find the top tether anchor the seat Unbuckle and return the safety belt to its 2 2 For the second third and fourth row with stowed position before folding the seat three passenger seats only in the rear driver side seating positions use anchor 1 Attach and tighten the lower attachments to the point A For the I passenger side seating lower anchors If the child restraint does not have positions use anchor point B For the lower attachments or the desired seating position center seating positions use anchor does not have lower anchors secure the child point B Never install two top tethers using restraint with the top tether and the safety belts the same top tether anchor Refer to your child restraint manufacturer instructions and the instructions in this manual 2 3 Route and tighten the top tether according to your child restraint instructions and the 1 1 Find the lower anchors for the desired following instructions seating position 1 2 Put the child restraint on the seat 1 3 Attach and tighten the lower attachmen
363. tal injuries The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest 2 32 Infants and Young Children Everyone in a vehicle needs protection This includes infants and all other children Neither the distance traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes the need for everyone to use safety restraints In fact the law in every state in the United States and in every Canadian province says children up to some age must be restrained while in a vehicle Z WARNING Children can be seriously injured or strangled if a shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck and the safety belt continues to tighten Never leave children unattended in a vehicle and never allow children to play with the safety belts Airbags plus lap shoulder belts offer protection for adults and older children but not for young children and infants Neither the vehicle s safety belt system nor its airbag system is designed for them Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles they should have the protection provided by appropriate child restraints Children who are not restrained properly can strike other people or can be thrown out of the vehicle 2 33 A WARNING Never do this Never hold an infant or a child while riding in a vehicle Due to crash forces an infant or a child will become so heavy it is not possible to hold it during a crash For example in a crash at only 40 km h 25 mph a 5 5 kg 12 Ib i
364. tance If your trip is interrupted due to a warranty failure incidental expenses may be reimbursed during the 5 years 100 000 miles 160 000 km Powertrain warranty period Items considered are hotel meals and rental car Services Not Included in Roadside Assistance Impound towing caused by violation of any laws Legal fines Mounting dismounting or changing of snow tires chains or other traction devices Towing or services for vehicles driven on a non public road or highway Services Specific to Canadian Purchased Vehicles Fuel delivery Reimbursement is approximately 5 Canadian Diesel fuel delivery may be restricted Propane and other fuels are not provided through this service Lock Out Service Vehicle registration is required Trip Routing Service Limit of six requests per year Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance Must be over 250 kilometres from where your trip was started to qualify General Motors of Canada Limited requires pre authorization original detailed receipts and a copy of the repair orders Once authorization has been received the Roadside Assistance advisor will help you make arrangements and explain how to receive payment Alternative Service If assistance cannot be provided right away the Roadside Assistance advisor may give you permission to get local emergency road service You will receive payment up to 100 after sending the original receipt to Roadside Assistance Mechani
365. tation is not a part of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty A separate booklet entitled Warranty and Owner Assistance Information furnished with each new vehicle provides detailed warranty coverage information Transportation Options Warranty service can generally be completed while you wait However if you are unable to wait GM helps to minimize your inconvenience by providing several transportation options Depending on the circumstances your dealer can offer you one of the following Shuttle Service Shuttle service is the preferred means of offering Courtesy Transportation Dealers may provide you with shuttle service to get you to your destination with minimal interruption of your daily schedule This includes one way or round trip shuttle service within reasonable time and distance parameters of the dealer s area Public Transportation or Fuel Reimbursement If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs and public transportation is used instead of the dealer s shuttle service the expense must be supported by original receipts and can only be up to the maximum amount allowed by GM for shuttle service In addition for U S customers should you arrange transportation through a friend or relative limited reimbursement for reasonable fuel expenses may be available Claim amounts should reflect actual costs and be supported by original receipts See your dealer for information regarding the allowance amounts for
366. tays in the player When the ignition or radio is turned on the CD R or CD RW starts to play where it stopped if it was the last selected audio source As each new track starts to play the track number and song title displays amp EJECT Press this button to eject CD R s or CD RW s To eject the CD R or CD RW that is currently playing press and release this button A beep sounds and Ejecting Disc displays Once the disc is ejected Remove Disc displays The CD R or CD RW can be removed If the CD R or CD RW is not removed after several seconds the CD R or CD RW automatically pulls back into the player and begins playing For the Six Disc CD player press and hold this button for two seconds to eject all discs 44 Tune Turn this knob to select MP3 files on the CD R or CD RW currently playing Ki SEEK MX Press the left SEEK arrow to go to the start of the current MP3 file if more than 10 seconds have played Press the right arrow to go to the next MP3 file If either SEEK arrow is held or pressed multiple times the player continues moving backward or forward through MP3 files on the CD t3 Previous Folder Press the pushbutton positioned under the Folder label to go to the first track in the previous folder gt Next Folder Press the pushbutton positioned under the Folder label to go to the first track in the next folder lt lt REV Reverse Press and hold this button to reverse playback quickly w
367. th the extender 2 29 Child Restraints The manufacturer s instructions that come with the booster seat state the weight and height limitations for that booster Use a booster seat with a lap shoulder belt Older Children until the child passes the below fit test e Sit all the way back on the seat Do the knees bend at the seat edge If yes continue If no return to the booster seat Buckle the lap shoulder belt Does the shoulder belt rest on the shoulder If yes continue If no try using the rear safety belt comfort guide See Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides under Lap Shoulder Belt on page 2 24 for more information If the shoulder belt still does not rest on the shoulder then return to the booster seat Does the lap belt fit low and snug on the hips touching the thighs If yes continue If no return to the booster seat Can proper safety belt fit be maintained for the length of the trip If yes continue If no return Older children who have outgrown booster seats should to the booster seat Wear he VENIO Ssley Deus f you have the choice a child should sit in a position with a lap shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can provide 2 30 Q What is the proper way to wear safety belts A An older child should wear a lap shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can provide The shoulder belt should not cross the face or neck The lap belt should f
368. that an unsecured child restraint can move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people in the vehicle Be sure to properly secure any child restraint in the vehicle even when no child is in it 2 41 Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children LATCH The LATCH system holds a child restraint during driving or in acrash This system is designed to make installation of a child restraint easier The LATCH system uses anchors in the vehicle and attachments on the child restraint that are made for use with the LATCH system Make sure that a LATCH compatible child restraint is properly installed using the anchors or use the vehicle s safety belts to secure the restraint following the instructions that came with that restraint and also the instructions in this manual When installing a child 2 42 restraint with a top tether you must also use either the lower anchors or the safety belts to properly secure the child restraint A child restraint must never be installed using only the top tether strap and anchor In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle you need a child restraint that has LATCH attachments The child restraint manufacturer will provide you with instructions on how to use the child restraint and its attachments The following explains how to attach a child restraint with these attachments in your vehicle Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraints have lower anchors and attachments or to
369. that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on page 6 66 for additional information 6 65 Federal Communications Commission FCC and Industry and Science Canada See Radio Frequency Statement on page 8 18 for information regarding Part 15 of the Federal Communications Commission FCC Rules and RSS 210 211 of Industry and Science Canada Tire Pressure Monitor Operation This vehicle may have a Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS The TPMS is designed to warn the driver when a low tire pressure condition exists TPMS sensors are mounted onto each tire and wheel assembly excluding the spare tire and wheel assembly The TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure in the vehicle s tires and transmits the tire pressure readings to a receiver located in the vehicle When a low tire pressure condition is detected the TPMS will illuminate the low tire pressure e warning symbol located on the instrument panel cluster 6 66 At the same time a message to check the pressure in a specific tire appears on the Driver Information Center DIC display The low tire pressure warning light and the DIC warning message come on at each ignition cycle until the tires are inflated to the correct
370. the RES button on the steering wheel until the desired speed is reached then release it To increase vehicle speed in small increments press the RES button Each time this is done the vehicle goes about 1 mph 1 6 km h faster Reducing Speed While Using Cruise Control To reduce the vehicle speed while using cruise control e Press and hold the SET button on the steering wheel until the desired lower speed is reached then release it To slow down in very small amounts press the SET button on the steering wheel briefly Each time this is done the vehicle goes about 1 mph 1 6 km h slower Passing Another Vehicle While Using Cruise Control Use the accelerator pedal to increase the vehicle speed When you take your foot off the pedal the vehicle will slow down to the previous set cruise speed Using Cruise Control on Hills How well the cruise control will work on hills depends upon the vehicle speed load and the steepness of the hills When going up steep hills you might have to step on the accelerator pedal to maintain the vehicle s speed When going downhill you might have to brake or shift to a lower gear to keep the vehicle s speed down When the brakes are applied the cruise control turns off Ending Cruise Control There are three ways to end cruise control Step lightly on the brake pedal Press the X button on the steering wheel Press the button on the steering wheel Erasing Spe
371. the belt across you very quickly If this happens let the belt go back slightly to unlock it Then pull the belt across you more slowly If the shoulder portion of a passenger belt is pulled out all the way the child restraint locking feature may be engaged If this happens let the belt go back all the way and start again 2 24 3 Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure If the belt is not long enough see Safety Belt Extender on page 2 29 Position the release button on the buckle so that the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if necessary If equipped with a shoulder belt height adjuster move it to the height that is right for you See Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment later in this section for instructions on use and important safety information 5 To make the lap part tight pull up on the shoulder belt It may be necessary to pull stitching on the safety belt through the latch plate to fully tighten the lap belt on smaller occupants To unlatch the belt push the button on the buckle The belt should return to its stowed position Slide the latch plate up the safety belt webbing when the safety belt is not in use The latch plate should rest on the stitching on the safety belt near the guide loop on the side wall Before a door is closed be sure the safety belt is out of the way If a door is slammed against a safety belt damage c
372. the date of any service work performed See Maintenance Record on page 7 15 Adding Equipment to the Outside of the Vehicle Things added to the outside of the vehicle can affect the airflow around it This can cause wind noise and can affect fuel economy and windshield washer performance Check with your dealer retailer before adding equipment to the outside of the vehicle Fuel For diesel engine vehicles see Diesel Fuel Requirements and Fuel System in the DURAMAX Diesel manual For vehicles with gasoline engines please read this Gasoline Use of the recommended fuel is an important part of the proper maintenance of this vehicle To help keep the engine clean and maintain optimum vehicle performance we recommend the use of gasoline advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Look for the TOP TIER label on the fuel pump to ensure gasoline meets enhanced detergency standards developed by auto companies A list of marketers providing TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline can be found at www toptiergas com TOP GO TIER Detergent Gasoline CATEGORIE GxO SUPERIEURE Essences D tergentes The 8th digit of the Vehicle Identification Number VIN shows the code letter or number that identifies the vehicle s engine The VIN is at the top left of the instrument panel See Vehicle Identification Number VIN on page 6 103 If the vehicle has the 4 8L V8 engine VIN Code A the 5 3L V8 engine VIN Code 4 or the 6 0L V8 engin
373. the dome lamps remain off when a door is opened Press the button again to return it to the extended position so that the dome lamps come on when a door is opened Entry Exit Lighting The vehicle has an illuminated entry exit feature The dome lamps come on if the dome override button is in the out position when a door is opened or the key is removed from the ignition Reading Lamps For vehicles with reading lamps press the button located next to each lamp to turn it on or off The vehicle may also have reading lamps in other locations The lamps cannot be adjusted Electric Power Management The vehicle has Electric Power Management EPM that estimates the battery s temperature and state of charge It then adjusts the voltage for best performance and extended life of the battery When the battery s state of charge is low the voltage is raised slightly to quickly bring the charge back up When the state of charge is high the voltage is lowered slightly to prevent overcharging If the vehicle has a voltmeter gage or a voltage display on the Driver Information Center DIC you may see the voltage move up or down This is normal If there is a problem an alert will be displayed The battery can be discharged at idle if the electrical loads are very high This is true for all vehicles This is because the generator alternator may not be spinning fast enough at idle to produce all the power that is needed for very high ele
374. the filler caps are on properly Then lift the hood to relieve pressure on the hood prop Remove the hood prop from the slot in the hood and return the prop to its retainer Let the hood down and close it firmly Engine Compartment Overview If the vehicle has a diesel engine see the maintenance schedule section in the DURAMAX Diesel manual When the hood is lifted la am We M US cae ee f iin E RS s r api 2 MIN 6 14 gt Battery See Battery on page 6 40 Radiator Pressure Cap See Cooling System on page 6 26 Coolant Recovery Tank See Cooling System on page 6 26 Automatic Transmission Fluid Dipstick See Checking the Fluid Level under Automatic Transmission Fluid 4 Speed Transmission on page 6 20 or Automatic Transmission Fluid 6 Speed Transmission on page 6 23 Engine Oil Fill Cap See When to Add Engine Oil under Engine Oil on page 6 15 Engine Oil Dipstick See Checking Engine Oil under Engine Oil on page 6 15 Engine Air Cleaner Filter See Engine Air Cleaner Filter on page 6 19 Power Steering Fluid Reservoir See Power Steering Fluid on page 6 35 Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir See Brake Fluid under Brakes on page 6 37 Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir See Adding Washer Fluid under Windshield Washer Fluid on page 6 36 Engine Oil For diesel engine vehicle
375. the lower clip 6 52 4 Remove the three nuts on the taillamp assembly 5 Remove the taillamp assembly from the vehicle 6 Remove the bulb socket by squeezing the tab on the side of the socket while turning it counterclockwise 7 Turn the bulb counterclockwise to remove it 8 Turn the bulb clockwise to install it in the socket 9 Reinstall the bulb socket by squeezing the tab while turning it clockwise 10 Reinstall the taillamp assembly and three nuts on the vehicle 11 Slide the taillamp slightly downward to reengage the lower clip Remove the two screws C securing the license plate bulb assembly B 12 Push the taillamp straight forward to reengage 2 Turn the bulb socket A counterclockwise and pull the studs the bulb straight out of the socket 13 Reinstall the two inboard nuts from the inside of the 3 Install the new bulb taillamp assembly 4 Reverse steps 1 and 2 to reinstall the license plate bulb assembly Replacement Bulbs Exterior Lamp Bulb Number Back up Rear Parking Stoplamp and Turn S anal Lamp 3157 Center High Mounted Stop Lamp CHMSL Front Parking and Turn Signal Lamp 3157KX Front Sidemarker Lamp License Plate Lamp To replace one of these bulbs License Plate Lamp Headlamps Composite High Beam Headlamp 9005 Composite Low Beam Headlamp 9006GS Sealed Beam Headlamp H6054 For replacement bulbs not listed here contact your dealer retail
376. the pushbutton positioned under the desired label Turn the 44 knob clockwise or counterclockwise to adjust the highlighted setting To quickly adjust balance or fade to the middle position press the pushbutton positioned under the BAL or FADE label for more than two seconds A beep sounds and the level adjusts to the middle position To quickly adjust all speaker and tone controls to the middle position press the 44 knob for more than two seconds until a beep sounds Finding a Category CAT Station CAT Category The CAT button is used to find XM stations while the radio is in the XM mode XM is a satellite radio service that is based in the United States and Canada only For this vehicle the XM function is not available Radio Messages Calibration Error The audio system has been calibrated for the vehicle from the factory If Calibration Error displays it means that the radio has not been configured properly for the vehicle and it must be returned to your dealer retailer for service Locked or Loc One of these messages will display when the THEFTLOCK system has locked up the radio Take the vehicle to your dealer retailer for service If any error occurs repeatealy or if an error cannot be corrected contact your dealer retailer Playing a CD Single CD Player Insert a CD partway into the slot label side up The player pulls it in and the CD should begin playing 4 67 Playing a CD s Six Disc CD
377. the right front passenger frontal airbag Additional Factors Affecting System Operation Safety belts help keep the passenger in position on the If a person of adult size is sitting in the right front seat during vehicle maneuvers and braking which passenger seat but the off indicator is lit it could be helps the passenger sensing system maintain the because that person is not sitting properly in the seat passenger airbag status See Safety Belts and Child Restraints in the Index for additional information about the importance of proper restraint use 2 76 A thick layer of additional material such as a blanket or cushion or aftermarket equipment such as seat covers seat heaters and seat massagers can affect how well the passenger sensing system operates We recommend that you not use seat covers or other aftermarket equipment except when approved by GM for your specific vehicle See Adding Equipment to Your Airbag Equipped Vehicle on page 2 78 for more information about modifications that can affect how the system operates The on indicator may be lit if an object such as a briefcase handbag grocery bag laptop or other electronic device is put on an unoccupied seat If this is not desired remove the object from the seat A WARNING Stowing of articles under the passenger seat or between the passenger seat cushion and seatback may interfere with the proper operation of the passenger sensing system
378. the top tether is attached to a top tether anchor disconnect it If you turned the airbag off with the switch turn on the right front passenger airbag when you remove the child restraint from the vehicle unless the person who will be sitting there is a member of a passenger airbag risk group See Airbag Off Switch on page 2 69 for more information including important safety information 2 59 Airbag System The vehicle has the following airbag A frontal airbag for the driver The vehicle may have the following airbags A frontal airbag for the right front passenger A roof rail airbag for the driver cargo van A roof rail airbag for the right front passenger position cargo or passenger van equipped with a sliding door If you have a passenger van with a right front passenger roof rail airbag and a sliding door you will also have a separate roof rail airbag for the passenger seated directly behind the right front passenger and the third row outboard passenger position 2 60 A roof rail airbag for the driver passenger seated directly behind the driver and the third row outboard passenger position passenger van equipped with a sliding or hinged door A roof rail airbag for the right front passenger passenger seated directly behind the right front passenger and the third row outboard passenger position passenger van equipped with a hinged door All of the airbags in the vehicle will have the word AIRBA
379. there are many kinds of restraints available for children with special needs A WARNING To reduce the risk of neck and head injury during a crash infants need complete support This is because an infant s neck is not fully developed and its head weighs so much compared with the rest of its body In a crash an infant in a rear facing child restraint settles into the restraint so the crash forces can be distributed across the strongest part of an infant s body the back and shoulders Infants should always be secured in rear facing child restraints A WARNING A young child s hip bones are still so small that the vehicle s regular safety belt may not remain low on the hip bones as it should Instead it may settle up around the child s abdomen In a crash the belt would apply force on a body area that is unprotected by any bony structure This alone could cause serious or fatal injuries To reduce the risk of serious or fatal injuries during a crash young children should always be secured in appropriate child restraints Child Restraint Systems A rear facing infant seat A provides restraint with the seating surface against the back of the infant The harness system holds the infant in place and in a crash acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint 2 37 A forward facing child seat B provides restraint for the child s body with the harness A booster seat C D is a child restra
380. this light comes on briefly when the engine is started It provides information about tire pressures and the Tire Pressure Monitoring System When the Light is On Steady This indicates that one or more of the tires are significantly underinflated A tire pressure message in the Driver Information Center DIC can accompany the light See Driver Information Center DIC on page 4 37 for more information Stop and check the tires as soon as it is safe to do so If underinflated inflate to the proper pressure See Inflation Tire Pressure on page 6 63 for more information When the Light Flashes First and Then is On Steady This indicates that there may be a problem with the Tire Pressure Monitor System The light flashes for about a minute and stays on steady for the remainder of the ignition cycle This sequence repeats with every ignition cycle See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on page 6 66 for more information Malfunction Indicator Lamp Check Engine Light A computer system called OBD II On Board Diagnostics Second Generation monitors operation of the fuel ignition and emission control systems It ensures that emissions are at acceptable levels for the life of the vehicle helping to produce a cleaner environment This light should come on when the ignition is on but the engine is not running as a check to show it is working If it does not have the vehicle serviced by your dealer retailer If the c
381. those wheels are selected You may increase the chance that you will crash and suffer serious injury Only use GM specific wheel and tire Systems developed for your vehicle and have them properly installed by a GM certified technician See Buying New Tires on page 6 73 and Accessories and Modifications on page 6 3 for additional information Uniform Tire Quality Grading Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width For example Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A The following information relates to the system developed by the United States National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA which grades tires by treadwear traction and temperature performance This applies only to vehicles sold in the United States The grades are molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car tires The Uniform Tire Quality Grading UTQG system does not apply to deep tread winter type snow tires space saver or temporary use spare tires tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches 25 to 30 cm or to some limited production tires While the tires available on General Motors passenger cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these grades they must also conform to federal safety requirements and additional General Motors Tire Performance Criteria TPC standards Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate
382. tions to be sure it is secure To remove the child restraint unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and let it return to the stowed position If the top tether is attached to a top tether anchor disconnect it 5 To tighten the belt push down on the child restraint pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor When installing a forward facing child restraint it may be helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt 2 51 Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position With Passenger Sensing System This vehicle has airbags A rear seat is a safer place to secure a forward facing child restraint See Where to Put the Restraint on page 2 40 In addition the vehicle has a passenger sensing system which is designed to turn off the right front passenger frontal airbag under certain conditions See Passenger Sensing System on page 2 72 and Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 4 26 for more information including important safety information A label on the sun visor says Never put a rear facing child seat in the front This is because the risk to the rear facing child is so great if the airbag deploys 2 52 A WARNING A child in a rear facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag inflates This is because the back of the rear facing
383. tire Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum air pressure to which a cold tire can be inflated The maximum air pressure is molded onto the sidewall Maximum Load Rating The load rating for a tire at the maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight The sum of curb weight accessory weight vehicle capacity weight and production options weight Normal Occupant Weight The number of occupants a vehicle is designed to seat multiplied by 150 Ibs 68 kg See Loading the Vehicle on page 5 17 Occupant Distribution Designated seating positions Outward Facing Sidewall The side of an asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that faces outward when mounted on a vehicle The side of the tire that contains a whitewall bears white lettering or bears manufacturer brand and or model name molding that is higher or deeper than the same moldings on the other sidewall of the tire Passenger P Metric Tire A tire used on passenger cars and some light duty trucks and multipurpose vehicles Recommended Inflation Pressure Vehicle manufacturer s recommended tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard See Inflation Tire Pressure on page 6 63 and Loading the Vehicle on page 5 17 Radial Ply Tire A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread Rim A metal support for a tire and upon which the tire bead
384. to turn the rear window defogger on or off The rear window defogger turns off several minutes after the button is pressed If turned on again the defogger will run for several more minutes before turning off The defogger can also be turned off by turning off the engine Do not drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear Notice Do not use a razor blade or sharp object to clear the inside rear window Do not adhere anything to the defogger grid lines in the rear glass These actions may damage the rear defogger Repairs would not be covered by your warranty Outlet Adjustment Use the outlets located near the center and on the sides of the instrument panel to change the direction of airflow Operation Tips Clear away any ice snow or leaves from the air inlets at the base of the windshield that may block the flow of air into your vehicle Use of non GM approved hood deflectors may adversely affect the performance of the system Keep the path under the front seats clear of objects to help circulate the air inside of your vehicle more effectively Rear Heating System AUX The thumbwheel for this system is located in the switchbank below the audio system For vehicles with a rear heating system it lets you adjust the amount of air flowing into the rear of 8 Fan Turn the thumbwheel up or down to increase the vehicle from the front seating area This feature or decrease the amount of heated air sent to the
385. trol to the Q position A warning chime sounds if the driver door is opened while the ignition switch is off and the headlamps are on To change the headlamps from low beam to high beam push the turn signal multifunction lever toward the instrument panel Headlamps on Reminder If a door is open a reminder chime sounds when the headlamps or parking lamps are manually turned on and the key is out of the ignition To turn off the chime turn the headlamp switch to off or auto and then back on or close and re open the door In the auto mode the headlamps turn off once the ignition is in LOCK OFF or may remain on until the headlamp delay ends if enabled in the Driver Information Center DIC See Exit Lighting under DIC Vehicle Customization on page 4 52 Daytime Running Lamps DRL Daytime Running Lamps DRL can make it easier for others to see the front of your vehicle during the day Fully functional daytime running lamps are required on all vehicles first sold in Canada The DRL system comes on in daylight when the following conditions are met The ignition is on The exterior lamps control is in the AUTO position The shift lever is not in P Park The light sensor determines it is daytime When the DRL are on the taillamps sidemarker instrument panel and other lamps will not be on The automatic headlamp system automatically switches from DRL to the headlamps depending on the darkness of the
386. ts in a rear seat even if the airbag is off If you secure a forward facing child restraint in the right front seat always move the front passenger seat as far back as it will go It is better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat If the vehicle does not have a rear seat that will accommodate a rear facing child restraint a rear facing child restraint should not be installed in the vehicle even if the airbag is off The passenger sensing system is designed to turn off the right front passenger frontal airbag if The right front passenger seat is unoccupied The system determines that an infant is present in a rear facing infant seat The system determines that a small child is present in a child restraint The system determines that a small child is present in a booster seat A right front passenger takes his her weight off of the seat for a period of time The right front passenger seat is occupied by a smaller person such as a child who has outgrown child restraints Or if there is a critical problem with the airbag system or the passenger sensing system When the passenger sensing system has turned off the right front passenger frontal airbag the off indicator will light and stay lit to remind you that the airbag is off See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 4 26 2 73 The passenger sensing system is designed to turn on may inflate the right front passenger frontal airbag anyt
387. ts on the child restraint to the lower anchors If the position you are using does not have a headrest or head restraint and you are using a single tether route the tether over the seatback 2 47 2 48 If the position you are using does not have a headrest or head restraint and you are using a dual tether route the tether over the seatback If the position you are using has an integrated headrest or head restraint and you are using a dual tether route the tether around the headrest or head restraint If the position you are using has an integrated headrest or head restraint and you are using a single tether route the tether over the headrest or head restraint 3 Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Seat Position When securing a child restraint in a rear seating position study the instructions that came with the child restraint to make sure it is compatible with this vehicle If the child restraint has the LATCH system see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children LATCH on page 2 42 for how and where to install the child restraint using LATCH If a child restraint is secured in the vehicle using a safety belt and it uses a top tether see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children LATCH on page 2 42 for top tether anchor locations Do not secure a child seat in a position without a top tether anchor if a national
388. u can see cord or fabric showing through the tire s rubber The tread or sidewall is cracked cut or snagged deep enough to show cord or fabric The tire has a bump bulge or split The tire has a puncture cut or other damage that cannot be repaired well because of the size or location of the damage The rubber in tires degrades over time even if they are not being used This is also true for the spare tire if your vehicle has one Multiple conditions affect how fast this aging takes place including temperatures loading conditions and inflation pressure maintenance With proper care and maintenance tires will typically wear out before they degrade due to age If you are unsure about the need to replace your tires as they get older consult the tire manufacturer for more information Buying New Tires GM has developed and matched specific tires for your vehicle The original equipment tires installed on your vehicle when it was new were designed to meet General Motors Tire Performance Criteria Specification TPC spec system rating If you need replacement tires GM strongly recommends that you get tires with the same TPC Spec rating This way your vehicle will continue to have tires that are designed to give the same performance and vehicle safety during normal use as the original tires GM s exclusive TPC Spec system considers over a dozen critical specifications that impact the overall performance of your vehi
389. u may be charged at the end of your lease for poor quality repairs If a Crash Occurs Here is what to do if you are involved in a crash Check to make sure that you are all right If you are uninjured make sure that no one else in your vehicle or the other vehicle is injured e If there has been an injury call emergency services for help Do not leave the scene of a crash until all matters have been taken care of Move your vehicle only if its position puts you in danger or you are instructed to move it by a police officer Give only the necessary and requested information to police and other parties involved in the crash Do not discuss your personal condition mental frame of mind or anything unrelated to the crash This will help guard against post crash legal action If you need roadside assistance call GM Roadside Assistance See Roadside Assistance Program on page 8 6 for more information If your vehicle cannot be driven know where the towing service will be taking it Get a card from the tow truck operator or write down the driver s name the service s name and the phone number Remove any valuables from your vehicle before it is towed away Make sure this includes your insurance information and registration if you keep these items in your vehicle Gather the important information you will need from the other driver Things like name address phone number driver s license number vehicle license plate
390. uckled and the vehicle is in motion 2 If the passenger safety belt is buckled neither the chime nor the light comes on The front passenger safety belt warning light and chime may turn on if an object is put on the seat such as a briefcase handbag grocery bag laptop or other electronic device To turn off the warning light and or chime remove the object from the seat or buckle the safety belt Airbag Readiness Light The system checks the airbag s electrical system for possible malfunctions If the light stays on it indicates there is an electrical problem The system check includes the airbag sensor the pretensioners the airbag modules the wiring and the crash sensing and diagnostic module For more information on the airbag system see Airbag System on page 2 60 4 23 The airbag readiness light flashes for a few seconds when the engine is started If the light does not come on then have it fixed immediately ZN WARNING If the airbag readiness light stays on after the vehicle is started or comes on while driving it means the airbag system might not be working properly The airbags in the vehicle might not inflate in a crash or they could even inflate without a crash To help avoid injury have the vehicle serviced right away For vehicles with a remote start the airbag readiness light will stay on until the driver places the ignition switch to the ON RUN position If there is a problem with the a
391. udio files the directory displays as the CD label All files contained directly under the root directory are accessed prior to any root directory folders However playlists Px are always accessed before root folders or files If a disc contains both uncompressed CD audio CDA and MP3 files a folder under the root directory called CD accesses all of the CD audio tracks on the disc Empty Directory or Folder If a root directory or a folder exists somewhere in the file structure that contains only folders subfolders and no compressed files directly beneath them the player advances to the next folder in the file structure that contains compressed audio files The empty folder does not display No Folder When the CD contains only compressed files the files are located under the root folder The next and previous folder function does not display on a CD that was recorded without folders or playlists When the CD contains only playlists and compressed audio files but no folders all files are located under the root folder The folder down and up buttons search playlists Px first and then goes to the root folder 4 73 Order of Play Tracks recorded to the CD R or CD RW are played in the following order Play begins from the first track in the first playlist and continues sequentially through all tracks in each playlist When the last track of the last playlist has played play continues from the first track of
392. udo etoettec iege to 4 60 Oil Pressure Light sssse een 4 35 Radio acca crete NN NEN 4 62 Security Light eee eee eee 4 35 Using an MBPS rooted teretes 4 72 Cruise Control Light sse 4 36 Theft Deterrent Feature eese 4 76 Highbeam On Light Tm 4 36 Audio Steering Wheel Controls 4 77 Tow Haul Mode Light sse eee 4 36 Radio Reception scicisinestrcectiandaneoninestemannnnesyen 4 77 Fuel Gage eeraa a E EE 4 36 Fixed Mast Antenna ccccccccccccccccccecccccccececceceeeee 4 78 Instrument Panel Overview Hazard Warning Flashers A Hazard Warning Flasher Press this button located on top of the steering column to make the front and rear turn signal lamps flash on and off This warns others that you are having trouble Press again to turn the flashers off When the hazard warning flashers are on the vehicle s turn signals will not work Horn Press the horn symbol in the middle of the steering wheel to sound the horn Tilt Wheel For vehicles with a tilt steering wheel the lever is located on the left side of the steering column To adjust the steering wheel 1 Pull the lever to move the steering wheel up or down into a comfortable position 2 Release the lever to lock the steering wheel in place Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving Turn Signal Multifunction Lever The lever on the left side of the steering column includes the fo
393. uid Notice Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake hydraulic system parts For example just a few drops of mineral based oil such as engine oil in the brake hydraulic system can damage brake hydraulic system parts so badly that they will have to be replaced Do not let someone put in the wrong kind of fluid If brake fluid is spilled on the vehicle s painted surfaces the paint finish can be damaged Be careful not to spill brake fluid on the vehicle If you do wash it off immediately See Washing Your Vehicle on page 6 99 Brake Wear This vehicle has disc brakes Disc brake pads have built in wear indicators that make a high pitched warning sound when the brake pads are worn and new pads are needed The sound can come and go or be heard all the time the vehicle is moving except when applying the brake pedal firmly ZN WARNING The brake wear warning sound means that soon the brakes will not work well That could lead to an accident When the brake wear warning sound is heard have the vehicle serviced Notice Continuing to drive with worn out brake pads could result in costly brake repair Some driving conditions or climates can cause a brake squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly applied This does not mean something is wrong with the brakes Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help prevent brake pulsation When tires are rotated inspect brake pads for wear and evenly tight
394. ulled out from under the vehicle If the spare tire does not lower to the ground the secondary latch is engaged causing the tire not to lower See Secondary Latch System on page 6 92 4 When the tire has been lowered pull the tire toward you so you can reach the tire retainer and pull it up through the wheel opening If you have a vehicle which was completed from a cab and chassis refer to the information from body supplier installer The spare tire is a full size tire like the other tires on the vehicle 5 Put the spare tire near the flat tire 6 84 Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire If your vehicle has plastic wheel nut caps loosen them by turning the wheel wrench counterclockwise The wheel nut caps are designed to remain with the center cap Remove the center cap If the wheel has a smooth center piece place the chisel end of the wheel wrench in the slot on the wheel and gently pry it out 1 2 Do a safety check before proceeding See Changing a Flat Tire on page 6 80 for more information Loosen all the wheel nuts with the wheel wrench Do not remove them yet Assemble the jack and tools Front Flat Assemble the jack A together with the jack handle B 1 or 2 jack handle extensions D and the wheel wrench E Rear Flat Assemble the jack A together with the jack handle B 2 jack handle extensions D and the wheel wrench E 6 85 O O Front Pos
395. ulletins Service Bulletins give additional technical service information needed to knowledgeably service General Motors cars and trucks Each bulletin contains instructions to assist in the diagnosis and service of your vehicle Owner Information Owner publications are written specifically for owners and intended to provide basic operational information about the vehicle The owner manual includes the Maintenance Schedule for all models In Portfolio Includes a Portfolio Owner Manual and Warranty Booklet RETAIL SELL PRICE 35 00 U S plus processing fee Without Portfolio Owner Manual only RETAIL SELL PRICE 25 00 U S plus processing fee Current and Past Model Order Forms Technical Service Bulletins and Manuals are available for current and past model GM vehicles To request an order form specify year and model name of the vehicle ORDER TOLL FREE 1 800 551 4123 Monday Friday 8 00 AM 6 00 PM Eastern Time For Credit Card Orders Only VISA MasterCard Discover visit Helm Inc on the World Wide Web at helminc com Or you can write to Helm Incorporated P O Box 07130 Detroit MI 48207 Prices are subject to change without notice and without incurring obligation Allow ample time for delivery Note to Canadian Customers All listed prices are quoted in U S funds Canadian residents are to make checks payable in U S funds Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy Your GM vehicle has a number of sop
396. umbers following DOT code are the Tire Identification Number TIN The TIN shows the manufacturer and plant code tire size and date the tire was manufactured The TIN is molded onto both sides of the tire although only one side may have the date of manufacture 6 57 F Tire Ply Material The type of cord and number of plies in the sidewall and under the tread G Single Tire Maximum Load Maximum load that can be carried and the maximum pressure needed to support that load when used as a single For information on recommended tire pressure see nflation Tire Pressure on page 6 63 and Loading the Vehicle on page 5 17 Tire Size The following examples show the different parts of a tire size P245 75R16 109S Passenger P Metric Tire A Passenger P Metric Tire The United States version of a metric tire sizing system The letter P as the first character in the tire size means a passenger vehicle tire engineered to standards set by the U S Tire and Rim Association 6 58 B Tire Width The three digit number indicates the tire section width in millimeters from sidewall to sidewall C Aspect Ratio A two digit number that indicates the tire height to width measurements For example if the tire size aspect ratio is 75 as shown in item C of the illustration it would mean that the tire s sidewall is 75 percent as high as it is wide D Construction Code A letter code is used to indicate the type of
397. uminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated Accordingly when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale When the system detects a malfunction the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start ups as long as the malfunction exists When the malfunction indicator is illuminated the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle
398. urity locks are located on the front portion of the 60 40 side swing out door or the side sliding door For the 60 40 side swing out door move the button to the right for the driver side door or to the left for the passenger side door to engage e the security feature 60 40 Swing Out Side Door Driver Side shown Passenger Side similar Move the button to the left for the driver side door or to the right for the passenger side door to return the door locks to normal operation Side Sliding Door For the side sliding door move the button up to engage the security feature Move the button down to return the door locks to normal operation Lockout Protection This feature protects you from locking the key in the vehicle when the key is in the ignition and a door is open If the power lock switch is pressed when either the driver passenger or rear door is open all the doors will lock and then the driver door will unlock This feature does not include the side cargo door Sliding Side Door To open the sliding side door from the outside pull the handle toward the rear of the vehicle and slide the door open To close the sliding side door from the outside use the handle to slide the door toward the front of the vehicle When the door is closed it will be flush with the side of the body 60 40 Swing Out Side Door To open the sliding side door from the inside pull the handle toward the rear of t
399. urn signal lever all the way toward you to change the headlamps from low to high beam Then release it This instrument panel cluster light comes on when the high beam headlamps are on Flash to Pass This feature is used to signal to the vehicle ahead that you want to pass If the headlamps are off or in the low beam position pull the turn signal lever toward you to momentarily switch to high beams Release the lever to turn the high beam headlamps off Windshield Wipers The windshield wiper control is located on the multifunction lever on the left side of the steering wheel Turn the band with X on it to select the wiper speed S Mist Single wipe hold the band on amp then release For several wipes hold the band on amp 7 longer i Adjustable Interval Wipes Turn the band to adjust the delay time between wipes Turn the band up for more frequent wipes or down for less frequent wipes WEB Low Speed Slow wipes GB High Speed Fast wipes Q Off Turns the windshield wipers off When driving during the day and the wipers are activated the head lamps automatically turn on after completing eight wipe cycles Clear ice and snow from the wiper blades before using them If frozen to the windshield carefully loosen or thaw them Damaged blades should be replaced Windshield Washer The windshield wiper paddle is located on top of the multifunction lever WV Washer Fluid Push the paddle to spray
400. urned This spray can happen if the tank is nearly full and is more likely in hot weather Open the fuel cap slowly and wait for any hiss noise to stop Then unscrew the cap all the way Be careful not to spill fuel Do not top off or overfill the tank and wait a few seconds after you have finished pumping before removing the nozzle Clean fuel from painted surfaces as soon as possible See Washing Your Vehicle on page 6 99 When replacing the fuel cap turn it clockwise until it clicks Make sure the cap is fully installed The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed This would allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 4 31 A WARNING If a fire starts while you are refueling do not remove the nozzle Shut off the flow of fuel by shutting off the pump or by notifying the station attendant Leave the area immediately Notice f you need a new fuel cap be sure to get the right type Your dealer retailer can get one for you If you get the wrong type it may not fit properly This may cause the malfunction indicator lamp to light and may damage the fuel tank and emissions system See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 4 31 Filling a Portable Fuel Container Checking Things Under the Hood Z WARNING Z WARNING Things that burn can get on hot engine or fuel operated heater FOH parts and start a fire Never fill a portab
401. urning the pressure cap If you hear a hiss wait for that to stop A hiss means there is still some pressure left Then keep turning the pressure cap but now push down as you turn it Remove the pressure cap 3 Fill the radiator with the proper DEX COOL coolant mixture up to the base of the filler neck See Engine Coolant on page 6 28 for more information about the proper coolant mixture 6 31 Vr ao CNN 4 Then fill the coolant recovery tank to the COLD 6 Start the engine and let it run until you can feel the FILL mark upper radiator hose getting hot Watch out for the engine cooling fan SF UL nE cap uuo oi the GOQACETSQOUSBE tale Dut 7 By this time the coolant level inside the radiator leave ine radiator pressure cap ot filler neck may be lower If the level is lower add more of the proper DEX COOL coolant mixture through the filler neck until the level reaches the base of the filler neck 8 Then replace the pressure cap At any time during this procedure if coolant begins to flow out of the filler neck reinstall the pressure cap Notice f the pressure cap is not tightly installed coolant loss and possible engine damage may occur Be sure the cap is properly and tightly secured 6 32 Engine Overheating If your vehicle has the DURAMAX Diesel engine see the DURAMAX Diesel manual for more information The vehicle has an indicator to warn of engine overheating You will find an
402. uxiliary StopLamps 69 Spare 0 0 70 Spare 71 FuelHeater _ _ _ 72 Body Control Module6 73 Lighter Data Link Connection 75 VG Fuel Injectors 76 X Spare 77 Oxygen Sensor 2 Pre 78 Engine Control Module Powertrain 79 Even Ignition Injectors 61 62 63 64 65 67 70 71 72 73 75 76 77 78 79 JCaseFuse Usage Fuel System Control Module Battery Rey Usge Front Blower 60 Fan Control 6 109 Capacities and Specifications If your vehicle has the DURAMAX Diesel engine see the DURAMAX Diesel manual for more information The following approximate capacities are given in metric and English conversions See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 7 11 for more information Application For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge amount see the refrigerant caution label located under the hood See your dealer retailer for more information XT 24d EEE Sg 54d HF Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a 6 110 Application 159 inch 4 039 mm wheelbase or 177 inch 4 496 mm wheelbase only Transmission Fluid Pan Removal and Filter Replacement 4 SPD 4L60 E 6 SPD 6L90 Wheel Nut Torque 190 Nem 140 ft Ib All capacities are approximate When adding be sure to fill to the approximate level as recommended in this manual Recheck fluid level after filling Engine Specifications Enge
403. ve repair or replacement Paying attention to the warning lights and gages could prevent injury Warning lights come on when there might be or there is a problem with one of the vehicle s functions Some warning lights come on briefly when the engine is started to indicate they are working Gages can indicate when there might be or there is a problem with one of the vehicle s functions Often gages and warning lights work together to indicate a problem with the vehicle When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on while driving or when one of the gages shows there could be a problem check the section that explains what to do Follow this manual s advice Waiting to do repairs can be costly and even dangerous Instrument Panel Cluster 3 7O SS uIZ 75 2 20 6099 00 o BO 840 kmn 1207 United States 4 Speed Version shown 6 Speed and Canada similar 4 21 Speedometer and Odometer The speedometer shows the vehicle speed in both miles per hour mph and kilometers per hour km h The odometer shows how far the vehicle has been driven in either miles used in the United States or kilometers used in Canada This vehicle has a tamper resistant odometer The digital odometer will read 999 999 if it is turned back If the vehicle needs a new odometer installed it must be set to the mileage total of the old odometer If that is not possible then it must be set at zero and a label must be put on the driver
404. ven make the vehicle move The windows will function with the keys in the ignition and children could be seriously injured or killed if caught in the path of a closing window Do not leave the keys in a vehicle with children The key can be used for the ignition and all door locks The key has a bar coded key tag that the dealer retailer or qualified locksmith can use to make new keys Store this information in a safe place not in your vehicle Notice f you ever lock your keys in the vehicle you may have to damage the vehicle to get in Be sure you have spare keys If you are locked out of your vehicle call Roadside Assistance Center See Roadside Assistance Program on page 8 6 3 3 Remote Keyless Entry RKE System See Radio Frequency Statement on page 8 18 for information regarding Part 15 of the Federal Communications Commission FCC Rules and RSS 210 211 of Industry and Science Canada Changes or modifications to this system by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment If there is a decrease in the RKE operating range try this Check the distance The transmitter may be too far from the vehicle Stand closer during rainy or snowy weather Check the location Other vehicles or objects may be blocking the signal Take a few steps to the left or right hold the transmitter higher and try again Check the transmitter s battery See Battery Replacement lat
405. volved in individual problems between you your dealer or General Motors To contact NHTSA you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 TTY 1 800 424 9153 go to http www safercar gov or write to Administrator NHTSA 1200 New Jersey Avenue S E Washington D C 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http www safercar gov Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian Government If you live in Canada and you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect notify Transport Canada immediately in addition to notifying General Motors of Canada Limited Call them at 1 800 333 0510 or write to Transport Canada Road Safety Branch 2780 Sheffield Road Ottawa Ontario K1B 3V9 Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors In addition to notifying NHTSA or Transport Canada in a situation like this please notify General Motors Call 1 800 GMC 8782 1 800 462 8782 or write GMC Customer Assistance Center P O Box 33172 Detroit MI 48232 5172 In Canada call 1 800 263 3777 English or 1 800 263 7854 French or write General Motors of Canada Limited Customer Communication Centre CA1 163 005 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa Ontario L1H 8P7 Service Publications Ordering Information Service Manuals Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair information on engines transmission axle suspension brakes electrical steering body etc Service B
406. weather n heavy traffic and hot weather While pulling a trailer After driving under these conditions a hot check can be performed The fluid should be Hot which is 71 C to 93 C 160 F to 200 F A cold fluid level check can be performed after the vehicle has been sitting for eight hours or more with the engine Off but this is used only as a reference Let 6 24 the engine run at idle for five minutes if outside temperatures is between 15 C to 32 C 60 F to 90 F Should the fluid level be low during this cold check the fluid must be checked Warm or Hot before adding fluid If the outside temperature is colder than 15 C 60 F or hotter than 32 C 90 F a cold check cannot be performed A warm fluid level check can be performed by driving the vehicle under lightly loaded conditions and outside temperatures between 10 C to 27 C 50 F to 80 F The vehicle should be driven for at least 15 miles before performing a warm check Checking the fluid Warm or Hot will give a more accurate reading of the fluid level than a cold check Because the vehicle is equipped with a high efficiency air to oil cooler the transmission fluid temperature may not reach the required Hot fluid level checking temperature under normal lightly loaded driving vehicle conditions Checking the Fluid Level Prepare the vehicle as follows 1 Park the vehicle on a level place Keep the engine running 2 With the parking brake appl
407. wn Protection seeeseeeesseese 4 14 Belt Routing Engine eseesessues 7 14 Brake Emergencies miresine eaa E 5 5 cuc EE 6 37 jue uc E 5 4 num 3 35 System Warning Light a 4 28 Braking sarera 5 3 Braking in Emergencies siciriverissrorisnsirrisnastipniais 5 5 Break In New Vehicle eese 3 22 Bulb Replacement sees 6 53 Center High Mounted Stoplamp CHMSL 6 51 Front Turn Signal Sidemarker and Parking ERSTE IE LS 6 51 Halogen Bulbs 1i 6 49 Headlamps i oerte 6 48 6 49 License Plate Lamps sense 6 53 Tailan pS S 6 52 Buying New Tires eee 6 73 Calibration iter eraot ek er crt ned 4 43 California Perchlorate Materials Requirements 6 4 MAITIBIQ cereos nuo Sene Rer DUI p DEDERIS Rite sRe TEAMS 6 4 California Fueli 2 irent rte Deme ant 6 7 Canadian Owners si icviad nevtsihetricdas ter Ee eben iii Capacities and Specifications 6 110 Carbon Monoxide Engine Exhaust eni reeret niens 3 38 Winter DIVING rca etr eere tsm pe nemine E 5 14 Care of Safety Belts ssssssssseeeee 6 99 Cargo Door Relocking ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eters 3 9 ecd 4 72 Center High Mounted Stoplamp CHMSL 6 51 Chains Tre icit ten cR ter tine 6 78 Charging System Light
408. y injured by not wearing the lap shoulder belt properly In a crash you would not be restrained by the shoulder belt Your body could move too far forward increasing the chance of head and neck injury You might also slide under the lap belt The belt force would then be applied right on the abdomen That could cause serious or fatal injuries The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest A The belt is behind the body 2 22 Q What is wrong with this 7 A WARNING You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt In a crash you would not have the full width of the belt to spread impact forces If a belt is twisted make it straight so it can work properly or ask your dealer retailer to fix it A The belt is twisted across the body 2 23 Lap Shoulder Belt All seating positions in the vehicle have a lap shoulder belt If you are using a rear seating position with a detachable safety belt and the safety belt is not attached see Rear Seat Operation on page 2 6 for instruction on reconnecting the safety belt to the mini buckle The following instructions explain how to wear a lap shoulder belt properly 1 Adjust the seat if the seat is adjustable so you can sit up straight To see how see Seats in the Index 2 Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you Do not let it get twisted The lap shoulder belt may lock if you pull
409. y limited period of time from the date of vehicle purchase lease For more details or to determine your vehicle s eligibility visit gmmobility com or call the GM Mobility Assistance Center at 1 800 323 9935 Text telephone TTY users call 1 800 833 9935 General Motors of Canada also has a Mobility Program Call 1 800 GM DRIVE 463 7483 for details TTY users call 1 800 263 3830 Roadside Assistance Program For U S purchased vehicles call 1 800 GMC 8782 1 800 462 8782 Text telephone TTY 1 888 889 2438 For Canadian purchased vehicles call 1 800 268 6800 Service is available 24 hours a day 365 days a year Calling for Assistance When calling Roadside Assistance have the following information ready Your name home address and home telephone number Telephone number of your location Location of the vehicle Model year color and license plate number of the vehicle Odometer reading Vehicle Identification Number VIN and delivery date of the vehicle Description of the problem Coverage Services are provided up to 5 years 100 000 miles 160 000 km whichever comes first In the U S anyone driving the vehicle is covered In Canada a person driving the vehicle without permission from the owner is not covered Roadside Assistance is not a part of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty GMC and General Motors of Canada Limited reserve the right to make any changes or discontinue the Roads
410. ze illustration later in this section for more detail 6 56 B TPC Spec Tire Performance Criteria Specification Original equipment tires designed to GM s specific tire performance criteria have a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall GM s TPC specifications meet or exceed all federal safety guidelines C DOT Department of Transportation The Department of Transportation DOT code indicates that the tire is in compliance with the U S Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle Safety Standards D Tire Identification Number TIN The letters and numbers following DOT code are the Tire Identification Number TIN The TIN shows the manufacturer and plant code tire size and date the tire was manufactured The TIN is molded onto both sides of the tire although only one side may have the date of manufacture E Tire Ply Material The type of cord and number of plies in the sidewall and under the tread F Uniform Tire Quality Grading UTQG Tire manufacturers are required to grade tires based on three performance factors treadwear traction and temperature resistance For more information see Uniform Tire Quality Grading on page 6 75 G Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit Maximum load that can be carried and the maximum pressure needed to support that load For information on recommended tire pressure see Inflation Tire Pressure on page 6 63 and Loading the Vehicle on page 5 17 SPEC 201

2010 GMC Savana Owner Manual - Dealer e

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents